(2 X 660 MW )Coal Based Thermal Power Pla

Shapoorji Pallonji Energy (Gujarat) Pvt Ltd.

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) (2 X 660 MW )Coal Based Thermal Power Plant

At Villages Kaj / Nanavada in Kodinar Taluk in Junagadh District Gujarat

Draft Final Report

February 2011

Table of Contents

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION 1.1 PREAMBLE 1 1.2 PROJECT PROPONENT 4 1.3 PROPOSED PROJECT 4 1.4 PROJECT JUSTIFICATION 5 1.5 SUPPORTIVE RESOURCE BASE 6 1.6 SCOPE OF THE STUDY 6 1.7 STRUCTURE OF THE REPORT 12 CHAPTER 2: PROJECT DESCRIPTION 2.1 PROJECT LOCATION 14 2.2 PROCESS SELECTION 16 2.3 PROCESS DESCRIPTION 21 2.3.1 STEAM GENERATING UNIT 21 2.3.2 TURBINE GENERATOR UNIT 21 2.3.3 DE-AERATING HEATER AND CLOSED HEATERS 22 2.3.4 CONDENSING EQUIPMENT 22 2.3.5 AUXILIARY STEAM SYSTEM AND AUXILIARY BOILER 22 2.4 COAL HANDLING SYSTEM 23 2.5 FUEL OIL SYSTEM 26 2.6 PLANT WATER SYSTEM 27 2.7 ASH HANDLING SYSTEM 28 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS AUXILIARIES 29 2.8.1 HYDROGEN GENERATION PLANT 29 2.8.2 CONDENSATE POLISHING UNIT 30 2.8.3 TURBINE OIL PURIFICATION SYSTEM 30 2.8.4 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM 30 2.8.5 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 30 2.8.6 POLLUTION MONITORING SYSTEM 31 2.8.7 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 31 2.8.8 CONSTRUCTION PHASE ACTIVITIES 32 2.9 SOURCES OF POLLUTION 34 2.9.1 EMISSION FROM STACK 34 2.9.2 WASTEWATER 34 2.10 POLLUTION MITIGATION SYSTEM 35 2.10.1 ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATORS 35 2.10.2 CHIMNEY 35 2.10.3 SPACE FOR FLUE GAS DESULFURIZATION 36 2.10.4 EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT 36 2.11 POWER EVACUATION 36 CHAPTER 3: DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING ENVIRONMENT 3.1 INTRODUCTION 37 3.2 STUDY AREA 37 3.3 COMPONENTS OF BASELINE STUDY 37 3.4 METHODOLOGY 38

Table of Contents

3.5 STATUS OF BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY 38 3.5.1 PHYSIOGRAPHY AND TOPOGRAPHY 38 3.5.2 GEOLOGY & SOIL 38 3.5.2.1 SOIL QUALITY 41 3.5.2.2 SOIL QUALITY AT SITE 45 3.5.3 CLIMATE AND METEOROLOGY 46 3.5.4 AIR ENVIRONMENT 48 3.5.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT 54 3.5.6 HYDROLOGY OF THE SITE 56 3.5.7 SURFACE WATER QUALITY 57 3.5.7.1 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION 57 3.5.8 GROUNDWATER QUALITY 65 3.5.8.1 GROUNDWATER QUALITY MONITORING 65 3.5.9 LAND USE AND LAND COVER 70 3.5.10 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT 72 3.5.11 SOCIO-ECONOMIC PATTERN 97 3.5.12 COMMON PROPERTY RESOURCES 107 CHAPTER 4: IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATION MEASURES 4.1 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACTS 110 4.2 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS 111 4.2.1 AIR QUALITY 111 4.2.2 NOISE LEVELS 113 4.2.3 WATER QUALITY 114 4.2.4 LAND USE 115 4.2.5 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT 116 4.2.6 IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE OF MARINE OUTFALL 117 4.3 OPERATIONAL PHASE IMPACTS 117 4.3.1 AIR QUALITY 117 4.3.2 NOISE LEVEL 127 4.3.3 WATER QUALITY 129 4.3.3.1 WASTEWATER MANAGEMENT AND IMPACTS 131 4.3.4 SEAWATER INTAKE AND MARINE OUTFALL 131 4.3.4 LAND USE PATTERN 132 4.3.5 ASH MANAGEMENT 133 4.3.6 TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGY (WITHIN PLANT AREA) 133 4.3.7 SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTES 143 4.3.8 DOMESTIC SOLID WASTES 144 4.3.9 INFRASTRUCTURE 144 4.3.10 SUMMARY 145 CHAPTER 5: ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PORGRAMME 5.1 INTRODUCTION 149 5.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME 149 5.3 MONITORING PLAN 152 5.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCUREMENT SCHEDULES 152 CHAPTER 6: ADDITIONAL STUDIES 6.1. SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND R& R ACTION PLAN 154

Table of Contents

6.1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE AREA FOR SOCIAL STUDY 154 6.1.1.1 SOCIOECONOMIC BASELINE CONDITION IN THE STUDY AREA 155 6.1.1.2 GENDER AND AGE PATTERNS OF HOUSEHOLD HEADS 156 6.1.1.3 OCCUPATION OF THE HOUSEHOLD HEAD 157 6.1.1.4 EDUCATION OF THE HOUSEHOLD HEAD 158 6.1.1.5 HOUSEHOLD DEMOGRAPHY 159 6.1.1.6 HOUSEHOLD ANNUAL INCOME AND SAVINGS 160 6.1.1.7 SOURCE INCOME OF HOUSEHOLD 160 6.1.1.8 ANNUAL SAVINGS OF HOUSEHOLD 161 6.1.1.9 HOUSEHOLD LOAN DETAILS 161 6.1.1.10 HOUSEHOLD AMENITIES 162 6.1.1.11 STATUS OF WOMEN IN THE HOUSEHOLD 164 6.1.1.12 STATUS OF WOMEN IN THE HOUSEHOLD LAND POSSESSION 165 6.1.1.13 PERCEPTION ABOUT THE PROJECT 168 6.1.1.14 PERCEPTION ON THE ECONOMIC BENEFIT BROUGHT ABOUT BY THE PROJECT 169 6.1.1.15 ISSUES OF PROJECT AFFECTED PERSONS (PAPS) 169 6.1.2 SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT 170 6.1.3 PROJECT SITE LAND ACQUIREMENT 170 6.1.4 PUBLIC CONSULTATION 171 6.1.5 POTENTIAL SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACTS 173 6.2 RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN 175 6.2.1 IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS IN PROPOSED THERMAL POWER PLANT 175 6.2.1.1 LIGHT DIESEL OIL (LDO) 176 6.2.1.2 HEAVY FUEL OIL (HFO) 176 6.2.1.3 HYDROGEN GAS 176 6.2.1.4 STEAM GENERATOR (BOILER) 177 6.2.2 IDENTIFICATION OF MAJOR HAZARD POTENTIAL AT PROPOSED THERMAL POWER PLANT178 6.2.2.1 MAJOR HAZARD POTENTIAL ASSESSMENT 178 6.2.2.2 HAZARD POTENTIAL OF VARIOUS PLANT SECTIONS 178 6.2.3 HAZARDS DUE TO LOSS OF CONTAINMENT 180 6.2.3.1 ACCIDENT SCENARIO 180 6.2.3.2 CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS AND VULNERABLE ZONE 180 6.2.3.3 RELEASE OF LDO FROM RUPTURE OF 2000 KL CAPACITY TANK 180 6.2.4 RELEASE OF HFO FROM RUPTURE OF TANK OF 1000 KL CAPACITY 183 6.2.4.1 RELEASE OF HYDROGEN FROM 37 KG CYLINDER 185 6.2.5 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY FOR PROPOSED POWER PLANT 186 6.2.6 COAL DUST EMISSIONS FROM COAL HANDLING SYSTEM 186 6.2.7 SAFEGUARDS TO CONTROL DUST EMISSIONS 186 6.2.8 OCCUPATIONAL RISK DUE TO HYDROGEN GAS USED IN GENERATOR COOLING 186 6.2.9 SAFEGUARDS FOR HYDROGEN GENERATION AND HANDLING SYSTEM 187 6.2.9.1 OCCUPATIONAL RISK DUE TO HIGH NOISE GENERATION 187 6.2.10 SAFEGUARDS TO REDUCE THE OCCUPATIONAL RISK DUE TO HIGH NOISE 188 6.3 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN 188 6.3.1.1 EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION 189 6.3.1.2 LEVEL 1 EMERGENCY 189 6.3.1.3 LEVEL 2 EMERGENCY 189

Table of Contents

6.3.1.4 LEVEL 3 EMERGENCY 190 6.3.2 OBJECTIVES AND METHODOLOGY OF DMP PREPARATION 190 6.3.2.1 OBJECTIVE 190 6.3.2.2 METHODOLOGY 190 6.3.3 VULNERABLE ZONE FOR PROPOSED THERMAL POWER PLANT 191 6.3.3.1 SITE MAIN CONTROLLER 191 6.3.3.2 THE SITE INCIDENT CONTROLLER TEAM 191 6.3.3.3 THE AUXILIARY TEAM 191 6.3.3.4 RESPONSIBILITIES OF SITE MAIN CONTROLLER (SMC) 191 6.3.3.5 RESPONSIBILITIES OF SITE INCIDENT CONTROLLER (SIC) 192 6.3.3.6 RESPONSIBILITIES OF AUXILIARY TEAM CONTROLLER (ATC) 192 6.3.3.7 RESPONSIBILITIES OF SIC SUPERVISORS 193 6.3.3.8 RESPONSIBILITIES OF ATC SUPERVISORS 193 6.3.3.9 MEDIA COORDINATOR 193 6.3.3.10 COMMUNICATION FUNCTION 194 6.3.3.11 MEDICAL FUNCTION 194 6.3.3.12 WARNING SYSTEM 195 6.3.3.13 EMERGENCY PLAN INITIATION 195 6.3.4 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 195 6.3.4.1 RAISING ALARM 196 6.3.4.2 DECLARING MAJOR EMERGENCY 196 6.3.4.3 TELEPHONE MESSAGES 197 6.3.4.4 COMMUNICATION OF EMERGENCY 197 6.3.4.5 CONTROL OF EMERGENCY 198 6.3.4.6 CONTROL ROOMS & PLANT SHUTDOWN 199 6.3.4.7 ALL CLEAR SIGNAL 199 6.3.4.8 ACTION ON PLANT 199 6.3.4.9 CO-RELATED ACTIVITIES 199 6.3.4.10 PRE-EMERGENCY ACTIVITIES 199 6.3.5 EMERGENCY TIME ACTIVITIES 203 6.3.6 POST- EMERGENCY ACTIVITIES 204 6.3.7 OFF-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN 204 6.3.7.1 NEED OF THE OFF-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN 204 6.3.7.2 LEGAL AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITY FOR OFF-SITE EMERGENCY RESPONSE 205 6.3.7.3 ROLE OF PLANT MANAGEMENT 206 6.3.7.4 ROLE OF EMERGENCY CO-ORDINATION OFFICER 206 6.3.7.5 ROLE OF THE LOCAL AUTHORITIES 206 6.3.7.6 ROLE OF FIRE AUTHORITIES 207 6.3.7.7 ROLE OF THE POLICE & EVACUATION AUTHORITIES 207 6.3.7.8 ROLE OF HEALTH AUTHORITIES 208 6.3.7.9 ROLE OF THE "MUTUAL AID" AGENCIES 208 6.3.7.10 ROLE OF THE FACTORY DIRECTORATE 208 6.3.7.11 ROLE OF TELEPHONE DEPARTMENT 209 CHAPTER 7: BENEFITS OF THE PROJECT 7.1 NEED OF THE PROJECT 210 7.2 GENERAL BENEFITS 211

Table of Contents

7.3 SOCIAL BENEFITS 211 7.4 TECHNOLOGICAL BENEFITS 212 CHAPTER 8: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 8.1 INTRODUCTION 213 8.2 MANAGING IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION STAGE 213 8.3 SOURCES OF POLLUTION DURING OPERATION STAGE 218 8.4 PROPOSED POLLUTION CONTROL SYSTEM DURING OPERATION STAGE 219 8.4.1 STACKS 222 8.4.2 ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR (ESP) 222 8.4.3 FLUE GAS DESULPHURISATION (FGD) 222 8.4.4 COAL HANDLING SYSTEM 222 8.4.5 COOLING SYSTEM 222 8.4.6 D M PLANT REGENERATION WASTE 223 8.4.7 GUARD POND 223 8.4.8 SEWAGE TREATMENT 223 8.5 ASH HANDLING SYSTEM 223 8.5.1 BOTTOM ASH HANDLING SYSTEM 223 8.5.2 FLY ASH HANDLING SYSTEM 223 8.5.3 ASH SLURRY DISPOSAL SYSTEM 224 8.5.4 ASH UTILIZATION 224 8.5.5 OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY 225 8.5.6 STUDY ZONES FOR MARKET SURVEY 225 8.5.7 METHODOLOGY ADOPTED FOR THE MARKET SURVEY 225 8.5.8 MAJOR FIELD SURVEY FINDINGS AND BASIS FOR DEMAND PROJECTIONS FOR DRY FLY ASH AND BOTTOM ASH 225 8.6 GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT FOR THE PROJECT 230 8.7 GROUNDWATER RECHARGE 235 8.8 PASTURE LAND DEVELOPMENT 235 8.9 HERBAL GARDEN DEVELOPMENT 237 8.10 CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY 238 8.10.1 PROJECT AREA PROFILE 239 8.10.2 SITUATION ANALYSIS 239 8.10.3 OBJECTIVES OF THE PROJECT 239 8.10.4 PROJECT COMPONENTS 239 8.10.5 ENTRY POINT ACTIVITIES 243 8.10.6 WATERSHED DEVELOPMENT 244 8.10.7 ANIMAL HUSBANDRY 245 8.10.8 AGRICULTURE DEVELOPMENT 246 8.10.9 EMPLOYMENT GENERATION IN NON-FARM SECTOR 247 8.10.10 WOMEN IN DEVELOPMENT 247 8.10.11 IMPLEMENTATION OF CSR PLAN 248 8.10.12 BUDGET 250 8.10.13 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY FOR SPEGPL – A MODEL 250 8.11 INSTITUTIONAL SETUP FOR EMP 251 8.12 ENVIRONMENTAL BUDGET 253

Table of Contents

LIST OF TABLES TABLE 1.1 LIST OF CONSULTANT 1 TABLE 1.2 ALL INDIA INSTALLED CAPACITY POWER PLANTS IN MW 5 TABLE 1.3 TERMS OF REFERENCE APPROVED BY MOEF AND COMPLIANCE STATUS 6 TABLE 2.1 PROJECT AT A GLANCE 18 TABLE 2.2 COAL ANALYSIS 25 TABLE 2.3 FUEL ANALYSIS 26 TABLE 3.1 GEOLOGICAL DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED SITE AREA 39 TABLE 3.2 LITHOLOGY OF THE PROPOSED SITE AREA 40 TABLE 3.3 DETAILS OF SOIL QUALITY MONITORING STATIONS 403 TABLE 3.4 ANALYTICAL RESULTS OF SOIL QUALITY 44 TABLE 3.5 DETAILS OF SOIL ANALYSIS FOR SAMPLES COLLECTED FROM SITE 45 TABLE 3.6 MONTHLY AVERAGE OF METEOROLOGICAL DATA (MARCH-MAY, 2010) 47 TABLE 3.7 LIST OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING STATIONS 48 TABLE 3.8(A) CONCENTRATION OF RESPIRABLE SUSPENDED PARTICULATE MATTER (PM10) IN AIR

SAMPLES 49 TABLE 3.8(B) CONCENTRATION OF FINE PARTICULATE MATTER (PM 2.5) IN AIR SAMPLES 50 TABLE 3.8(C) CONCENTRATION OF SULPHUR DIOXIDE IN AIR SAMPLES 51 TABLE 3.8(D) CONCENTRATION OF OXIDES OF NITROGEN IN AIR SAMPLES 52 TABLE 3.8(E) CONCENTRATION OF OZONE (O3) IN AIR SAMPLES 53 TABLE 3.9 DETAILS OF NOISE MONITORING STATIONS 55 TABLE 3.10 LEQ DB (A) VALUES (DAY & NIGHT) 55 TABLE 3.11 ANALYTICAL RESULTS OF SURFACE WATER SAMPLES 58 TABLE 3.12(A) BIOLOGICAL OXYGEN DEMAND IN SURFACE WATER SAMPLES 62 TABLE 3.12(B) CHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND IN SURFACE WATER SAMPLES 63 TABLE 3.13 CONCENTRATION OF HEAVY METALS IN SURFACE WATER SAM 63 TABLE:3.14 RESULTS OF GROUNDWATER QUALITY MONITORING (MARCH – MAY 2010) 67 TABLE 3.15 AREA STATISTICS OF LAND USE/ LAND COVER MAP 71 TABLE 3.16 FOREST AREA WITHIN 10KM RADIUS FROM THE PROJECT SITE 73 TABLE 3.17 ASSESSMENT OF FLORA 77 TABLE 3.18 FLORA OF THE PROJECT AREA 78 TABLE 3.19 MEDICINAL PLANTS AND USAGES 81 TABLE 3.20 SPECIES OF AVIFAUNA WITH HIGH POPULATION 83 TABLE 3.21 LIST OF BIRDS DWELLING IN THE AREA 85 TABLE 3.22 LIST OF WILDLIFE DWELLING IN THE AREA 88 TABLE 3.23 PRIMARY PRODUCTIVITY IN COASTAL WATERS 92 TABLE 3.24 PHYTOPLANKTON DIVERSITY INDICES CALCULATED FOR STATIONS 1-10 94 TABLE 3.25 ZOOPLANKTON DIVERSITY INDICES CALCULATED FOR STATIONS 1-10 94 TABLE 3.26 BENTHIC COMMUNITY DIVERSITY INDICES CALCULATED FOR STATIONS 1-10 AND IB 1-395 TABLE 3.27 LIST OF FISH DWELLING IN THE COASTAL AREA 97 TABLE 3.28 POPULATION AND HOUSEHOLD INFORMATION 100 TABLE 3.29 SCHEDULED CASTE AND SCHEDULED TRIBE POPULATION 102 TABLE 3.30(A) WORK PARTICIPATION RATES 105 TABLE 3.31 LIST OF COMMON PROPERTY RESOURCES AVAILABLE IN THE VILLAGES 107 TABLE 4.1 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACTS 110 TABLE 4.2 FUEL COMBUSTION DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE 111

Table of Contents

TABLE 4.3 STACK AND EMISSION CHARACTERISTICS FOR SPEGPL THERMAL POWER PROJECT (2 X 660 MW) 119

TABLE 4.4 MIXING HEIGHT DATA USED FOR MODELING 120 TABLE 4.5 FIRST 10 MAXIMUM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATION 121 TABLE 4.6 RESULTANT MAXIMUM GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATION AFTER COMMISSIONING OF THE

PROJECT AT THE AIR QUALITY MONITORING STATIONS 123 TABLE 4.7 EXPECTED NOISE LEVELS FROM DIFFERENT UNIT OF POWER PLANT 127 TABLE 4.8 BREAKUP OF WATER REQUIREMENT 130 TABLE 4.9 SUMMARY OF IMPACTS LIKELY TO ACCRUE DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE 145 TABLE 4.10 SUMMARY OF IMPACTS LIKELY TO ACCRUE DURING PROJECT OPERATION PHASE 147 TABLE 5.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME 149 TABLE 5.2 OPERATION PHASE ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME 151 TABLE 5.3 LABORATORY EQUIPMENTS REQUIRED FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING 152 TABLE 6.1 VILLAGES WITHIN 10KM RADIUS OF PROPOSED SITE 154 TABLE 6.2 DETAILS OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS TO BE STORED AT PROPOSED POWER PLANT 177 TABLE 6.3 CODED SIREN FOR EMERGENCY DECLARATION 197 TABLE 7.1 ENERGY DEMAND AND SHORTAGE APRIL 2008 TO JANUARY 2009 210 TABLE 8.1 MITIGATION MEASURES PROPOSED TO BE IMPLEMENTED DURING CONSTRUCTION STAGE216 TABLE 8.2 MITIGATION MEASURES PROPOSED TO BE IMPLEMENTED DURING OPERATION STAGE 220 TABLE 8.3 SPECIFICATION FOR PLANTATION 231 TABLE 8.4 NUMBER OF TREES TO BE PLANTED UNDER GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT 231 TABLE 8.5 SPECIES SUGGESTED FOR GREENBELT ALONG BOUNDARY 232 TABLE 8.6 BUDGET FOR GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT 235 TABLE 8.7 SPECIES SUGGESTED FOR PLANTATION IN HERBAL GARDEN 237 TABLE 8.8 SECTOR-WISE PROBLEMS AND SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS 241 TABLE 8.9 PROJECT TEAM AND ITS WORKING 248 TABLE 8.10 BUDGET FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF CSR ACTIVITIES (TILL MAY 2015) 250 TABLE 8.11 ENVIRONMENTAL BUDGET 254

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 2.1 LOCATION MAP FIGURE 2.2 PLANT LAYOUT FIGURE 2.3 SITE BOUNDARY COORDINATES FIGURE 2.4 GOOGLE MAP SHOWING INTAKE POINT AND MARINE OUTFALL FIGURE 2.5 PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM FOR POWER PLANT FIGURE 2.6 COAL FLOW DIAGRAM FIGURE 3.1 MAP SHOWING STUDY AREA WITHIN 10KM RADIUS FIGURE 3.2 CHART SHOWING THE SOIL CLASSIFICATION FIGURE 3.3 WINROSE DIAGRAM FOR VERAVEL FIGURE 3.4 PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC WINDROSE DIAGRAM FOR THE MONTHS OF MARCH –

MAY 2010 FIGURE 3.5 MAP SHOWING LOCATION OF AMBIENT AIR/NOISE QUALITY MONITORING

STATIONS FIGURE 3.6 MAP OF EXISTING WELL IN THE PROJECT SITE FIGURE 3.7 WATER CONTOUR MAP OF PROJECT SITE FIGURE 3.8 DRAINAGE CONTOUR MAP OF PROJECT SITE FIGURE 3.9 MAP SHOWING LOCATION OF SURFACE WATER QUALITY MONITORING

STATIONS FIGURE 3.10 MAP SHOWING LOCATION OF GROUNDWATER QUALITY MONITORING STATIONS

Table of Contents

FIGURE 3.11 MAP SHOWING LANDUSE PATTERN WITHIN 10KM RADIUS OF THE PROJECT AREA

FIGURE 3.12 AVERAGE HOUSEHOLD SIZE IN VILLAGES COMPARED TO DISTRICT FIGURE 3.13 SEX RATIO VARIANCE OF THE VILLAGES FIGURE 3.14 LITERACY VARIATION AMONG THE VILLAGES FIGURE 3.15 SC & ST POPULATION VARIATION FIGURE 3.16 AVERAGE PERCENTAGES OF MAIN, MARGINAL AND NON WORKERS FIGURE 3.17 CATEGORIES OF WORKERS (AVERAGE PERCENTAGES OVER ALL VILLAGES) FIGURE 3.18 LAND USE CLASSIFICATION IN STUDY AREA FIGURE 4.1 24 HOURLY MAXIMUM GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATIONS OF NITROGEN

OXIDES IN µG/M3 FIGURE 4.2 24 HOURLY MAXIMUM GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATION OF SULPHUR DI OXIDE

IN µG/M3 FIGURE 4.3 24 HOURLY MAXIMUM GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATION OF SPM IN µG/M3 FIGURE 4.4 WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM FIGURE 4.5 LOCATIONS OF INTAKE POINT AND MARINE OUTFALL FIGURE 4.6 LOCATION OF GIR FOREST FIGURE 6.1 RESPONDENT’S RELATIONSHIP TO HOUSEHOLD HEAD BY VILLAGE FIGURE 6.2 NUMBER OF YEARS OF RESIDENCE IN PRESENT VILLAGE FIGURE 6.3 TYPE OF GOVERNMENT ID OWNED BY RESPONDENT FIGURE 6.4 GENDER DISTRIBUTION OF HOUSEHOLD HEADS FIGURE 6.5 AGE STRUCTURE OF HOUSEHOLD HEADS FIGURE 6.6 OCCUPATION OF THE HOUSEHOLD HEADS FIGURE 6.7 EDUCATION OF THE HOUSEHOLD HEAD FIGURE 6.8 SOCIAL CATEGORY OF THE HOUSEHOLDS FIGURE 6.9 NUMBER OF TOTAL FAMILY MEMBERS IN THE HOUSEHOLD FIGURE 6.10 ANNUAL INCOME OF THE HOUSEHOLDS FIGURE 6.11 SOURCE INCOME OF HOUSEHOLD FIGURE 6.12 ANNUAL SAVINGS OF HOUSEHOLD FIGURE 6.13 TYPE OF RESIDENTIAL STRUCTURE FIGURE 6.14 LIVESTOCK OWNED BY TOTAL HOUSEHOLDS FIGURE 6.15 TYPE OF HOUSEHOLD ITEMS OWNED FIGURE 6.16 PERCENTAGE OF WOMEN IN THE HOUSEHOLD (TOTAL) FIGURE 6.17 PERCENTAGE OF RESPONDENTS POSSESSING AGRICULTURAL LAND FIGURE 6.18 SIZE OF AGRICULTURAL LAND OWNED BY RESPONDENTS FIGURE 6.19 MARKET VALUE OF AGRICULTURAL LAND OWNED BY RESPONDENTS FIGURE 6.20 PERCENTAGE OF RESPONDENTS SHOWING AWARENESS OF THE PROJECT FIGURE 6.21 MAIN SOURCES OF INFORMATION REGARDING THE PROJECT FIGURE 6.22 RESPONDENTS’ VIEW ON WHETHER THE PROJECT WILL BRING ECONOMIC

BENEFIT FIGURE 6.23 RADIATION VS DISTANCE FOR LATE POOL FIRE FOR LDO FIGURE 6.24 RADIUS FOR LATE POOL FIRE FOR LDO FIGURE 6.25 RADIATION VS DISTANCE FOR LATE POOL FIRE FOR HFO FIGURE 6.26 INTENSITY RADIUS FOR LATE POOL FIRE FOR HFO FIGURE 8.1 LOCATION OF GREENBELT FIGURE 8.2 INSTITUTIONAL SETUP FOR ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT

LIST OF ANNEXES

ANNEX 1.1 PROJECT DESIGN DOCUMENT FORM (CDM PDD) ANNEX 3.1 GUIDELINES FOR AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING ANNEX 3.1 (A) AMBIENT AIR QULAITY DATA

Table of Contents

ANNEX 3.2 PHYTOPLANKTON POPULATION ANNEX 3.3 ZOOPLANKTON POPULATION ANNEX 3.4 SUB-TIDAL AND INTER TIDAL BENTHIC POPULATION ANNEX 3.5 INTER TIDAL FAUNAL POPULATION ANNEX 3.6 BACTERIAL POPULATION IN COASTAL WATERS ANNEX 3.7 MARINE FISH PRODUCTION IN JUNAGADH DISTRICT ANNEX 4.1 ISOPLETHS OF SOX, NOX AND SPM ANNEX 6.1 LIST OF LANDOWNERS ANNEX 8.1 SPECIES SUGGESTED FOR PLANTATION

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page i Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Executive Summary Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1.0 Introduction

M/s Shapoorji Pallonji Energy (Gujarat) Pvt. Ltd (SPEGPL) proposes to install 2 x 660 MW imported coal based Thermal Power Plant (TPP) using supercritical technology in villages Kaj-Nanavada in Kodinar taluka of Junagarh district Gujarat.

The proposed project is covered under Category A of the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification – 2006 and requires an Environmental Clearance from the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF).

Terms of Reference for the proposed power plant were approved by MoEF vide letter dated 24th May 2010. EIA was carried out by a consortium of consultants based on extensive field work and published data. EIA study aimed at assessment of existing environmental conditions, impact of the proposed project on the environment, and developing environmental management plan so as to mitigate adverse impacts. The present Summary has been prepared as per guidelines provided in EIA Notification Appendix IIIA.

2.0 Project Description

Location

The boundary of the proposed TPP falls between latitude from 20o44’ 26.43” to 20o45’43.70” North and longitude from 70o 48’34.27” to 70o50’ 02.38” East. The nearest railway station Kodinar is 17 Km from the site by road. The nearest airport is at Diu at a distance of about 50 km by road from the project site.

About 340 ha of land for the TPP and about 25 ha land for coal/water pipe corridor will be purchased through negotiations with the land owners.

Entire plant site is outside CRZ limits. However, intake well, pumphouse, outfall and initial portion of coal conveyor pipes will be within CRZ limits. These activities are permitted in CRZ area as per CRZ Rules 2011. Application for relevant permissions is under process.

Process

The proposed TPP will comprise 2 x 660 MW boiler and turbines, with matching coal handling facilities; sea water intake and treated effluent outfall into sea, desalination plant, ash management system, and ancillary infrastructure and utilities.

The power evacuation will be done through two numbers of 400 kV double

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page ii Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Executive Summary Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

circuit lines. Each generator shall be connected to the 400 kV switchyard through its associated step-up Generator Transformer (GT).

Supercritical technology has been selected for the boilers. This technology will facilitate higher efficiency around 41%. Air pollution load will be lower than the conventional technology. The firing system would employ latest low NOX burners.

The proposed TPP will use imported coal with minimum gross calorific value 5000 Kcal/Kg and maximum sulphur content 0.7 %. Ash coneten in the coal will be less than 10 %. The annual coal requirement will be 4.5 Million Tons. The coal for the proposed TPP will be transported by closed pipe conveyor from the proposed port n e a r Chhara -Sarakhedi villages through dedicated coal-water pipeline corridor.

Light diesel oil (LDO) for boiler start up and heavy fuel oil (HFO) for low load operation and flame stabilization will be used.

The air emissions after passing through Electro Static Precipitator of efficiency 99.94% will be discharged through chimney of height 275 m. This will ensure high level dispersion of residual pollutants and will minimize addition to existing level of air pollutants.

The proposed TPP will use sea water for meeting water requirements during operational phase. Total sea water requirement is estimated at 13,193 m3/hr. National Institute of Oceanography (NIO) and M/s Indomer Coastal Hydraulics Pvt Ltd have carried out modeling studies for deciding the water intake and effluent outfall points. They have recommended submerged type intake well of 10m diameter at water depth of -9.0 meter below Chart Datum. The location of intake point is at 20042’ 54” N: 70044’ 54.5” E about 585 meters inside the sea. Recommended outfall location is 20042’ 47.3” N 70045’ 46.3” E and at water depth of -8.0 to -8.5 meter below Chart Datum located on the Eastern side of the intake well. The distance between intake well and the outfall is 1500 meters.

The bottom ash falling from the boiler furnace shall be conveyed to clinker grinders by means of scraper chain conveyor. Each bottom ash hopper outlet will be equipped with hydraulic operated hopper isolation gate. Hopper will have capacity to hold ash for four hours. At the discharge end of scrapper chain conveyor a clinker grinder will be provided. Bottom ash clinkers after crushing shall be transported continuously to the Bottom Ash slurry sump through slurry trenches.

Flushing apparatus will be employed for coarse ash handling. From economizer hoppers coarse ash will flow to respective bottom ash slurry sump through pipe. Coarse ash slurry and bottom ash slurry will

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page iii Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Executive Summary Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

accumulate in slurry sump and will be further transported to the common dewatering bins through slurry pumping system. Economiser ash will be evacuated continuously. Two Intermediate surge Hopper will be provided for two boiler units.

Fly ash from ESP hoppers will be conveyed pneumatically to the ash silos in dry form. It will be utilized as per rules. Unutilized fly ash will be disposed in ash pond as slurry form.

Pollution Control Measures

The Boilers will be provided with high efficiency electrostatic precipitators (ESP) to control particulate matter in flue gas to a maximum exit concentration of 50 mg/Nm3. Gaseous emissions shall be widely dispersed using 275 m tall stack.

Coal yard will be provided with dust suppression system which would spray water on the coal piles. The Coal yard would have a drainage system to drain out rainwater & collect in a runoff pond.

Dust extraction (bag filters) / suppression system at all coal transfer points, viz. crusher house, junction towers etc. will be provided.

The oil from unloading and pumping areas and drainage will be recovered by recovery pump and sent back to the oil tanks.

3.0 Description of Environment

Study for establishing status of baseline environment in area covering 10 km radial distance around project site was carried out during 1st March – 31st May 2010.

Physical Environment

The site is fairly plain topography having a natural gradient from west to east and sloping towards south (max 13 msl and min 2 msl contours at project site).

The study area is characterized with brown soil, muddy clay, clayey and silty sand, Miliolite limestone and Gaj formations. The geological and lithological studies at site have been carried out by M.S. University, Baroda. The alluvium deposits were found to be of fairly recent age and only 5 to 20 m in thickness. Transmissibility and permeability of certain regions is fairly high due to the cavernous nature of the rocks present (mainly Miliolite limestone.

The soils sampled from the area comprise 40% clay, 45% sand and balance silt. The CEC (cation exchange capacity) ranges from 0.011meq/100gm to 0.0272meq/100gm. The sodium content in soil is fairly

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page iv Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Executive Summary Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

high with the sodium absorption ratio (SAR) varying from 0.7mg/kg to 2.81 mg/kg. The organic carbon content was found ranging from 0.92% to 1.78% by mass.

Air and Noise Environment

The climate of the area is hot and dry for most part of the year. Daytime temperatures are high which are cooled by the sea breeze during evening. The predominant wind direction is from NNW followed by WNW.

Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out in the study area at six locations. PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, O3, and mercury levels were analyzed and found to be below the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS), 2009. Mercury and Arsenic was not detected in any of the samples.

The ambient noise levels in the six villages were found to be within the acceptable limits (residential area). The average noise level for day time is ranges between 48 dB (A) and 50 dB(A) whereas the nighttime average noise level ranges from 39 dB(A) to 42 dB(A).

Water Environment

Singhwadi River, Somat and Rupan Nadi are the three streams present in the study area. The streams do not pass through the project site.

M/s Indomer Coastal Hydraulics (P) Limited, Chennai has carried out marine environmental impact assessment. In seawater the observed pH ranges from 8.10 - 8.24. Rest of the parameters did not show much variation and were found to be within normal range. The BOD and COD levels indicate a fairly well mixed water column at the coast. Heavy metals like Cadmium, Mercury, Lead and Chromium levels are well below the permissible limit. Presence of phenolic compounds and petroleum hydrocarbons were also found to be within the permissible limit.

The groundwater in the area is accessed mainly through about 50 open wells. The water table depth varies from 2 to 8 m. Groundwater samples were collected at 6 locations from nearby villages, namely – Chhara, Sarakhari, Kob, Nanawada, Valen and Kaj. Test results indicate that all of the parameters are found to be well within the prescribed limits. Heavy metals and total coliform were not detected in the groundwater samples.

Land use Pattern

The land use pattern at the proposed site has been studied from satellite images. 52.04% of the land use of study area falls under cultivation. The main crop in the district is cotton, followed by Bajra, Jowar and Sugarcane. 18.56 % area is covered with sea. Salt pans covers 6.18% area, open

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page v Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Executive Summary Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

scrubs 5.77%, rivers 4.70% and sparse vegetation 3.26% on mud flats, 2.38% in sandy areas, 2.10% within habituated area.

Biological Environment

The study area consists of tropical dry deciduous, northern tropical thorn & littoral and swamp forests. Four Reserve Forests and five patches of unclassified forests are present in the study area. The nearest reserved forest is located 1.5 km from the project site at Nanawada.

Primary flora survey of the area was conducted in the vicinity of the Nanawada and Kaj villages. Shrubs are the dominant perennial species of this area, represented mainly by Ganda Baval (Prosopis juliflora), Aakado (Calotropis procera & Calotropis gigantea), Chani Bor (Zizyphus nummularia), Ketki (Agave americana), Fafdo Thor (Opuntia sp), Thor (Euphorbia nivulia) Kerdo (Capparis deciduas) and Lantana (Lantana camara).

Study of the fauna in the area revealed that many migratory bird species frequented this area during winter season. Kaj - Nanavada wetland is located near the site, which has come into existence due to natural delta formation and construction of earthen bund to store fresh river water. During winter season, resident and migratory birds like Seagulls, Pelican, Flamingo, etc. visit this place. This wetland also serves as a source of irrigation for the villagers.

Greater Spotted Eagle (Aquila clanga) and Eastern Imperial Eagle (Aquila heliacal) are two vulnerable species present in this area. Marine biodiversity study of the area also shows good primary and secondary productivity comprising adequate phytoplankton primary productivity, zooplankton and other species diversity.

Among fishes, commercially important species like Ophisthopterus tardoore, Arius sp., Cynoglossus sp., Lutjanus sp., Johnius sp., and Epinephelus sp were found. Villages of Velan, Madhwad, Kotada, Kob primarily depended on fishing for their livelihood.

Socio-economic & Cultural Environment

The literacy rate of study area is 59.9%. Gender ratio is 0.99. The variation in the percentage of SC population in the area is quite high with the minimum of 0% to a maximum of 81.5% (in Nanawada village). On the other hand, the ST population is mostly less than 2%, with an exception of 6.2% at Fafni Nani (population-wise the smallest village) alone. More than 75% of the population residing in the region depends on agriculture for livelihood.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page vi Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Executive Summary Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

4.0 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

Air Quality

Construction phase will generate fugitive dust emission which will be controlled by water sprinking.

The proposed TPP will have only one stack with two flues. Imported coal will contain maximum sulphur content of 0.7% and maximum ash content of 10%. The maximum coal consumption rate for 1320 MW plant is 511 TPH. The stack height will be 275 m .

ISCST3 model has been used to predict the air pollution impacts from proposed project with respect to SO2, NOx and PM. Maximum 24 hourly incremental GLC of PM has been predicted as 0.96 µg/m3 at about 3.0 km downwind distance. The maximum 24 hourly incremental concentration of SO2 and NOx is predicted as 28.12 µg/m3 and 12.47 µg/m3 respectively. The maximum GLC would occur at about 3-4 km downwind distance in east / south east direction. It has been ensured that during the plant operation the ambient air quality would remain well within the prescribed NAAQS for residential, rural and other areas.

Noise Environment

Use of heavy plant and machinery will result in noise. The construction activities are scheduled to complete in 44 months. The noise impacts during construction phase are temporary. The noise impact would be localized to construction workers during their duty hours. These will be mitigated to through use of personal protective equipment (PPEs) like ear muffs/plugs etc.

During operation phase, the stationary noise sources are Boilers, Steam Turbine generators, Compressors, Pumps, Coal crushers etc. and mobile sources like vehicular traffic. The noise generation at source from major equipment will be restricted to 85 dB(A) through purchase specifications.

The cumulative noise impact has been predicted and the impact of noise outside the proposed project premises would be insignificant. The incremental noise level at the nearest village Nanawada located about 1.5km will be less than 1 dB(A). The noise levels would remain within the prescribed ambient noise standard for residential area.

The occupational noise exposure to the workers will be maintained well within the prescribed OSHA standard limits / Factories Act by providing noise proof duty cabins, acoustically treated TG building and also by using ear plugs.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page vii Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Executive Summary Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Water Environment

The estimated total seawater requirement for proposed 1320 MW TPP is 13193 m3/h. The major part of the total seawater will be utilized for cooling water makeup. Desalination plant based on reverse osmosis (RO) system shall be installed to produce 1885 m3/h desalinated water for feed to DM plant, service water, air conditioning purposes, fire water make-up, coal and ash handling system, potable use and for greenbelt development.

The cooling tower blow-down (7660 m3/hr) and Reverse Osmosis reject (1225 m3/hr) will be disposed to the sea. The proposed re-circulating / closed condenser cooling system using sea water and natural draft cooling towers would prevent thermal impact on receiving water body. Non-chromate / poly phosphate based shall be use as anti fouling / scaling reagents will be used in cooling water system. No Groundwater will be used in operation of the proposed project. The proposed spread channel will contribute to groundwater recharge in the area through seepage .

Land Environment

The proposed site is on coastal flat terrain wherein most of the land is agriculture but non-forest. The environmental pollution impacts during construction phase would be temporary and are expected to gradually become zereo by the time of commissioning of proposed project.

During operation phase, total ash generation has been estimated as 51.08 TPH (1,226 TPD), out of which fly ash (80%) would be 40.86TPH (981TPD) and bottom ash (20%) would be 10TPH ( 245TPD). It is proposed to collect dry fly ash from ESP hoppers in dry form and supplied to ash users. The balance unutilized ash (mostly bottom ash and some fly ash) will be disposed in ash disposal pond. The ash pond will be provided with HDPE lining to prevent any chance of leaching.

Spent oils, lubricants and oily sludges will be sold to the potential users after obtaining authorization from GPCB.

Sludge will be generated from seawater clarification, effluent and sewage treatment plant. The sludge will be dried in thickener/ centrifuge and then in sludge drying beds, It will be finally disposed in ash pond.

Commercial garbage generation will be less than 1 TPD. It will be sorted for recyclable, inert and biodegradabale waste. Recyclable waste will be sold to kabadis. Inert waste will be used as landfill material. Biodegradable waste will be composted.

33% land area will be developed as greenbelt. Locally available plant species will be used as greenbelt.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page viii Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Executive Summary Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Biological Environment

The proposed project will not result in disturbance or displacement of any native faunal species. As a result of adoption of efficient power generation and pollution control technologies environmental pollution impact from proposed project is expected to be insignificant.

100 m wide greenbelt will be developed all along the plant premises. This permanent vegetative cover will be useful for attracting avifauna leading to improved biodiversity and richness in the microflora and fauna (micro-ecosystem).

The impacts on marine ecology due to intake and outfall will be minimized by adopting the recommendations of NIO and Indomer. The effluents will meet the prescribed discharge standards.

Socio-Economic Environment

The proposed project will result in generation of employment opportunities during both construction and operation phases. This will have triggering effect on overall development of the area.

Overall Impact

Shapoorji Pallonji Group has reputation of over 140 years as responsible and caring organization. The Group will strive to improve upon the reputation through pursuing inclusive sustainable development of the people and environment of the area.

5.0 Environmental Monitoring Plan

Environment Management Department will be created so that monitoring of routine environmental quality parameters could be done during the construction and operation stage of the plant. A well maintained scientific laboratory having all necessary equipment / instrument will be maintained at the TPP site. Qualified staff will be recruited in the Environment Management Department. Head of the EMD will directly report to the Chief Executive Officer of the plant.

Construction phase monitoring of important environmental attributes such as air, noise, water quality, soil quality, and marine ecology will be conducted. The environmental monitoring will be carried out as per the GPCB guidelines.

Operation Phase monitoring for environmental attributes such as meteorology, air quality (ambient as well as stack), noise quality, groundwater, surface water quality, soils, terrestrial ecology, marine ecology will be carried out as per the GPCB guidelines.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page ix Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Executive Summary Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

6.0 Additional Studies

Social Impact Assessment

The 10 km radial distance impact zone of the proposed project falls in two talukas namely Kodinar and Una of Junagarh district, Gujarat. The nearest villages to the proposed TPP are Nanawada, Kaj and Jantrakhadi, all in Kodinar Taluka.

Primary survey of social, infrastructure and economic structure of the study area was conducted by undertaking field surveys. Public meeting was organized in Nanawada and Kaj villages. Out of total 340 ha of land, about 331 ha private agricultural land and 9 ha government land is being purchased by the SPEGPL. No residential areas will be disturbed due to the proposed site. SPEGPL has allocated 0.4% of the total project cost [Rs. 73350 crores ] for various CSR activities.

Risk Assessment

Even though risks from the proposed TPP are not significant, with a view to develop worst case scenario scientific risk assessment has been carried out.

Fire and Explosion hazards are computed for different fuel storage and handling facilities at proposed project. As per the criteria, the LDO and HFO storage and handling facilities at proposed project fall in light category of degree of hazards.

The accidental release of LDO and HFO from the storage facilities have been studied by building various probable scenarios on the basis of their properties and the effects. The worst possible scenarios are then calculated in terms of damage distances. The results (damage contours) are plotted on proposed plot plan in order to visualize magnitude and extent of consequence. The consequence analysis results indicate that the maximum distance for 4 kW/m2 thermal radiation is 73.1 m under stability class D (3 m/s). The 4 kW/m2 thermal radiation will cause first degree burn for 10 sec. exposure to people within the plant premises. There will not be any risk to people outside the plant area.

Release of LDO/HFO due to leak in storage tanks may lead to formation of a pool and depending on availability of ignition source may cause pool fire. This scenario was visualized by considering different leak sizes of 25 mm and 50 mm and catastrophic rupture of storage tank for various heat loads 37.5 kW/m², 12.5 kW/m² and 4.0 kW/m² under the weather stability conditions of 2F, 3D and 5D. The damage distances due to catastrophic rupture of LDO storage tank for the heat load of 4.0 kW/m² are predicted as

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page x Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Executive Summary Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

42.31 m, 44.13 m and 47.86 m corresponding to different weather conditions. There will not be any risk to people outside the plant area.

Disaster Management Plan (DMP) has been prepared to conform to the requirements of the provisions of the Factories Act and guidelines issued by the Ministry of Environment and Forests, - Manufacture, Import and Storage of Hazardous Chemicals Rules 2000 Schedule II and notifications issued by Chief Inspectors of Factories from time to time.

Risk mitigation measures proposed for this power plant project are as follows:

• Fire prevention and relevant code enforcement will be one of the major responsibilities of CEO.

• Periodic maintenance of all protective and safety equipment.

• Periodical training/awareness programmes will be undertaken for the benefit of work force at the project as refresh courses to handle any emergency situation.

• Periodic mock drills will be conducted so as to check the alertness and efficiency of the DMP and corresponding records will be maintained.

• Sign boards including emergency phone numbers and no smoking signs will be installed at all appropriate locations.

• Plant will have suitable fire proof communication system.

• All major units/equipment will be provided with smoke/fire detection and alarm system.

7.0 Benefits of the Project

The power project will bridge the demand supply gap of electricity in India. It will create direct employment to 400 persons and indirect employment to about 500 persons. The economic activity of the entire area will improve due to market multiplier effect.

CSR activities proposed by SP Group will help improving basic infrastructure facilities and amenities such as village Roads, Street lighting, Potable Drinking Water Supply, Soak Pit Latrines and common Public Conveniences, Health, Primary and Secondary Schools/Colleges in the area.

8.0 Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

EMP has been devised to offset/reduce/eliminate intensity of impacts arising from the construction phase and operation phase of the project.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page xi Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Executive Summary Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Construction Phase

Construction phase EMP has been devised to addressed the issues of construction site, labour camps, workers health and safety, health and hygiene of surrounding areas of construction sites, particularly the sanitary facilities and truck parking. Dust suppression measures, good housekeeping measures and greenery development measures have been suggested.

Ash Management Plan

Fly ash will be separated from the flue gas and collected in air heater hoppers, economizer hoppers, and electrostatic precipitator hoppers. A complete pneumatic pressure conveying system is envisaged. The pressurized conveying system will deliver the fly ash to fly ash silo. Ash from intermediate hoppers will be conveyed to fly ash silo for taking out separately for further use. Ash from the fly ash silo will given for utilization.

A market survey was carried out in study zone -1 (100 km radius from the proposed TPP comprising Junagarh district) for entire market survey and study zone 2 (300 Km from radius of the proposed TPP comprising districts of Junagarh and Amreli) for collecting details on major cement plants.

Large capacity Cement Plants are, namely, Gujarat Ambuja, Gujarat Sidhee Cement Ltd, and Ultratech Cement Plants producing PPC and OPC located 300km from the proposed TPP. Two new plants, namely Binani Cement (50Km from the proposed TPP) and Heidelberg Cement India Ltd. (about 100km from the proposed TPP) with a total capacity of 45 lakhs TPA are being installed to produce PPC. The cement plants are willing to make long term Agreements with proposed TPP for procurement of Dry Fly ash on regular basis. They have also indicated their desire to procure 100% of their DFA requirement from proposed plant due to its proximity. The study has indicated that the fly ash generated in the TPP will be easily utilized by the existing cement manufactures.

In addition to cement industries, other potential users in different sectors such as brick manufacturing, upcoming roads and highway projects etc have been identified.

Green Belt Development

With a view to attenuate air pollution, to resist noise propagation and uptake of treated effluent, a 100m wide green belt all along the periphery of TPP will be developed as pper norms. In addition to this, afforestion and bio-diversity improvement programmes in the surrounding villages has been prepared.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page xii Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Executive Summary Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Corporate Social Responsibility

Various activities are envisaged for the improvement of the area, namely, Health Camps, School Infrastructure Improvement, PHC Infrastructure Support, Crematorium / Road Improvement, Water Supply Units, Support for Community Halls, support to fishermen, Water Resource Development, Productivity Enhancement in Animal Husbandry, Productivity Enhancement in Agriculture, Pasture Land Development, Income Generation Assistance for Landless, Youth & Women, Educational Assistance to Students from EWS, Training & Capacity Building, Establishing School, Establishing ITI, Establishing Mobile Hospital, Establishing Mobile Vet Facility, Eco-Improvement programs, Scholarship for students and Fishermen endowment Funds. A provision of an amount of Rs. 29.6 Crore is kept in the budget.

Environmental Management Department (EMD)

EMD will be established to monitor and implement various environmental mitigation measures. Head of EMD will report to the CEO of the Plant. EMD shall be responsible for implementation of EMP related actions EMD will monitor the implementation of the EMP provisions at site and will prepare the audit report. Scientists and Engineers will supervise the departmental activities.

Environmental Budget

Capital cost provision of about Rs. 10,66,05,000 (Ten Crore, Sixty Six Lakh, Five Thousand only) has been allocated for implementation of environmental management plan. The budgetary cost estimate for greenbelt development, environmental monitoring, training & mobilization and groundwater recharge, Risk Mitigation measures and Occupational Health & Safety are also included in the environmental budget.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 1 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 1 : Introduction Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

CHAPTER – 1

INTRODUCTION 1.1 Preamble

M/s Shapoorji Pallonji Energy (Gujarat) Pvt. Ltd. (SPEGPL) proposes to establish 2 x 660 MW imported coal based Thermal Power Project (TPP) using super critical technology near Kaj and Nanavada villages in Kodinar Taluka of Junagadh District, Gujarat.

The proposed project requires environmental clearance from Ministry of Environment and Forests (MOEF) as per the EIA Notification of September 14, 2006 and its subsequent amendments. This draft EIA report has been prepared in compliance with the TOR issued by MOEF vide letter No. J-13012/100/2009-IA. II (T) dated May 24, 2010.

The work for present EIA study has been carried out by consortium of consultants and experts as listed in Table 1.1.

Table: 1.1 List of Consultant

Sr.No.

Organization Lead Consultant Scope

1. DCPL, Kolkata DPR including Optimization of Land Requirement, Zero Discharge

2. EMTRC Consultants Private Limited, Delhi

Dr J K Moitra Review and finalization of EIA Study

CRZ Clearance

3. Consulting Engineering Services, Delhi

S A Naqvi

Tirthankar Banerjee

Ajeet Prasad

EIA Report preparation,

Baseline Data Collection :

• Ambient Air Quality, Noise Levels, Meteorology

• Water Quality, Soil Quality

Common Property Resources Impact Assessment

Infrastructure impact assessment

Greenbelt Development Plan


DRAFT FINAL REPORT


Sr.No.


Development of EMP

Support Staff:

Dwaipayan Dutta

Dr. Sumita Singhal

Punit Lal Mahto

Shatodeepa Biswas

Dr Laxmi Rawat Primary Survey of Flora & Fauna

NK Singh Socio‐economic Study

Ms Indrani Goswami

Air Quality Modeling based on Met Data Collected at Site

S Majumdar Land use Analysis based on Satellite Imagery

Vinod Gautam Risk Assessment

4. Sycom Projects Consultants Pvt. Ltd.

Vivek Hajela Flyash Market Survey

5. Anna University, Chennai

Director CRZ Map for Project Site

6. Institute of Environmental Studies & Wetland Management, Kolkata

Director CRZ Map for Intake‐Outfall and Coal Corridor

7. M S University, Baroda Prof. A S Patel Hydro‐geological Study

Rainwater Harvesting Plan

Ash pond leachate arrest plan

8. Environment Management Centre, Mumbai

Dr. Prasad Modak Air Quality Modeling based on MM5 Data


DRAFT FINAL REPORT


Sr.No.


9. Indomer Coastal Hydraulics Pvt Ltd, Chennai

Dr. P Chandramohan

Marine Environment Impact Assessment based on Primary Data

Location of Intake and Outfall based on Dispersion Modeling

10. National Institute of Oceanography, Mumbai

Dr. V S Naidu Marine Environment Impact Assessment based on Secondary

Location of Intake and Outfall based on Dispersion Modeling

11. C S Dabke, Consultant C S Dabke Location of Seawater Intake and Outfall based on Structural Stability

12. BAIF / Gujarat Rural Institute for Socio‐Economic Reconstruction Vadodara

Dr. N G Hegde/

Dr. Subodh Desai

Skill Assessment and Improvement Action Plan

13. Coastal Power Serives, Pune

Topography Survey

14. Groundwater and Mineral Investigation Consultancy Centre Pvt Ltd, Jaipur

S K Jain Groundwater Status & Recharge Potential Study

15. Gujarat Institute of Desert Ecology, Bhuj

Dr. Wiesly Sunderraj

Eco‐mapping and Eco‐conservation Plan

16. Natural Heritage Conservation Society, Gandhinagar

Dr. Bharat Jethva Eco‐mapping and Eco‐conservation Plan

17. Prakruti Nature Club, Kodinar

Dinesh Goswami Promotion of Environmental Awareness in Kodinar


DRAFT FINAL REPORT


Sr.No.


18. Institute of Rural Management, Anand*

Prof. Ajay Dandekar Skill assessment and Improvement programme in project affected area

19. General Carbon, Mumbai

Dr. Ram Babu Preparation of PDD for CDM

20. BVCI, Mumbai Mr. Sanjay Patankar

Validation of PDD

*Work in Progress

1.2 Project Proponent

Shapoorji Pallonji & Co. Ltd (SPCL), with its corporate office in Mumbai, is over 140 years old construction giant. Blessed with a rich legacy and heritage, it has marched into the new millennium with modern management skills and state-of-the–art technology.

Over the years, SPCL have built diverse civil and structural engineering masterpiece like factories, scientific and research establishments, stadium and auditorium, airports, hotels, hospitals, giant skyscrapers, housing complexes, townships, water treatment plants, roads, expressways, power plants and biotech facilities.

As regards power sector, SPCL was involved in construction of 1100 MW of SUGEN Combined Cycle Power Plant at Surat in Gujarat, 105.66 MW Samalpatti Diesel Fired Power Plant in Dharmapuri district in Tamilnadu, 3 X 24 MW Hydro-Electric Plant for Tata’s at Khopoli in Maharashtra, 4 X 135 MW Power Plant for Balco at Korba in Chattisgarh. SPCL was also involved in the Construction of the Coal handling plant of 2 x 120 MW Thermal Power Plant for Tata Power.

While SPCL is the flag bearer company in SP Group, the other renowned group companies include AFCONS, SP FAB, Eureka Forbes, SP Biotech Parks, Sterling Wilson, etc.

1.3 Proposed Project

In the light of present policy of Government of India to permit participation of Private Entrepreneurs in power sector, SPEGPL has taken up initiative to install a 1320 MW (2 x 660 MW) power project in Gujarat. SPEPL is the project company of the SP group entrusted


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

with responsibility of establishing and operation of power plant at Kaj – Nanawada. The Power Purchase Agreement was signed by SPEGPL with Gujarat Urja Vidyut Nigam Limited (GUVNL) on 14.5.2010. As per the agreement, SPEGPL is mandated to supply approx. 65% of power generated to GUVNL at fixed tariff. Supercritical technology will be adopted for this power plant. The power generated would be evacuated via 400 kV EHV switchyard of the station.

1.4 Project Justification

With the growing demand in the power expansion for power generation is very much needed. During 2006 – 2009, gross capacity additions in Electricity Generation in the country are as follows:-

2006-2007 : 5093 MW

2007-2008 : 6485 MW

2008-2009 : 9620 MW

As on 31.01.2009, region wise and fuel wise break-up of All-India Installed Capacity in MW is shown in Table 1.2.

Table 1.2: All India Installed Capacity Power Plants in MW

T h e r m a l

Region Coal Gas Oil Total

Hydro

Nuclear

Renew

-able

Total Northern

Western Southern Eastern

N-Eastern

A&N Island

19139.5

25667.7

16682.5

15739.2

170

0

3531.2

6600.8

3646.1

190

766.0

0

13.0

17.5

939.3

17.2

142.74

70.0

22683.7

32286.0

21267.9

15946.4

1078.7

70.0

13425.1

7448.5

10839.2

3933.9

1116

0

1180

1840

1100

0

0

0

1766.4

4023.6

7047.9

227.4

171.0

6.1

39055.2

45598.1

40255.1

20107.7

2365.7

76.1

Grand Total 77398.9 14734.1 1199.8 93332.8 36762.7 4120 13242.4 147457.9Source: CEA

National Electricity Policy (2005) aims at providing electricity access to every household, meeting the demand of electricity by 2012, to have adequate spinning reserves of more than 5%, ensuring per capacity consumption of 1000 units by 2012 and minimum consumption of 1 unit per household per day as a merit good by year 2012.

The present power generation scenario has thus forced Govt. of India to lay special emphasis on accelerated rate of capacity addition and also


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

maintaining cost of energy within reasonable limit.

The proposed project of 1320 MW coal based TPP in Gujarat by SPEGPL is an effort to narrow the demand-supply gap.

1.5 Supportive Resource Base

A. Coal Linkage

I n d o n e s i a n coal of GCV 5000 kcal/kg (approximate) will be imported for the proposed power project. The estimated imported coal requirement is approx. 4.5 Million Ton per Annum (considering 90% PLF). Coal supply agreement for sourcing Inodonesian coal has been executed.

This Imported coal will be transported from the proposed port at Charra to proposed power plant site through twin stream pipe conveyor.

B. Land Requirement

Approximately 340 ha of land have been identified for the power station including ash pond, coal stockpile, green belt etc. Additional land area of approx. 25ha has been identified for coal/water corridor.

C. Water

The consumptive water requirement for the 2 x 660 MW plant is about

13,193 m3/hr for cooling, process use and other miscellaneous uses. Sea water will be used which will be supplied from the intake pump house proposed to be located at a distance of about 7 km from the project site.

1.6 Scope of the Study

For conducting the EIA study, the Terms of Reference (TORs) have been approved by MoEF in May 2010 during the 69th Meeting of the Expert Appraisal Committee (issued vide letter No. J-13012/100/2009 - IA. II (T) dated 24 May, 2010). TOR compliance is given in Table 1.3.:

Table 1.3: Terms of Reference Approved by MoEF and compliance status

S.No. TOR issued by MOEF Compliance status

i) The project proponent shall provide confirmed GPS readings of plant boundary and also provide authenticated map of Gir Reserve boundary clearly demarcated and mark the location of proposed TPP.

Figure 2.3 and Figure 4.6.

ii) Conformity of the site with the prescribed guidelines in terms of distance of 500 m from HFL of the river, highways, railway line shall be shown on the study area map.

Figure 2.3

iii) The coordinates of the proposed site including location of Section 2.1and Figure 2.2


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



ash pond shall be submitted along with topo sheet.

iv) Primary survey of flora and fauna shall be carried out and report submitted along with EIA/EMP report.

Section 3.5.10

v) Detailed area drainage study and hydro-geological study shall be conducted from an institute/ organisation of repute to assess impact of on ground and surface water regime. Specific mitigation measures shall be spelt out and action plan for implementation of the same shall be provided

Section 3.5.2 and Section 3.5.6

vi) Action plan for identification of local employable youth for training in skills relevant to the project for eventual employment in the project itself shall be formulated.

Section 8.10.5-8.10.9

vii) Layout plan indicating break-up of plant, green belt, infrastructure, roads etc. shall be provided.

Figure 2.2 and Section 8.6

viii) Land use based on satellite imagery or authenticated map indicating drainage, cropping pattern, water bodies (rivers, nallhs, ponds etc.), location of nearest villages, creeks, rivers, reservoirs, national parks, wildlife sanctuaries, tiger reserves, biosphere reserves, heritage sites etc in the study area shall be provided. Location of any National Park, Sanctuary, Elephant/Tiger Reserve (existing as well as proposed), migratory routes, if any, within 10 km of the project site shall be specified and marked on the map duly authenticated by the Chief Wildlife Warden.

Figure 3.11 / Section 3.5.9

ix) Study on land-use pattern in the study area shall be carried out, including identification of common property resources available for conversion into productive land and action plan for abatement and compensation for damage to agricultural land/ common property land (if any) in the nearby villages, due to proposed project shall be prepared.

Section 3.5.9 and 3.5.12

x) R&R details along with settlement plan for homestead oustess (if any) which shall include details of families (name and size) compensation paid etc. shall be prepared and submitted with action plan and schedule for implementation. While preparing the R&R plan it shall be ensured that R&R shall be completed before commissioning of the plant.

Section 6.1

xi) Details of private land acquisition shall be submitted which shall provide names of families and details of

Section 6.1.3 and Annex 6.1


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



compensation paid/proposed to be paid per acre of land.

xii) Detailed socio-economic study shall be carried out for the study area comprising of 10 km from the plant site.

Section 6.1

xiii) CSR component shall be prepared based on need based assessment study to be carried out in the study area. Income generating measures which can help in upliftment of poor section of society which is consistent with the traditional skills of the people shall be identified. The programme can include activities such as development of fodder farm, fruit bearing orchards, vocational training etc. In addition, vocational training for individuals shall be imparted so that poor section of society can take up self employment and jobs. Separate budget for community development activities and income generating programmes shall be specified. Financial allocation to be taken up under CSR shall be specified.

Section 8.10 / 8.10.1 / 8.10.10

xiv) While formulating CSR schemes it shall be ensured that in-built monitoring mechanism for the schemes identified is in place and mechanism for conducting annual social audit from the nearest government institute of repute in the region shall be prepared. The project proponent shall also provide plan for the status of implementation of the scheme from time to time.

Section 8.10.11 and

Section 8.10.13

xv) Possibility for adopting nearest three villages shall be explored and details of civic amenities such as roads, drinking water, power etc proposed to be provided at the company’s expenses shall be submitted

Section 8.10

xvi) Detailed study on the impact on river/marine ecology (as applicable) due to the proposed discharge of treated wastewater into the river/creek shall be carried out and submitted along with the EIA Report.

Section 3.5.11

xvii) Land requirement for the project shall be optimized. Item wise break up of land requirement and its availability to be furnished. It should also include land to be acquired, if any, for coal transportation system as well as for lying of pipeline including ROW. It may clearly be confirmed that the land including ROW is free of all encumbrances. The issues relating to land acquisition and R&R should be clearly spelled out in the EIA report.

Section 3.1.3


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



xviii) Location of intake and outfall points (as applicable, with coordinates) should be given. These locations should be selected based on detailed modeling studies. Details of modeling and the results obtained there from should be furnished. It may be kept in view that the intake and outfall points are away from the mangroves. A river/marine ecology study should also be done to assess impact on river/marine ecology. River/Marine impact of such activities should be clearly brought out in the EIA report.

Section 4.3.4

xix) Topography of the area should be given clearly indicating whether the site requires any filling. If so, details of filling, quantity of fill material required, its source, transportation etc. should be given.

Section 3.5.1

xx) One complete season AAQ data (except monsoon) to be given along with the dates of monitoring. The parameters to be covered shall include SPM, RSPM(PM10,PM2.5), SO2, NOx, Hg and Ozone (ground level). The location of the monitoring stations should be so decided so as to take into consideration the pre-dominant downwind direction, population zone and sensitive receptors including reserved forests. There should be at least one monitoring station each in the upwind and in the pre dominant downwind direction at a location where maximum ground level concentration is likely to occur

Section 3.5.4 and Annex 3.1 (A).

xxi) Detailed plan for raising Green belt of 100 m width and consisting of at least 3 tiers around plant boundary with tree density not less than 2500 trees per ha and survival rate atleast 75% shall be submitted.

Section 8.6

xxii) Impact of the project on the AAQ of the area. Details of the model used and the input data used for modelling should also be provided. The air quality contours may be plotted on a location map showing the location of project site, habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if any. The wind roses should also be shown on this map.

Section 4.3.1

xxiii) Fuel analysis to be provided (sulphur, ash content and heavy metals including Pb, Cr, As and Hg). Details of auxillary fuel, if any including its quantity, quality, storage etc should also be given.

Table 2.2 and Table 2.3

xxiv) Quantity of fuel required its source and transportation. A Section 2.4 and Section


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



confirmed fuel linkage should be provided. 2.5

xxv) Source of water and its availability. Commitment regarding availability of requisite quantity of water from the competent authority shall be provided.

Section 4.3.3 and 4.3.4

xxvi) Detail plan for carrying out rainwater harvesting and proposed utilisation in the plant shall be provided.

Section 8.7

xxvii) Feasibility of zero discharge shall be examined and detailed justification shall be submitted if in case the same is not possible. Proposed discharge (if any), its quantity, quality and point of discharge, users downstream etc. shall be provided.

Section 4.3.3.1

xxviii) Optimization of COC for water conservation. Other water conservation measures proposed in the project should also be given. Quantity of water requirement for the project should be optimized.

Section 4.3.3

xxix) Details of water balance taking into account reuse and re-circulation of effluents.

Figure 4.4

xxx) Details action plan for arresting leachate in ash pond and details of lining proposed for making impermeable the bottom and sides of ash pond including soil analysis report and shall be submitted.

Figure 4.3.5

xxxi) Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom, medical facilities, safety during construction phase etc. to be provided to the labour force during construction as well as to the casual workers including truck drivers during operation phase.

Section 8.2 and 8.3

xxxii) Impact of the project on local infrastructure of the area such as road network and whether any additional infrastructure would need to be constructed and the agency responsible for the same with time frame.

Section 2.8.8

xxxiii) EMP to mitigate the adverse impacts due to the project along with item wise cost of its implementation.

Section 8.0

xxxiv) Risk assessment including fire and explosion issues due to storage and use of fuel should be carried out. It should take into account the maximum inventory of storage at site at any point in time. The risk contours should be plotted on the plant layout map clearly showing which of the proposed

Section 6.8 and 6.3


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



activities would be affected in case of an accident taking place. Based on the same, proposed safeguard measures should be provided. Measures to guard against fire hazards should also be provided.

xxxv) Details of litigation pending or otherwise with respect to project in any courts, tribunal etc. shall be provided.

No litigation is pending with respect to SPEGPL

xxxvi) Besides all the above, the following general points will be followed:-

a) All documents to be properly referenced with index, page numbers and continuous page numbering.

b) Where data is presented in the report especially in table, the period in which the data was collected and the source should invariably be indicated.

c) Where the documents provided are in a language other than English, an English translation should be provided.

d) The Questionnaire for environmental appraisal of thermal power projects as devised earlier by the Ministry shall also be filled and submitted.

xxxvii) In addition, information on the following may also be incorporated in the EIA report.

1). Is the project intended to have CDM-intent?

i) If not, then reasons thereof?

ii) If yes, then details under mentioned to be provided:

a) Has PIN (Project Idea Note) {or PCN (Project Concept Note)} submitted to the NCA? (National CDM Authority) in the MoEF?

b) If not, then by when is that expected?

c) Has PDD (Project Design Document) been prepared?

d) What is the Carbon intensity from your electricity generation projected (i.e. CO2 Tons/MWH or Kg/KWH)

e) Amount of CO2 in Tons/year expected to be reducedfrom the baseline data available on the CEA?s web-site (www.cea.nic.in)

Yes, the project is intended to have CDM – intent. Detail document is

given in Annex 1.1.

xxxviii) Notwithstanding 1(i) above, data on (d) & (e) above to be worked out and reported.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



xxxix) The Committee informed the project proponent that after preparing the draft EIA (as per the generic structure prescribed in Appendix-III of the EIA Notification, 2006) covering the above mentioned issues, the same shall be submitted to the SPCB for conducting the public hearing as per procedure of EIA notification 2006. The issues emerged during public hearing shall be further incorporated in the Draft EIA/EMP report. The final EIA/EMP report along with public hearing report and the requisite documents (including written objections, if any) shall be submitted to the Ministry for appraisal by the Expert Appraisal Committee for consideration of awarding environmental clearance under the provisions of Environmental Impact Assessment notification dated September 14, 2006.

The EIA Study was carried out as per the scope of work mentioned above.

1.7 Structure of the Report

The EIA study has been conducted based on primary and secondary data collected from various government and non-government sources and the EIA report has been presented in the form of chapters as prescribed in the EIA Notification. These are:

Chapter 1: Introduction

Chapter 2: Project Description

Chapter 3: Descrition of the Existing Environment

Chapter 4: Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures

Chapter 5: Additional Studies

• Social Impact Assessment and R&R Action Plans

• Public Hearing

• Risk Assessment

Chapter 6: Project Benefits

Chapter 7: Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

Chapter 8: Summary & Conclusion

Chapter 9: Disclosure of Consultants


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Appendices, including supporting data, Information, Surveys and References etc. have been given at the end of the report.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 14 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 2 : Project Description Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Chapter – 2

PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 Project Location

The proposed plant will be located near Kaj - Nanavada Villages in Junagadh District of Gujarat. Kodinar town and railway station is located at a distance of about 17 km from the site. The State Highway SH-103 runs at about 1 km from the site and National Highway NH-8E runs at about 15 km from the site. The plant boundary coordinates are tabulated in the following table.

Plant Boundary Coordiates

1. 70048’34.27” 20045’35.57”

2. 70048’56.12” 20045’37.75”

3. 70049’33.90” 20045’36.44”

4. 70049’36.61” 20045’43.70”

5. 70049’54.34” 20045’38.74”

6. 70050’002.38” 20045’24.74”

7. 70049’33.96” 20045’10.63”

8. 70049’19.93” 20044’56.37”

9. 70049’19.03” 20044’45.57”

10. 70049’12.48” 20044’44.25”

11. 70049’12.30” 20044’41.47”

12. 70049’04.94” 20044’41.08”

13. 70049’05.22” 20044’32.69”

14. 70049’02.41” 20044’29.70”

15. 70048’54.39” 20044’26.43”

16. 70048’35.60” 20044’27.49”

17. 70048’35.56” 20045’14.08”

About 340 hectare (850 acres) land has been identified to accommodate 2 x 660 MW Units of the power plant with associated systems including space for ash disposal and provision for future expansion.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Location of the proposed plant is shown in Figure 2.1. Layout of the proposed plant is shown in Figure 2.2. Coordinates of the site boundary are shown on map in Figure 2.3.

The land requirement break-up for the proposed plant has been envisaged as follows:-

Sl.No. Description Area in ha

1. Turbine/Boiler/Chimney/Transformer yard/FGD 9.00

2. Water System 2.20

3. Cooling Tower/Pump House 24.00

4. Coal Handling Plant including Coal Storage Area 60.00

5. Ash Disposal Area 30.03

6. Switchyard 6.00

7. Administration Block, Service Building, Canteen, Fire Station

4.40

8. Work Shop, Lab 0.30

9. Fuel Oil Facilities 0.40

10. Compressor House and DG Room 0.25

11. Area for future expansion 49.53

12. Green Belt 132.05

13. Laydown & Pre-Assembly yard 13.55

14. Hydrogen Generation Plant 0.40

15. Roads 8.00

Total Area 340.11

Additional land area of 25 Hectares will be required for making access road and Coal/water pipes corridor from proposed port at Charra to plant site and other offsite utilities (Refer Figure 2.4 google map showing intake point and marine outfall). In addition, SPEGPL may purchase land from nearby areas for future expansion.

The main advantages of the proposed site are:

Proximity to sea, hence sea water can be used for condenser cooling water, auxiliary water etc.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Sea water after processing in RO plant can be used for boiler water, service water, and as potable water

Proximity to the proposed port at Chhara – Sarakhadi villages located at the distance of approximately 5 km from the proposed power plant site facilitates transportation of imported coal from the port to the power plant site through pipe conveyor

Ease of power evacuation

Transportation of heavy equipment from Pipavav port to power plant site.

2.2 Process Selection

A supercritical, reheat steam cycle with regenerative feed heating arrangement is envisaged for the proposed plant.

Salient Features of Super Critical Technology are:

Super Critical steam pressure is above 22.1 (MPa) at which steam and water do not have distinct separate phases. The cycle medium (steam) is single phase fluid with homogenous properties.

The Super Critical steam pressures and temperatures result in better thermodynamic performance and improved cycle thermal efficiency. The typical boiler superheater pressure and temperature are 250 bar and 570O C with reheated steam temperature of 570O C. The Super Critical units can achieve 3-4% more thermal efficiency than sub critical units in 500 / 600 MW.

The modern sub-critical cycles have attained efficiencies close to 37%. Further higher efficiency can be achieved by using super-critical steam conditions which is around 41%.

Faster start-up time is achieved in case of super-critical units. Worldwide more than 400 super-critical plants are in operation.

Use of super-critical units results in lower emission levels. 1% increase in efficiency reduces 2% specific emission such as CO2, NOx, SOx and particulate matters. The reduced coal consumption results in lower ash generation for the same amount of power generation.

The boiler tube size is smaller in case of super critical units, which puts a limitation regarding the performance with high ash containing coal (typical Indian coal). Use of imported coal avoids this problem.

Purity of feed and boiler water is a major requirement in super critical units. Problems experienced in the past were largely due to the use of


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

deoxygenated all volatile (AVT) cycle water chemistry. The solution to these problems is the combination of a condensate polishing plant with oxygenated treatment (OT) which is a proven procedure.

The super-critical units use once through boilers without requiring boiler blow down system. This has positive effect on water balance of the plant with less condensate needing to be fed into the water-steam cycle and less water to be disposed off.

Specific installation cost i.e. the cost/ MW decreases with increased plant size. The specific Installation cost is 5% higher than that for sub critical plants. Operating cost due to fuel is lower due to the increased thermal efficiency.

Process flow diagram for the proposed plant is presented in Figure 2.5 and salient features of the proposed plant are presented in Table 2.1.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 2.1: Project at a Glance

Item Description of Item

Project 2 x 660 MW Coal Fired Supercritical Thermal Power Station at Kaj - Nanavada Villages in Junagadh district in Gujarat, India.

Owner Shapoorji Pallonji Energy (Gujarat) Pvt. Ltd.

Location The site is located near Kaj - Nanavada villages at a distance of approximately 5.2 km from the proposed port at Charra village in Junagadh district of Gujarat, India.

Access by Road The proposed site is about 15 km by Road from Kodinar town. The National Highway (NH-8E) (Kodinar-Veraval) runs within 15 km and State Highway (SH103) (Kodinar- Velan/Kotda) runs at about 1 km from the site.

Access by Railways The proposed site is about 17 km from Kodinar railway station.

Access by Sea The proposed site is at a distance of 5.2 km from the sea.

Access by Air The nearest airport is at Diu at a distance of about 45 to 50 km by road from the proposed site.

Main Fuel Imported coal of GCV 5000 kcal/kg is considered for the proposed power project. The estimated imported coal requirement will be 4.5 Million Ton per annum (Considering 90% PLF and worst coal).

The imported coal will be procured from Indonesia.

Auxiliary Fuel HFO and LDO from nearby refinery/oil depot.

Estimated storage of LDO – 1000m3 Estimated storage of HFO – 2000m3,

Fuel Transportation From port to proposed site using pipe conveyor.

Water

The estimated consumptive water requirement for the 2 x 660 MW station is about 13,193 m3/hr for cooling and other process use.

Seawater will be used for the power plant. Sea water will be drawn from the intake pump house located at a


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



distance of about 7 km from the project site.

Land

Approximately 340 Ha of land is required for the 2 x 660 MW power station including ash pond, coal stockpile, green belt etc.

About 25 ha land will be required for conveyor, water supply pipeline, access road.

Power Generating Units

2 x 660 MW Turbine Generator sets fed from two Steam Generators with steam parameters of 2000 T/hr (approximately), 250 bar (a) and 570oC/570oC., main steam & reheated steam temperature.

Cooling System Closed recirculating condenser cooling system with Natural Draft type Cooling Towers using sea water as make-up.

Coal Handling System

Imported coal will be unloaded from ship from proposed port at Charra village and will be transported through pipe conveyor to the site. Uncrushed coal storage for about 33 days and Mill bunker storage for 10 hours considered. Coal Handling System would be designed for two-shift operation.

Ash Disposal Average hourly ash generation from 2 x 660 MW station would be about 51 Tons per hour and annual generation is estimated at about 0.45 MTPA. Flyash will be collected in dry form for utilization. Unutilized ash will be disposed in ash pond.

Power Evacuation The power evacuation shall be realized through two numbers 400 kV double circuit lines to Jetpur substation located within 200 km from the proposed site.

Environmental Aspects

One twin flue stack of 275 m height for wide dispersion of gaseous pollutants

Twin-path high efficiency electrostatic precipitators for trapping the flyash. The PM at outlet of ESP shall be less than 50 mg/Nm3.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



Waste water quality will be maintained as per GPCB/MoEF norms. Generation of waste water will be minimized by maximum reuse and recycling.

Time Schedule Initial estimate is 40 months period from ZERO DATE for completion of 1st unit with a gap of 4 months for completion of 2nd unit. The total time schedule for completion of 2 x 660 MW station will be 44 months.

Man Power 355 personnel during plant operation for 2 x 660 MW station.

Project Cost Rs. 73350 Million (Rs.7335 crores)

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 21 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 3: Project Description Revision: R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

2.3 Process Description

2.3.1 Steam Generating Unit

The steam generator unit proposed for the Power Station will be semi-outdoor, assisted circulation, pulverized coal fired, balanced draft, wet/ dry bottom type with two-pass configuration. Steam generating plant complete with all auxiliaries, accessories and controls for supplying steam to reheat turbine generator sets of nominal capacity 660,000 kW operating on unit system with steam generator feeding the TG set (with adequate margin) is envisaged. The boiler MCR capacity will be about 2000 T/hr.

Economiser section of the boiler would be non-steaming type with provision for recirculation during startup, chemical cleaning etc. Main steam de-superheating station would be provided with arrangement for spraying water tapped off from feed water piping. The steam generators will be conservatively designed for satisfactory, continuous and reliable operation at high efficiency with imported coal with minimum requirement of auxiliary fuel oil for flame stabilization etc. Furnace would be conservatively designed to allow adequate residence time for the fuel to burn completely.

The Steam Generator unit would be equipped with suitable pulverized coal firing arrangement comprising coal bunkers, with 10 hours capacity gravimetric raw coal feeders, pulverizing mills, primary air fans and seal air fans, fuel and air pipes, burners etc. as necessary. The pulverizers would be slow speed large ball or vertical spindle bowl mill. The sizes and number of mills would be such that with design coal, one mill will remain standby while another mill is under maintenance at BMCR with individual mill loading limited to 85% of rated capacity (N+1). While firing worst coal, one mill will remain standby with individual Mill loading to 95% of the rated capacity. Coal feed size will be (-) 25 mm.The firing system would employ latest low NOX burners and permit load variation from 30-100% BMCR without auxiliary stabilizing fuel.

Heavy fuel oil (calorific value 11,000 kCal/kg and Kinematic Viscosity around 180 centistokes at 50 °C) is envisaged to be the secondary fuel for Boiler low load operation, coal flame stabilization at low loads and for supporting purposes.

2.3.2 Turbine Generator Unit

The steam turbine would be standard multi-stage, multi-cylinder, tandem compound, single reheat, condensing type operating at 3000 RPM with eight (8) uncontrolled extractions for regenerative feed heating (including the deaerator). The electric generator would be three-phase, directly


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

coupled, two-pole machine capable of generating 660,000 KW at generator terminals after meeting power requirement for excitation at a power factor 0.85 (lag). The generator would deliver power at 20-24kV, 3 pH, 50 Hz with short circuit ratio not less than 0.45.

2.3.3 De-aerating Heater and Closed Heaters

The regenerative feed heating system would comprise vertical or horizontal shell and tube-type high pressure feed water heaters with bypass arrangement. Four (4) stages of horizontal U-tube type low pressure heaters equipped with drain cooling and condensing zones and individual bypass system are envisaged. Besides these, separate drain cooler, gland steam condenser etc. horizontal spray or spray-cum-tray type deaerator with integral vent condenser to limit oxygen content to a maximum limit of 0.005cc/litre at all operating conditions with minimum loss of steam are envisaged. The storage tank should be adequately sized to accommodate about 7 minutes water requirement to provide feed water to respective boiler at the BMCR condition.

2.3.4 Condensing Equipment

Double pass horizontal surface condensers capable of maintaining the required vacuum while condensing steam at the maximum rating of the turbine would be provided. The condensers would be sea water cooled with Natural draft cooling towers. The condenser arrangement would be such that on-load maintenance of one condenser at a time is possible by isolating the one pass from cooling water inlet and outlet sides. The condenser would be of divided water box design with rolled steel construction of body and water chamber. The heat load of the Condenser will correspond to the Turbine operating condition with VWO having 106 % MCR steam flow, 2 % make-up, 85 % tube cleanliness factor and a Condenser cooling water inlet temperature of 33 oC.

2.3.5 Auxiliary Steam System and Auxiliary Boiler

The auxiliary steam system is designed for two units. An auxiliary steam header will be provided for each unit. Each auxiliary steam header will be connected by a steam pipe for the unit. Boiler auxiliary steam system including steam supply control station, desuperheater, spray control station, downstream piping upto equipment e.g. SCAPH, oil burners (atomisation), fuel oil heaters etc. using auxiliary steam would be provided. The system can provide auxiliary steam to various users before unit start-up, during unit start-up and unit in normal operation. Safety valve(s) will be provided on


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

the auxiliary steam header of each unit, so as to protect the system from over pressure that may be caused by a high-pressure system.

The auxiliary steam will be from cold reheat steam, extraction steam and auxiliary boiler. When the first unit is for the first time start-up, the auxiliary steam will be supplied from the auxiliary boiler. During low load operation, start up or hot standby, the auxiliary steam system will be provided from the cold reheat steam piping connection of the unit. And when in unit normal operation, the auxiliary steam will be supplied from extraction steam of the unit. When one unit is in normal operation and the other is starting-up, the auxiliary steam for the starting-up unit will be supplied from auxiliary steam header of the normal operating unit.

Steam for de aerator will be supplied from auxiliary steam during start-up and from extraction steam during normal operation. Steam for turbine gland sealing and Startup steam for soot blower of air heater will be supplied form auxiliary steam header during start-up.

After Pressure reducing and de superheating station and spray water, LP auxiliary steam from auxiliary steam system will be introduced to the mill fire fighting system, the boiler fuel atomizing steam system, and steam air heater.

2.4 Coal Handling System

The coal handling system envisaged for the proposed 1320 MW station will receive imported coal through twin stream pipe conveyor from the coal jetty at Simar port at Charra village located about 7 km from the power plant. Pipe conveyor is found to be preferable due to following reasons:

Transportation of material over long distance in a single flight thereby eliminating elaborate and costly transfer towers

Maximum protection of material and environment by spillage free transportation

Compact design with low space requirement and minimized foundation needs

Coal handling system considered for the station is based on the following assumptions.

Mode of transportation of coal

: By Twin Stream Pipe Conveyor from coal jetty at Simar port at Chhara village to power plant site

Gross calorific value of worst : 5000 kcal/kg


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

coal

Daily/hourly coal consumption with 90% plant load factor

: 12260 Te daily / 510.8 TPH

Annual Coal requirement with 90% plant load factor with worst coal of GCV 5000 kCal/kg

: 4.5 Million Te

Capacity of conveyors : 2 Nos (1W and 1S) pipe conveyors each of capacity 3000 TPH from port to uncrushed coal stockpile within power plant boundary limit

Twin stream belt conveyors and equipments (1W and 1S) each of 1100 TPH capacity from power uncrushed coal stockpile to the boiler bunker / crushed coal stock pile

Operating hours of coal handling

: 2-shift (16 Hr) operation.

Bunker capacity : 10 hours storage

Lump size of incoming coal : (-) 50 mm

The proposed scheme of the coal handling plant is presented in Figure 2.6 (Coal Flow Diagram).

Coal from ship of capacity 150,000 Tons will be unloaded at 3000 TPH. Pipe conveyors will transport the coal to uncrushed coal stockpile located within the power plant boundary. The uncrushed coal stockpile is sized for 33 days storage i.e. 4,75,000 Tons which means 3.25 ship loads. Two nos stacker reclaimers (1W and 1S) having stacking capacity of 3000 TPH and reclaiming capacity of 1100 TPH each are envisaged for stacking uncrushed coal and reclaiming to the crusher.

From crusher, crushed coal will be stacked in a crushed coal stockpile which is sized for 18 days and the other stream of conveyor will transport crushed coal to the bunker for firing. Two number stacker reclaimers having capacity of 1100 TPH each have been considered for crushed coal.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

The conveyors would have a design coal conveying capacity of 1100 TPH each. In crusher house coal would be sized to (-) 20 mm in ring granulator / hammer mill type crushers after screening the fines in vibrating screens.

Fire hydrant ring main encompassing the coal stack is considered to combat incidence of fire due to self-ignition. Coal analysis is presented in Table 2.2.

Table 2.2 Coal Analysis S. No. Parameters Values (Worst Coal Quality)

A) Proximate Analysis

Fixed Carbon 40.0 %

Volatile matter 35.0 %

Ash 10.0 %

Moisture 25.0 %

GCV (kCal/kg) 5000

B) Ultimate Analysis

Carbon 60.0 %

Hydrogen 3.5 %

Nitrogen 1.7 %

Sulphur 0.7 %

Moisture 25.0 %

Oxygen 7.0 %

Ash 10.0%

C) Ash Analysis

Silica as SiO2 35 % Sodium as Na2O3 1 %

Aluminum as Al2O3 25 % Potassium as K2O5 1 %

Iron as Fe2O3 15 % Phosphorous as P2O5 0.1 %

Calcium as CaO 10 % Titanium as TiO2 0.8 %

Magnesium as MgO

4 % Manganese as Mn3O4 0.1 %

Source: DPR prepared by DCPL


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

2.5 Fuel Oil System

The Fuel oil system will be provided for:

a) Boiler start-up

b) Flame stabilization during low load operation with or without coal firing.

Two types of fuel oils are envisaged for use in the proposed 1320 MW unit: (a) light diesel oil (LDO) (for Boiler Start up) and (b) heavy fuel oil (HFO) for low load operation and flame stabilization, as necessary. In addition to these, HFO may also be required during mill cutting in and mill cutting out operation. HFO and LDO will be unloaded from road tankers. There will be 2 x 100% (1W and 1S) LDO unloading pumps for unloading from road tankers. LDO will be stored in one 1000kl capacity storage tank. LDO will be pumped by pressurizing pumps from the storage tank to the boiler for start up.

There will be 2 x 100% (1W and 1S) HFO unloading pumps for unloading from road tankers. HFO will be stored in two (2) numbers storage tanks each of capacity 2000kl. HFO will be pumped by pressurizing pumps from the storage tank to the boiler for low load operation and flame stabilisation.

From the storage tanks, HFO will be delivered to the respective day tanks located near the main plant by means of the pressuring pumps with necessary piping interconnections. Two (2) HFO day tanks, each of 500 kl will be installed. These pressurizing and heating units for the proposed station will be accommodated in the fuel oil pressurizing pump house. The HFO handling, storage and supply system will be complete in all respects, including steam tracing lines, pipes, valves and instruments etc.

Fuel analysis is presented in Table 2.3.

Table 2.3: Fuel Analysis

Sl. No.

Characteristics Heavy Furnace Oil

IS - 1953, Grade HV

1 Total Sulphur content 2 % (Max.)

2 Gross Calorific Value Of the order of 11,000

3 Flash Point (Min.) 66 Deg. C

4 Water content by Volume (Max.) 1.0 %

5 Sediment by weight (Max.) 0.25 %


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

6 Asphaltene content by weight (Max.) 2.5 %

7 Kinematic Viscosity in 370 (Max.) Centistokes at 50 Deg. C

180

At 98.9 Deg. C 20 – 30

8 Ash Content by weight (Max.) 0.1 %

9 Acidity (in inorganic) Nil

10 Pour Point (Max .) 24 Deg. C (Max.) Source: DPR, DCPL

2.6 Plant Water System

The consumptive water requirement of the plant will be made available from sea through GRP/MS pipe lines and pump house installed near sea coast. Total sea water requirement of the proposed plant is estimated as 13,193 m3/hr. The break-up of water requirement and water balance are discussed in chapter 4 of this report.

Intake well (Refer Figure 2.7) is proposed at water depth of -9.0 meter below Chart Datum. Intake well is proposed to be submerged type intake well. The location is about 585 meters inside the sea within the port area which is sheltered by the proposed breakwater of 1500 m length. Submerged intake will be of 10 meter diameter. Pipe line will be laid from the submerged well to the shore based pumping station with necessary armour cover. Heavy duty grill be provide at top of submerged well to prevent objects following into the well.

Outfall is proposed in the water depth of -8.0 to -8.5 meter below Chart Datum located on the Eastern side of the intake well. The distance between intake well and the outfall is kept at 1500 meters (Refer Figure 2.4).

The sea water will be clarified for the use in condenser cooling circuit in a closed cycle circulating cooling system with wet type natural draft cooling towers.

A part of the sea water will be used to feed the desalination plant located inside the main plant boundary. The desalinated water will meet the miscellaneous water demand for the power plant. Ultra-filtration (UF) as pretreatment will ensure entering water quality of SWRO (Sea Water Reverse Osmosis) achieving SDI (Silt Density Index) <3, which will protect RO membrane from fouling. Demineralised water plant will be sized to produce demineralised water of quality and quantity as required for the boilers.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

The product water from the desalination plant will be stored in a desalinated water storage tank. This storage tank will also store required amount of water for firefighting as per TAC norms. The desalinated water will be used in the following areas:

Demineralisation Plant

Domestic Water

Service Water and HVAC System

In the demineralisation (DM) plant, two working streams and one standby of 150 m3/hr rated capacity each along with two DM Storage tanks will be provided. DM water will be stored in DM storage tanks, which in turn will supply DM water for turbine cycle make up and any other requirement of DM water in the Plant.

In the DM plant, the water would be first filtered through pressure filters and activated carbon filter units, all installed within the DM plant building. Filtered water will pass through cation resin beds, degassifier towers, anion resin beds and mixed bed exchangers and the demineralised water will be stored in DM water storage tanks. The acid and alkali handling system will be suitably provided for the proposed DM plant. Effluent after regeneration would be treated in a neutralization pit before transferring to the guard pond.

Among the liquid effluents generated in the plant the major quantities come from cooling tower blow down. CT blowdown will be fed to RO reject and CT blowdown tank from where it will be disposed to sea. The waste water run offs would be collected to the Guard pond. The recovered waste water will be utilized for dust extraction and suppression system, fly ash conditioning system, etc.

2.7 Ash Handling System

Considering worst ash content as 10% in coal as mentioned earlier about 51 TPH ash will be generated at full load.

Bottom ash and fly ash equipment parameters would be guided by the following:

Bottom ash generation per shift (8 hrs) : 82 Te

Fly ash generation per shift (8 hrs) : 326 Te

The bottom ash falling from the boiler furnace via the bottom ash hopper-cum-transition chutes shall be conveyed to clinker grinders by means of submerged scraper chain conveyor unit to be located under the boiler


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

furnace. Each bottom ash hopper outlet will be equipped with hydraulic operated hopper isolation gate. Hopper will have capacity to hold ash for four hours. At the discharge end of scrapper chain conveyor a clinker grinder will be provided. Bottom ash clinkers after crushing shall be transported continuously to the Bottom Ash slurry sump through slurry trenches by providing jetting nozzles. From bottom ash slurry sump ash will be further disposed by pumps to dewatering bins. Two numbers belt conveyors (1W + 1S) will be provided below dewatering bins.

For coarse ash handling, flushing apparatus will be employed. From economizer hoppers of each unit, coarse ash will flow to respective bottom ash slurry sump located near to bottom ash hopper through pipe duly assisted by jets. Coarse ash slurry and bottom ash slurry will accumulate in BA slurry sump and will be further transported to the common dewatering bins through slurry pumping system. Economiser ash will be evacuated continuously.

Flyash removal from air pre-heaters, duct hoppers and ESPs will be achieved in dry form by pressure conveying system through oil free screw compressors.

Two Intermediate Surge Hopper (ISH) will be provided for two boiler units (1W + 1S). The conveying air after discharging most of the ash will be filtered through cloths fitted in the bag filter and ultimately clean air will be released to atmosphere. Two number ash conveying vessels will be fitted beneath each ISH. One silo for two boilers will be provided. Silo will have capacity to store 1425 T of fly ash.

Two connections from silo each connected with 90 TPH feeder ejector will be provided. There will be two collector tanks, one for each feeder ejector. From collector tanks, fly ash slurry will be disposed to saline ash slurry pump. Water required for lean slurry arrangement shall be tapped from saline HP water pump header. From saline ash slurry pump fly ash in lean slurry form will be disposed to ash disposal area. A dump height of 6 m is considered in the ash yard. Recovery water system will be provided to recover settled water from lean ash slurry disposal system.

2.8 Miscellaneous Auxiliaries

2.8.1 Hydrogen Generation Plant

A hydrogen generation plant is being provided to meet the requirement of hydrogen for the plant. Three x 10 Nm3/hr capacity H2 generation, storage and distribution system with control stations has been proposed.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

2.8.2 Condensate Polishing Unit

The proposed plant will be provided with 100% capacity condensate polishing system. Each condensate polisher unit will contain three (3) x 50% ion exchange mixed bed units. The system will be designed to have useful continuous service run of fourteen (14) days successive regeneration in course of normal operation. Useful service run between two regenerations during the conditions of start-up and condenser tube leakage will not be less than 50 hours. The operation of the condensate polishing system will be semi-automatic/remote-manual. The regeneration system will be external. For regeneration, resin from the exhausted exchanger vessel will be transferred hydraulically to this facility.

2.8.3 Turbine Oil Purification System

A suitable Centrifuge or other type turbine oil purification plant will be provided as an auxiliary of the turbo-generator to condition the turbine oil continuously, in order to remove the water and other impurities from the system to maintain the turbine oil at the optimum condition. In addition to the above unit system, a central turbine oil storage unit comprising one clean oil tank, one dirty oil tank, one purifier unit and necessary pumps, vent fans will be kept. This would also receive the refill of turbine oil from outside. The purification plant to be provided with the unit system will be complete with oil purifiers, storage tanks, filters, necessary pumping sets and vent fans.

2.8.4 Chemical Feed System

Use of All Volatile Treatment (AVT) programme along with oxygen dosing is proposed (with 100 % Condensate Polishing Plant). The AVT system is essential for once through type boiler used in Super Critical Plant.

2.8.5 Air Conditioning System

Various control rooms in power station, housing a group of sophisticated and precision control panels and desks call for controlled environment for proper functioning and for personnel comfort.

The following areas are proposed to be air-conditioned: -

Central and Local Control Room, DAS Room, Electronic Equipment Room/UPS Room, Relay Room.

Electrostatic Precipitator Control Room

Ash Handling System Control Room


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Coal Handling System, Fuel Oil Pump House, Control Room.

DM Plant, Water Pre-Treatment Plant Control Rooms.

Office Area, Laboratory. Conference Lecture Room, Administrative Building, etc. in the Service Building.

Switchyard Control Room.

To cater for the above requirement the following systems are proposed.

o A central chilled water plant for the control rooms etc comprising compressor, condenser, direct expansion/flooded type evaporator, condenser cooling water circulating pumps, cooling towers, chilled water circulating pumps, cooling water piping with valves, accessories, fittings etc. have been envisaged. The chilled water produced will be circulated through the coil of air handling units located near respective control room.

o Separate direct expansion plant will be provided for ESP control rooms, CHP control rooms, DM plant and Water Pre-Treatment Plant control room. Each direct expansion plant will be complete with condensing units, air handling units, cooling tower, piping with valves, fittings etc.

o Water-cooled packaged air conditioners will be provided adjacent to respective areas for rest of the isolated area.

2.8.6 Pollution Monitoring System

Electronic smoke density analyzer and gas analyzer equipment is proposed to be provided for continuous monitoring of particulate matters at the outlet of ESP. Sample analysis of SO2 and other pollutants from chimney would be carried out.

Waste water would be checked for pH and other harmful pollutants.

An oil/water separation unit has been envisaged near the fuel oil unloading area in order to keep the plant drains free from oil and to reclaim the waste oil as far as practicable. This would consist of necessary stilling chambers, oil pits, pumps etc. Oil thus separated would be returned to the heavy fuel oil tank and used or disposed of by incineration. The environmental aspects have been dealt in a separate section.

2.8.7 Fire Protection System

For protection of the plant against fire, all yards and plant will be protected by any one or a combination of the following systems.

Hydrant System


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Alarm System

Water Spray (Emulsifier System).

Automatic Fixed Foam System.

Gas Type System and Portable Fire Extinguisher.

The system will be designed as per the TAC guidelines.

In view of vulnerability to fire and its importance in the running of the power station, effective measures are to be taken to tackle fire in the following particularly susceptible areas:

The cable galleries and Coal handling areas, mainly coal conveyors, transfer points, crusher house and tunnels.

For containment of fire and preventing it from spreading in cable galleries, unit wise fire barriers with self closing fire resistant doors are to be provided. The ventilation systems, if any, provided in cable galleries would be so interlocked with the fire alarm system that in the event of a fire the ventilation system would be automatically switched off. Also to avoid spreading of fire, all cable entries/openings in cable galleries, tunnels, channels, floors, barriers etc. would be sealed with non-inflammable/fire resistant sealing material.

Suitable fire detection system as necessary for all the above mentioned fire fighting system with adequate supervisory circuitry will be provided.

In addition to these, adequate number of portable fire extinguishers of foam, soda acid type and carbon-dioxide type will be provided at suitable locations throughout the plant area. The extinguishers may be used during the early stages of fire to prevent spreading. Besides fire tenders/jeeps, foam tenders would be procured to combat incidences of fire.

2.8.8 Construction Phase Activities

The coal based 1320 MW power plant will require extensive mobilization of construction facilities in various stages for timely and unhindered implementation of the project. The plant layout has been prepared in such a manner that adequate space is available for offices, covered and open storages, fabrication and pre-assembly yard, etc. required during construction period. In view of different agencies likely to be involved in implementation of this project, the station layout has also taken into account the need for segregation of the permanent facilities.

The proposed plant site is about 1 km away from SH-103. A two-lane access road of heavy-duty class emanating from the SH-103 would be


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

required to connect the plant site. A 4m wide access road shall be constructed for belt conveyor from port to the site. The state highway SH-103 shall also be widened for material movement. The bridges and culverts on SH 103 will be augmented to carry the load. Arterial roads will be laid to facilitate the movement of materials and equipment during construction / erection and operation of the units. However, temporary roads would be built on the basis of plant layout during construction period, which will be subsequently converted to permanent roads.

The existing railway siding at Kodinar Railway station (Metre Gauge) which is about 17 km from the proposed plant site may have to be used during construction period. Necessary road linkage with the nearby SH-103 (about 1 km away) will to be established so that various plant, equipment, machineries, etc. coming by rail up to Kodinar railway station can be carried to plant site by road.

About 5000 m2 of construction office space and 5,000 m2 of covered storage are proposed to be built. In addition, construction of canteen, car shed, yard toilets, etc. are also proposed. It is proposed to build a temporary accommodation in the township area. A space provision will be kept for putting up temporary barracks//housing within the plant area for the Contractors’ workmen during the period of construction work.

Contractor will make its own arrangement for water for carrying out construction activities. Underground source may also be tapped only after getting permission from the state groundwater board.

Construction power will be available from Advi substation of GETCO (Gujarat Energy Transmission Corporation Ltd.) located at a distance of 10 to 12 km from the site. There are two 66 kV/11kV transformers of rating 10 MVA and 5 MVA in this substation and the present load is about 10 MVA. With time of the day (TOD) mode of operation they need not face any scheduled or unscheduled power cut. For supplying construction power to this power project which will need 9 MVA power (peak), augmentation of substation by another 10 MVA transformer is necessary. There is already foundation for adding transformer in this substation. For intake pump house power can be drawn from main plant and stepped down to the desired level. Start-up power will be drawn from the EHT line to be constructed to the grid substation.

The EPC contractor responsible for execution of the Project would procure all the relevant material handling equipment. A number of construction equipment, namely Bull-dozers, Road-rollers, Crawlers and Tyre-mounted cranes, tractors-trailers, road tankers, winches, lighting-tackle, etc. have to


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

be procured by the contractor. Further, sump pumps, welding sets, air-compressors, diesel generators will also be procured. Miscellaneous tools, survey instruments, etc. will also be required. Road weighbridges would be installed as required in construction stage and located near the stores. A few transport vehicles like cars, jeeps, and mini buses, trucks, ambulance vans, cash vans, etc. need to be procured to meet various requirements.

Construction materials for example stone aggregates, sand and bricks will be procured from stockists/ dealers in Kodinar town or directly from stone quarries/brick kiln.

Semi-skilled and unskilled workmen are expected to be available from local population in these areas to meet the man power requirement during construction and erection of the power plant.

2.9 Sources of Pollution

2.9.1 Emission from Stack:

Particulate Matter - Coal to be used in the proposed plant is expected to contain ash in the range of 10% (worst coal). About 20% of the ash will be retained in the furnace hopper as bottom ash and the remaining 80% will be carried along with the flue gas in the form of particulate matter, generally known as Fly Ash. To limit the concentration of the fly ash fall-out and in view of the proposed location of the power station, installation of a very high efficiency electrostatic precipitator (not less than 99.94%) is planned so as to ensure emission level within the recommendation of the Central/ State Pollution Control Authorities. (50 mg/Nm3 with one field out of service).

Sulphur Dioxide - The Indonesian coal proposed to be used in the power station has low sulphur content (wrost case 0.7%). The chimney height of 275 m high chimney for 2 units has been planned.

Nitrogenous oxides (NOx): Maximum NOx emission from the unit will not be more than 650 mg/Nm3 of NOx (equivalent NO2) including thermal NOx produced during the entire operating range of steam generator. Special provision in the steam generator design will be kept to minimize the NOx emission (Low NOx burners and appropriate firing system in the burners).

2.9.2 Wastewater

The heat cycle make-up water requirement for the power station would be of the order of 150 m3/hr of demineralised water. The demineralising process would generate alternately acidic and basic effluents after


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

regeneration of such type of exchangers. Neutralizing pit for maintaining acid-alkali balance of the regeneration effluent shall be provided and the neutralised water will be taken to Central Monitoring Basin (CMB). The boiler blowdown, cooling tower blowdown shall be also conveyed to the CMB.

Water required for ash handling shall be taken from the CMB. The ash slurry shall be taken to ash pond. Supernatant water from the ash pond shall be collected in ash sump and reused for ash handling. Therefore the ash handling circuit shall be a closed circuit and no wastewater will be generated.

Surplus cooling tower blowdown and RO/desalination plant rejects shall be mixed and discharged into sea at a point recommended by National Institute of Occeanography (location and design of outfall selected based on recommendation of NIO). Separate approvals under CRZ Notification shall be obtained for the intake point and outfall location.

To monitor the quantity of the effluents, CMB (guard pond) has been considered in above scheme where all liquid effluents will be collected. This pond will have one day’s storage capacity and the quality will be monitored online prior to its re-use for green belt, dust suppression and ash handling.

2.10 Pollution Mitigation System

2.10.1 Electrostatic Precipitators:

The steam generating unit will be provided with Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP). The ESP will have two parallel pass, each pass consisting of three casings. Any of the two passes can be isolated for maintenance as and when required, keeping the other pass in operation. Each pass will have adequate number of fields in series for collection of fly ash. The designed efficiency of ESP will be more than than 99.94% with one field kept out of service. The ESP will comprise adequate number of ash hoppers provided with electric heaters. The control of ESP would be based on microprocessor using semi-pulse device. The design of ESP will be such that the outlet dust-burden does not exceed 50 mg/Nm3 at 100% BMCR with worst coal firing and one ESP field out of service. The ash from ESP hopper shall be collected in dry form and stored in ash silos for ultimate ash utilization objective.

2.10.2 Chimney

One twin flue concrete chimney will be provided for two units. A chimney height of 275 m is required to fulfill the Emission Regulation Norms.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

2.10.3 Space for Flue Gas Desulfurization

Considering the maximum sulphur content in coal (max 0.7%) and mathematical modeling studies, no desulphurisation unit is considered necessary at this stage to achive the National Ambient Air Quality Standards. However, space provision has been kept in the plant layout for installing FGD.

2.10.4 Effluent Treatment Plant

The prime motive will be recycling and reuse of treated effluent from the plant. Main sources of industrial effluents will be RO / Desalination plant reject, wastes from CHP / Coal Stock Pile area runoff, CW system blow down, DM plant / softening plant regeneration wastes, condensate polishing pond regeneration wastes, filter backwash wastes.

Effluents from the turbine area and fuel oil areas will be channeled to collection pits and then pumped to oily water reservoir. In the transformer yard emergency discharge of oil (and fire water from transformer) will be collected in covered holding pits. Rainwater containing traces of oil shall be pumped to holding pit. Oil will be skimmed while residual water will be pumped to oil-water separator.

Oil water separator will be designed to remove oil content of 50 ppm at inlet to 5 ppm at outlet. Clear water from ETP will be used for dust suppression.

2.11 Power Evacuation

The power evacuation for the proposed power plant will be done through two numbers of 400 kV double circuit lines. Each generator will be connected to the 400 kV Switchyard through its associated step-up Generator Transformer (GT). One and half breaker scheme is envisaged at the switchyard.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 37 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 3: Description of the Existing Environment Revision: R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

CHAPTER – 3

DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING ENVIRONMENT 3.1 INTRODUCTION

In order to assess the environmental impact of the proposed thermal power plant study was carried out to establish the present environmental status of the project area and its surrounding. The baseline study was carried out by conducting field surveys as well as from the secondary data collected from different sources. The baseline environmental status within the study area is presented in the following subsections.

3.2 STUDY AREA

The area falling within 10 km radius of the project site is shown in Figure 3.1. The proposed site location is about 15 km by Road from Kodinar town. The Kodinar to Veravel National Highway (NH-8E) runs within 15 km and the Kodinar to Velan/Kotda State Highway (SH103) is at a distance of about 1 km from the project site. The nearest railway station is at Kodinar town about 17 km away. The sea coast is at a distance of 5.2 km. The nearest airport is at Diu at a distance of 50 km by road.

The Singwada River and Somat Nadi flows in North-South West direction in the south-western part of the study area. The other river is Rupan Nadi in the east flowing in the North-East to South direction. Sod salt pan is located in the south-east direction.

As per CRZ map prepared by Institute of Environmental Studies and Wetland Management, Kolkata.

• Power plant site is outside Coastal Regulatory Zone and High Tide Line

• Intake well, Intake Pump house, Outfall and Part of Coal Conveyor pipe are within CRZ for which CRZ clearance will be obtained separately from the concerned regulatory authorities, as per CRZ rules.

3.3 COMPONENTS OF BASELINE STUDY

The environmental components for baseline study are broadly grouped into physical, biological, social and cultural environment. Physical environment includes climate, geology, physiography, ambient air quality, ambient noise levels, water quality and land use. Biological environment includes aquatic and terrestrial flora & fauna. Social environment includes demography and socio-economic conditions. Cultural environment includes historical


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

monuments, archaeological sites at and in the vicinity of the proposed project.

3.4 METHODOLOGY

To establish baseline status of environment in the study area, field studies were undertaken by CES in the summer season (1st March – 31st May 2010) to generate primary data. In addition, secondary data was collected by CES from concerned Government Departments/Agencies.

M/s SPEGPL retained MS University Vadodara and Groundwater & Mineral investigation Consultancy Center (P) LTD., Jaipur for studying the hydrogeology of the project site as well as soil quality in the ash pond. This study was conducted by collecting the data from field study and secondary sources.

3.5 STATUS OF BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY

3.5.1 Physiography and Topography

The topography1 features indicate that the highest level contour of 13m is on the western boundary while the lowest level contour of 2 m is at the eastern boundary of the project site. It indicates that there is a difference of 11m between highest and lowest elevation over a distance of 3000m giving an average slope of 1 m per 270 m. The project is characterized by wide expanses of fairly open country with more or less plain topography. The area consists of scrub land with patches of stony wastes. The elevation of the surrounding areas is lower than the elevation of the project site and flash floods will not cause flooding problem. The wrost rise in water level is reported + 4.7m (msl). The report has suggested that leveling the ground to +5.00m is possible by using excess material obtained from the cutting.

The Southern periphery of the project site stretching from west to east is marked by the coastline of the Arabian Sea and the coastal stretch of Madhwad ni Khadi in the south-west. This area has a natural gradient from east to west and sloping towards south.

3.5.2 Geology & Soil

The site is covered by Miliolite limestone and Gaj formation. The proposed site is in the vicinity of the catchment area of the Panch Pipalva Tidal Regulator and is generally flat. The remaining is agricultural land and waste land. Some of the area is very near to the creek and has high salinity. Geological details of the proposed site area are summarized in Table 3.1.:

1 Source: Hydrological Studies and Determination of Safe Grade Elevation for Power Project at Kaj prepared by Coastal Power Services, Pune for SPEGPL in February 2010.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.1– Geological Details of the proposed Site Area2

Formation Lithology Thickness Age

Alluvium Soil, coastal sand, saline marshy land and oyster beds

5 to 20 m. Recent

Miliolite Lime Stone

White to pale brown oolitic sandy limestone occasionally grits and conglomerates

200-300 m. Pliostocene to recent

Dwarka Beds Yellow calcareous clays, Marls yellow fossiliferous limestone

200-300 m. Upper Miocene to Pliocene

Gaj Beds Grey clay and fossiliferous limestone

----

----

Laterites Hard red laterites also sometimes bauxite tuffaceous material, volcanic ash.

----

Most trappean sediments

Deccan Trap Plutonic masses with dykes intrusive in trap flows

----

Palaeocene to upper cretaceous

The main geological formation around the site is brown soil, muddy clay, clayey and silty sand, Miliolite limestone and Gaj formation. The soil is of recent age and has very shallow depth ranging from 0.15 m to 0.90 m. The average depth of the soil is around 0.6 m. The Gaj limestone is of Miocene age and is exposed at many places.

2 Source: (Original source: Office of the Geologist-1 Ground Water Division, (SIP), Rajkot), adopted from Geo-hydrological study for 2x660 mw Coal Based Thermal Power Plant by MS University Vadodara, submitted to Shapoorji Pallonji Energy (Gujarat) Pvt. Ltd in November 2010.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Miliolite Limestone

It is weathered to fresh, medium grained, horizontally bedded and light pink in colour. Rounded, sub-rounded or oblong solution cavities are observed (refer photographs). Transmissibility and Permeability of this rock is high due to cavernous nature of the rock.

Gaj Formation

Sandy limestone with a thin layer of yellowish clay is encountered in this formation. A few solution cavities are also observed in this limestone. Yellowish clay with kankars is encountered in Gaj clay. Fine grained, cement grey coloured sand is noticed as cavity fillings. Gaj limestone is medium grained, compact, light-pink coloured and moderately weathered to fresh in nature.

The permeability of this stone is moderately low. The permeability in clay formation varies from 0.5 x 10-3 cm/sec to 4.03 x 10-3 cm/sec (semi-pervious), in sand it is 1.43 x 10-3 to 28.46 x 10-3 cm/sec. (Source : Report of the Geologists -1, Ground Water Division (SIP), Narmada & Water Resources Dept., Govt. of Gujarat, Rajkot.)

Sandy Limestone

It is yellowish brown to buffed coloured fine to medium grain, soft rock. It is mainly composed of sand and cemented by calcareous material. At some places it contains solution cavities of varying dimensions. At some places it is also seen cemented by clay particles. The porosity and softness are indicted by the presence of solution cavities in it.

Geology of project area has been studied from the open wells already existing in village Navavada and Kaj. The lithology of the project site is given in Table 3.2.

Table 3.2: Lithology of the proposed site area3

Sl. No.

Survey No. of the Well Village Ground Level

of Well (m) Lithology

1 255 Nanawada 4.81

0 to 0.20 m over-bourdon

0.20 to 5.20 miliolite limestone

3 Source (Original source: Office of the Geologist-1 Ground Water Division, (SIP), Rajkot), adopted from Geo-hydrological study for 2x660 mw Coal Based Thermal Power Plant by MS University Vadodara, submitted to Shapoorji Pallonji Energy (Gujarat) Pvt. Ltd. in November 2010


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.2: Lithology of the proposed site area3

Sl. No.

Survey No. of the Well Village Ground Level

of Well (m) Lithology

2 229 Nanawada 4.89.



3 264/1 Kaj 4.36 0 to 1.00 m over-bourdon


4 256 Kaj 3.13 0 to 1.90 m over-bourdon


5 221 Kaj 2.66



3.2 to 7.0 Lime stone, Calcareous in nature.

6 229 Kaj 3.41 0 to 3.30 m over-bourdon


7 290 Kaj 2.40



3.1-6.5 Gaj bed.

3.5.2.1 Soil Quality

a) Textural classes of soils

Soil separates are the individual size groups of mineral size particles. Mechanical analysis of soil separates the soil particles in following classes.

• Sand (0.05 to 2.0 mm)

• Silt (0.002 to 0.05 mm)

• Clay (below 0.002 mm)

Rarely, if ever, do soil samples consist wholly of one separate. Classes of soil texture are based on different combinations of sand, silt and clay. The basic classes in order of increasing proportions of the find separates are sand, loamy sand, sandy loam, loam, silt loam, silt, sandy clay loam, clay loam, silty clay loam, sandy clay, silty clay and clay.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Most of the samples of the Kaj and Navavada village are falling in the category of clay. It means that the soil contains 40% or more clay, less than 45% sand and less than 40% silt. Chart showing textural classification is presented in Figure 3.2.

Figure 3.2: Chart showing the soil classification4

Soil samples were collected by CES from the following locations given in Table 3.3, to establish the baseline environmental conditions in the study area.

4 Source: (Original source: Soil Department Junagadh Agricultural University), adopted from Geo-hydrological study for

2x660 mw Coal Based Thermal Power Plant by MS University Vadodara, submiited to Shapoorji Pallonji Energy (Gujarat)

Pvt. Ltd. in November 2010.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.3: Details of Soil Quality Monitoring Stations Sl. No. Station Code Name of the station Direction Distance

1. SQ1 Pariodar West 10

2. SQ2 Sarakhadi South East 8.62

3. SQ3` Pipali West 10

4. SQ4 Chhara West 7.87

5. SQ5 Ash Pond area for present

6. SQ6 Ash Pond area for future Project Site

Representative soil samples from depth (0-15 cm) were collected from these locations for estimation of the physico-chemical characteristics of soil. Standard methods were adopted for the analysis of soil samples.

Physical Properties

Air-dried and sieved samples have been used for determination of physical properties of soil. The particle size distribution in % of impact zone in terms of percentage of sand, silt and clay are studied. Data indicates that the clay content is 69.12% at SQ1, 70.55 % at SQ2 and 74.26% SQ3. Whereas, the clay content at station codes SQ4 is 47.05% and sand content is 49.50%. The silt content is varying from 3% to 10%. The porosity is ranging from 10%by mass to 15%by mass. The density of soil is varying from 1.02gm/ cm3 to 1.06gm/cm3.

Chemical Properties

The collected soil samples were analyzed for various chemical properties. The parameters selected were pH, electrical conductivity, soluble anions and cations, cation exchange capacity (CEC), exchangeable cations, exchangeable sodium percentage (ESP), organic carbon content and nutrient status. The results are briefly discussed in the following paragraphs.

pH is an important parameter which indicates the alkaline and acidic nature of soil and gives the idea of nutrient availability, microbial activity and physical condition of the soil. The soil in the study area is alkaline in nature as the pH value is varying from 7.5 to 7.9.

Soluble salts were determined from soil extract (1:1). Soluble salts are expressed in terms of electrical conductivity (EC). Conductivity is 500μs/cm to 1520 μs/cm.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

The cation exchange capacity is 0.011meq/100gm to 0.0272meq/100gm. Sodium content is varying from 253mg/Kg to 886mg/Kg. Highest sodium content (886mg/kg) is found at SQ4 whereas the minimum sodium content (253mg/kg) is recorded at SQ1.

The sodium absorption ratio (SAR) is varying from 0.7mg/Kg to 2.81mg/Kg.

Organic matter present in the soil influences its physical and chemical properties. It commonly accounts as one third or more of the cation exchange capacity of surface soil. It is also responsible for the stability of soil aggregates. The organic carbon content within the erodible fine surface fraction is usually ~1–2%5.The organic carbon matter in the soil samples is ranging from 0.92%by mass to 1.78%by mass.

The analytical results of soil quality are presented in Table 3.4.

Table 3.4: Analytical Results of Soil Quality

Results Sl.No.

Parameter SQ1 SQ2 SQ3 SQ4

Units

1. pH (1:1) 7.92 7.80 7.77 7.54

2. Conductivity (1:1) 511 1020 716 1520 �s/cm

3. Cation Exchange Capacity

0.0272 0.0167 0.011 0.016 meq/100gm

4. Sodium as Na 253.8 573.87 416.37 886.08 mg/Kg

5. Potassium as K 302.77 533.09 342.60 440.05 mg/Kg

6. Total Nitrogen as N 170 70 110 110 mg/Kg

7. Sulphur as S 56.08 89.03 80.83 57.64 mg/Kg

8. Phosphate 10.99 ND 17.77 ND mg/Kg

9. Density 1.03 1.06 1.06 1.02 g/cm3

10. Porosity 10.0 15 12.5 12.5 %by mass

11. Organic Carbon 1.44 0.92 1.78 1.15 %by mass

12. Calcium as Ca 8179.19 7095.56 8567.26 7102.84 mg/Kg

13. Sodium Absorption 0.715 1.745 1.20 2.81 mg/Kg

5 Original Source: (Boyle, 2002), adopted from Relationships between soil organic matter content and soil erosion severity in Albeluvisols of the Žemaičiai Uplands, Benediktas Jankauskas et.al. 2007


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.4: Analytical Results of Soil Quality

Results Sl.No.

Parameter SQ1 SQ2 SQ3 SQ4

Units

Ratio (SAR)

14. Arsenic as As BDL BDL BDL BDL mg/Kg

15. Particle Size Distribution

16. Grave size Fraction Nil Nil Nil Nil %

17. Sand Size Fraction 26.25 22.10 16.5 49.5 %

18. Clay Size Fraction 69.12 70.55 74.26 47.05 %

19. Silt Size Fraction 4.63 7.35 9.24 3.15 %

Source: AES Lab, Delhi,

Note: The results of SQ5 and SQ6 are presented in section 3.5.2.2.

3.5.2.2 Soil Quality at site

The team from MS University has collected two soil samples each from both the ash pond sites i.e a total of four samples. These samples were tested and analysed in ‘Department of Agricultural Chemistry and Soil Science, Junagadh Agricultural University’. The samples were found to possess Silty loam, Silty clay loam and Sandy clay loam texture. The results of Mechanical Analysis obtained from Junagadh Agriculture University are as shown in Table 3.5.

Table 3.5 –Details of Soil Analysis for Samples collected from Site6

Sample No.

Station Code

Survey No.

Total Sand %

Clay % Silt % Texture

1 265 33.24 29.30 37.46 Silty Clay Loam

2 SQ5

269 43.29 16.99 39.72 Silty Loam

3 SQ6 295 67.35 26.22 6.43 Sandy Clay Loam

6 Source: Geo-hydrological study for 2x660 mw Coal Based Thermal Power Plant by MS University,

Vadodara, submitted Shapoorji Pallonji Energy (Gujarat) Pvt. Ltd. in November, 2010.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Sample No.

Station Code

Survey No.

Total Sand %

Clay % Silt % Texture

4 299 48.62 20.12 31.26 Silty Loam

The available water capacity (AWC) in inches of water per inch of soil for silty clay loam and clay loam is 0.17 and for silty clay and sandy clay it is 0.12. These rates belong to very low AWC class.

The permeability for clay loam, sandy clay and silty clay loam is moderately low (0.2 to 0.6 in/hr). The percentage clay content of two samples is ranging between 0 to 26.99 % with shrink-swell rating low. For other two samples it is ranging between 27 and 39.99% with shrink-swell rating Moderate.

3.5.3 Climate and Meteorology

The climate is hot and dry except during the monsoon season. The hot weather begins in April and lasts till the rain starts in middle of June. The temperature during the day is high, cooled by the incoming sea breeze. Hot breeze blows from land to sea during the night. There is always a cool breeze at night.

Meteorological data for the period between 2000 and 2009 was collected from the nearest IMD observatory located at Veraval. Data indicates that the maximum temperature (35.90C) was recorded in the month of October and minimum temperature (14.10C) was observed in the month of January. Maximum rainfall (1095.5mm) was observed in the month of August 2007. The maximum relative humidity (093%) was observed in the month of August whereas minimum humidity (044%) was recorded in the month of January. Wind roses for Veravel are shown in Figure 3.3.

The study area receives rainfall from mid June to about third week of September as part of with an annual rainfall varying between 300 and 800 mm.

A fully equipped Meteorological Station was set up to study the baseline meteorological conditions. The following parameters were observed for three months from March to May 2010.

- Wind Speed & Direction - Temperature (Minimum & Maximum) - Relative Humidity - Rainfall - Barometric Pressure - Solar Radiation


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

- Dew point Temperature The monthly average of Meteorological data recorded for the various parameters like Temperature, Relative Humidity and rainfall are given in Table 3.6.

Table3.6 Monthly Average of Meteorological Data (March-May, 2010)

Month Air Temp in 0C RH in % Rainfall (in mm)

March 26.1 64.2 0.0 April 28.0 79.8 0.0 May 29.4 77.8 0.0

Source: Monitoring done by CES (i) Pvt. Ltd

Average Air Temperature ranged between 26.1 to 29.40C respectively. Relative Humidity varied between 64.2 to 79.8% in March and April respectively. The predominant wind direction is NNW in the month of March 10, WNW followed by NNW in the month of April 10, WNW in the month of May 10. Wind rose diagram prepared based on the data collected at site is depicted in Figure 3.4. No rainfall was recorded between March and May 2010.

Figure 3.4: Project site specific windrose diagram for the months of March – May 2010


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

3.5.4 Air Environment

The baseline ambient air quality survey was undertaken for three months (March-May, 2010) covering summer season. All the parameters as per Central Pollution Control Board (National Ambient Air Quality Standards, 18 November, 2009) were monitored in the baseline survey.

Selection of Sampling Stations

To establish the baseline air quality scenario, six (6) representative ambient air quality monitoring stations were selected within the study area covering all land use categories and in compliance with CPCB guidelines. Out of six, three sites were selected in downwind, one site in upwind and other two sites were selected perpendicular to the wind direction. Predominant/ frequent wind directions, population zone and sensitive receptors have been given due cognizance while carrying out such selection exercise. Logistic considerations such as accessibility, security, and availability of reliable power supply, etc., were examined while finalizing the location of such stations. The location plans of the sampling stations are shown in Figure 3.5 and are summarized in Table 3.7.

Table 3.7 List of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations

Sl. No.

Station

Code Station Name Location Direction Present Land

Use

Distance from site (Km)

1. AQ1 Nanawada 20045’49.62”

70048’28.80” North-West Settlement Area 1.5

2. AQ2 Chikli 20047’7.84”

70051’3.71” North-East Rural

Settlement Area 5.0

3. AQ3 Sodum Bandhara

20043’58.48”

70048’28.80” South Water reservoir

(dried) 2.4

4. AQ4 Kob 20045’16.25”

70053’9.34” East Rural

Settlement Area 6.0

5. AQ5 Velan 20042’57.12”

70049’32.30” South-East Rural

Settlement Area 3.7

6. AQ6 Kaj 20044’57.16”

70047’28.80” West Rural

Settlement Area 2.5

Source: CES (i) Pvt. Ltd


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Methodology

All parameters as per National Ambient Air Quality Standards, 2009 (PM10, PM2.5), SO2, NO2, O3, and mercury were monitored and analyzed at six monitoring sites from March 2010 to May, 2010. 24 hourly samples were collected for PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and NO2 for twice a week. For Ozone and Carbon Monoxide, 8 hourly samples were collected once in a month at each location while for NH3, 24 hourly samples were collected once a month. For Lead, Arsenic, Nickel, Benzene and Carbon Monoxide, samples were collected once in a month during study period.

All the samples collected throughout the study period were analyzed using standard procedures and methodologies prescribed by Central Pollution Control Board.Minimum Detection Limits for different parameters are presented in Annex 3.1. and data is presented in Annex 3.1A.

The summarized report with respect to each parameter at all the monitoring stations is presented in the following Table 3.8 (a) through Table 3.8(F).

Respirable Suspended Particulate Matter (PM10)

Table 3.8(A) Concentration of Respirable Suspended Particulate Matter (PM10) in Air samples

PM10 (µg/m3) Station

Code

Station Name

Area Category Max Min Mean Standard

AQ1 Nanawada Residential 58.22 20.11 45.60 100

AQ2 Chikhli Residential 57.93 32.15 46.83 100

AQ3 Sodum Bhandara

Residential 59.28 32.99 47.65 100

AQ4 Kob Residential 69.54 35.82 49.67 100

AQ5 Velan Residential 54.66 38.33 46.53 100

AQ6 Kaj Residential 64.52 34.18 51.34 100


The 24-hourly values of PM10 recorded at various stations ranges between 20.11 and 69.54 μg/m3. These values are well within the limits prescribed by National Ambient Air Quality Standards, 2009. The maximum concentration (69.54μg/m3) at Kob followed by 64.52 μg/m3 at Kaj. Minimum concentrations of PM10 were recorded to be 20.11μg/m3 at Nanawada.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Fine Particulate Matter (PM 2.5)

Table 3.8(B) Concentration of Fine Particulate Matter (PM 2.5) in Air Samples PM 2.5 (µg/m3) Station

Code

Station Name




AQ3 Sodum Bhandara

Residential 28.13 13.37 18.32 60





The 24-hourly values of PM 2.5 recorded at various stations varied between 10.08 and 29.22 μg/m3.

The 24-hourly average value for Particulate Matter (PM 2.5) recorded at all the six (6) locations are well within the National Ambient Air Quality Standards. The maximum PM 2.5 value recorded at AQ6 (Kaj) is 29.22 µg/m3. The minimum PM 2.5 value recorded at AQ4 Kob is 10.08 µg/m3.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

Table 3.8(C) Concentration of Sulphur Dioxide in Air Samples

SO2 (µg/m3) Station

Code

Station Name




AQ3 Sodum Bhandara

Residential 7.53 4.00 5.55 80





The 24-hourly values of SO2 recorded at various stations varied between 4.00 and 9.58 μg/m3. These values are well below the National Ambient Air Quality Standards prescribed by CPCB. Maximum value of SO2 (9.58 μg/m3) was recorded at AQ2, Chikhli followed 9.42 μg/m3 at Kaj (AQ6). Minimum SO2 values recorded at all the monitoring stations is 4.0 μg/m3.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

Table 3.8(D) Concentration of Oxides of Nitrogen in Air samples

NOx (µg/m3) Station

Code

Station Name




AQ3 Sodum Bhandara

Residential9.59 5.65 7.62

80





The 24-hourly values of NOx recorded at various places varied between 5.21and 12.15 μg/m3. The maximum concentration of NOx was found to be 12.15 μg/m3 at AQ2 (Chikhli) whereas the minimum value is recorded 5.21 μg/m3 at Kaj. The mean value of NOx concentration is ranging between


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

7.62μg/m3 and 8.80μg/m3. The concentration of NOx is found to be below National Ambient Air Quality Standards (80 μg/m3) for residential, rural & other areas.

Ozone (O3)

Table 3.8(E) Concentration of Ozone (O3) in Air Samples

O3 (µg/m3) Station Code

Station Name


AQ1 Nanawada Residential 69 52 59 100

AQ2 Chikhli Residential 81 48 65 100

AQ3 Sodum Bhandara

Residential 79 50 62 100

AQ4 Kob Residential 83 53 68 100

AQ5 Velan Residential 65 42 54 100

AQ6 Kaj Residential 75 66 70 100


The 8 hourly values of Ozone recorded at various stations varied between 42 and 83 μg/m3.. The 8 hourly average values of Ozone at all the six (6) locations are well within the National Ambient Air Quality Standards. The


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

maximum O3 value recorded is at AQ4 Kob (83 µg/m3). The minimum Ozone value recorded is at AQ5 Velan (42 µg/m3). The Ozone values recorded at AQ2 Chikhli, AQ3 and AQ6 Kaj are also substantially high.

Source: CES(India) Pvt. Ltd.

Mercury (Hg):

The filter papers obtained after air sampling were processed for analysis mercury using Coal Vapour AAS technique. Mercury was found to be below detectable limit (<1 ng/m3) in all the samples.

3.5.5 Noise Environment

A total of 6 representative locations in and around the plant site (as indicated in Table 3.9) covering industrial, commercial, residential and silence areas were selected for measurement of present status of ambient noise levels. The stations were selected judiciously based on considerations like obstruction free exposure of equipment, accessibility of the location during day and night, and security & safety of the instrument.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.9: Details of Noise Monitoring stations

Sl. No.

Code Location Description

Direction Present Land Use

Distance Location

1 NQ1 Nanawada North-West

Settlement Area

1.5 20045’49.62”N

70048’28.80”E

2 NQ2 Chikli North-East

Rural Settlement Area

5.0 20047’7.84”N

70051’3.71”E

3 NQ3 Sodam Bandhara

South Water Reservoir (Dried)

2.4 20043’58.48”N

70048’28.80”E

4 NQ4 Kob East Rural Settlement Area

6.0 20045’16.25”N

70053’9.34”E

5 NQ5 Velan South-East

Rural Settlement Area

3.7 20042’57.12”N

70049’32.30”E

6 NQ6 Kaj West Rural Settlement Area

2.5 20044’57.16”N

70047’28.80”E

3.5.5.1 Ambient Noise Levels in the Study Area

The daytime and nighttime noise values observed during the field visit are summarized in Table 3.10.

Table 3.10: Leq dB (A) Values (Day & Night)

Leq (dBA) L (dBA) Location Code

Location Description

Area Category

Day Night Lmin Lmax

NQ1 Settlement Area Residential cum Agriculture

49.56 41.20 39.58 51.46

NQ2 Rural Settlement Area

Residential cum Agriculture

50.14 39.50 35.63 52.42

NQ3 Water reservoir - 48.13 39.20 35.33 51.24



49.50 42.25 34.68 50.76

NQ5 Rural Agriculture 50.20 41.40 37.82 52.69


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.10: Leq dB (A) Values (Day & Night)

Leq (dBA) L (dBA) Location Code

Location Description

Area Category

Day Night Lmin Lmax

Settlement Area



48.12 40.50 38.92 50.66

Source: Monitoring done by CES (i) Pvt. Ltd

Day time equivalent noise level in the study area varied between 48.12-50.20 dB(A). Correspondingly, the night time equivalent noise level ranged between 39.20-42.25 dB (A).

It was observed that the daytime as well as nighttime, ambient noise scenario in residential, commercial & sensitive areas are found within acceptable limits.

3.5.6 Hydrology of the Site7

The major rivers which traverse through this region are Singhwadi River, Somat and Rupan Nadi. These rivers originate and flow from the Gir Range. Of these rivers Singhwadi River and Somat Nadi flow in North-South West and Rupan Nadi flows in the North-East to South direction respectively. As they are seasonal rivers with very little water flow in lean season and no water samples were collected from these surface water sources.

The studied area falls in Sangavadi river basin. The Sanagavadi river is ephemeral in nature which originating from Gir Jungle & flows in north of the proposed plant premises at a distance of about 2 km & finally meets Arabian sea. Its length is 38 km & 576 sq km catchment area. Besides this river, the rainfall runoff in the study area is generated through various minor natural drains which follows physiographic gradient in general towards south & ultimately meet Arabian sea. One earthern dam is constructed on the Sanagavadi river before its confluence with Arabian sea. The north-eastern boundary of proposed Plant area is bounded by this Earthern Dam. Rainfall plays a major role in groundwater availability of semi-arid region like Kodinar as it is the major source available for groundwater recharge, besides seepage from recent canal network. Average surface run-off coefficients considered for different surfaces as per CGBW norms are given below:

7 Source: Report Submitted by Ground Water and Mineral Investigation Consultancy Center (P) Ltd. Jaipur to SPEGPL in December 2010


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Run –off coefficient of roof top area : 85%

Run- off coefficient of paved area : 75%

Run- off coefficient of open alluvial land with

flat to gentle slope topography : 15%

Aquifer Types

The area is largely occupied by Miliolite limestone as main aquifers with reference to explored depth so far. The Miliolite limestone aquifer of Pleistocene to Sub-Recent age, comprises bands of limestone varying in thickness and hardness and inter bedded with bands of Shale and Marl. The ground water in this formation occurs under unconfined to confined conditions. The dynamic water zone is present in the depth range of 2 m to 11 m, which is controlled by unconfined aquifer.

Water Levels & Groundwater Flow Direction

The water table in the studied area ranges between 2.5 m to 9 m below ground level as per post-monsoon hydro-inventory of the existing wells. The average seasonal fluctuation is 3 m as per hydrogeological inventory of the wells examined in the area. Existing wells in the studied area are shown in Figure 3.6 and hydrogeological well inventory data are shown in Table 3.10A. Water level contour maps are given in Figure 3.7.

The Contour Map of the project site is shown in Figure 3.8.

3.5.7 Surface Water Quality

A study on marine environmental impact assessment study was carried out by the the Indomer Coastal Hydraulics (P) LTD. Chennai during October 2009 – January 2010, India. Surface Water samples were collected during the study at 10 locations in open sea as shown in Figure 3.9. At all locations, the samples were collected at surface, mid depth and bottom. Van Dorn water samplers were used for the sample.

3.5.7.1 Results and Discussion

The concentrations of Physico-chemical parameters are presented in Table 3.11 and are discussed in the following subsections.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.11: Analytical Results of Surface Water Samples

Temperature: Steep gradients of sea water temperature across the depths bear direct impact on the productivity and animal colony of the region. The temperature varied from 24.17° C to 24.69° C among all 10 locations (Table 3.11). There was no significant variation in temperature with the distance from the shore. The variation of temperature in the water column is insignificant which suggests that the system will not result in any significant vertical stratification.

pH: Variations in pH due to chemical and other industrial discharges render a water column unsuitable for the rearing of fish and other aquatic


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

life. pH is a very sensitive and most important parameter of an environmental study. Primary production, respiration and mineralization are able to alter the redox and pH of aqueous system due to the changes in oxygen and carbonate concentration. Identifying pH for acidic or alkaline disturbances enables one to locate zones of pollution and other quality conditions for the use of seawater. During the present study, the pH of the seawater samples varied from 8.1 to 8.24 at all 10 locations. The result shows that the pH values lie within the range of normal sea water.

Salinity: The estimated salinity of the collected water samples shows that it varied between 34.76 ppt and 34.89 ppt at all 10 locations in open sea. The results indicate that the salinity range lie within the range of normal seawater

Dissolved Oxygen (DO): Of all the dissolved gases in water, oxygen is the most important one for the survival of aquatic biota. The amount of oxygen dissolved in the water column at a given time is the balance between consumption and replenishment. In an ideal ecosystem, these two processes should be at equilibrium to keep the water column saturated with DO. Generally, the coastal waters are always found to be saturated and this is so in the present study area also.

DO values varied from 6.17 to 6.91 mg/l among all stations in the three transects. The principal natural physical factors affecting the concentration of oxygen in the marine environment are temperature and salinity. DO concentrations decrease with increasing temperature and salinity. So it is possible to calculate the theoretical saturation of dissolved oxygen for a given combination of temperature and salinity. Then the observed values can be compared to see whether the system can sustain the biological demand. The dissolved oxygen saturation (after applying 95% correction), was found to vary between 90.4 to 100.7% with an average value of 92.98 %. These values indicate a normal condition which shows good productivity in the project region. Review of literature indicates that the levels below 2 mg/l are only known to cause respiratory impacts on marine fauna.

Turbidity: Turbidity is another measure to understand the suspended particulate matter which controls the photosynthesis in the water column. The measured turbidity varied between 2 to 7.5 NTU along the western transect (stns. S1, S2 and S3), between 2.1 to 8.3 NTU along the middle transect (stns. S4, S5, S6 and S7) between 2.2 to 5.9 NTU along the Eastern transect (stns. S8, S9 and S10). The turbidity of the nearshore waters in the surface region was found within normal ranges indicating the


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

existence of unturbid and clean water whereas in the bottom waters the turbidity was high due to movement of underwater currents.

Nutrients: Nutrients determine the potential fertility of an ecosystem and hence it is important to know their distribution and behavior in different geographical locations and seasons. The fishery potential of an area is in turn, dependent on the availability of primary nutrients like nitrogen and phosphorus. Enrichment of these nutrients by anthropogenic inputs in the coastal waters having limited ventilation may result in water becoming eutrophicated.

The major inorganic species of nitrogen in water are ammonia, nitrite and nitrate of which nitrite is very unstable and ammonia is bio-chemically oxidized to nitrate. Hence, the concentrations of nitrite and ammonia are often very low in natural waters. The utilization of nutrients such as nitrates and phosphates can be taken as a measure of the productivity of the area.

Inorganic phosphate and nitrogen compounds in the sea play a decisive role in the biological production. Normally they occur in low concentrations. Their distribution in the coastal waters is mostly influenced by land run off. Since nutrients form an important index to the primary productivity of an ecosystem, the study of its distribution is important from the point of view of its role in the biological productivity and also as an indicator of pollutant.

Ammonia-Nitrogen (NH3-N): Unpolluted waters are generally devoid of ammonia and nitrite. However, coastal input by sewage and other nitrogenous organic matter and fertilizers can increase these nutrients to higher levels. In addition, ammonia in seawater can also come from various organisms as an excretory product due to the metabolic activity and the decomposition of organic matter by micro-organisms.

The concentrations of NH3-N varied from 0.96 to 2.17 µmol/l along the Western transect (stns. S1, S2 and S3), from 0.81 to 1.99 µmol/l along the middle transects (stns. S4, S5, S6 and S7) and from 1.03 to 1.70 µmol/l along the Eastern transect (stns. S8, S9 and S10). The values are in normal range and indicate a healthy environment.

Nitrite-Nitrogen (NO2-N): Nitrite is an important element, which occurs in seawater as an intermediate compound in the microbial reduction of nitrate or in the oxidation of ammonia. In addition, nitrite is excreted by phytoplankton especially, during plankton bloom.

The values of nitrite ranged from 0.15 to 0.62 µmol/l along the Western transect (stns. S1, S2 and S3), from 0.13 to 0.60 µmol/l along the middle transect (stns. S4, S5, S6 and S7) and from 0.35 and 0.56 µmol/l along the


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Eastern transect (stns. S8, S9 and S10). The distribution in spatial and vertical direction shows more random.

Nitrate-Nitrogen (NO3-N): Nitrate values are in general higher as compared to nitrite values. Nitrate is the final oxidation product of nitrogen compounds in seawater and is considered to be the only thermodynamically stable oxidation level of nitrogen in seawater. Nitrate is considered to be the micronutrient, which controls primary production in the euphotic surface layer. The concentration of nitrate is governed by several factors of which microbial oxidation of NH3 and uptake by primary producers may be important in the present study area.

The nitrate values varied from 2.58 to 3.81 µmol/l along the Western transect (stns. S1, S2 and S3), 2.31 to 3.77 µmol/l along the middle transect (stns. S4, S5, S6 and S7) and 2.31 to 4.27 µmol/l along the Eastern transect (stns. S8, S9 and S10). As in the case of nitrite the distribution is random.

Inorganic Phosphate (PO4-P): Inorganic phosphate is also an important nutrient like nitrogen compound in the primary production of the sea. The concentration of phosphate especially in the coastal waters is influenced by the land run off and domestic sewage.

The values of phosphate ranged from 0.23 to 0.47 µmol/l along the Western transect (stns. S1, S2 and S3), 0.26 to 0.66 µmol/l along the middle transect (stns. S4, S5, S6, and S7) and 0.26 to 0.72 µmol/l along the Eastern transect (stns. S8, S9 and S10). Surface water concentrations were generally lower than the subsurface levels probably due to the proximity to seabed sediments.

The water quality parameters observed at open sea do not show much variation and the water remains clean without any contamination or organic load.

Total Suspended Solids (TSS): Total Suspended solids in seawater originate either from autochthonous (biological life) or allochthonus (derived from terrestrial matter) sources. It varied from 4 mg/l to 276 mg/l at all 10 stations. The results of total suspended solids indicate a similar trend with the turbidity values, having low values at surface compared to the bottom layers.

Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD): Rate of aerobic utilization of oxygen is a useful tool to evaluate the intensity of deterioration in an aquatic medium. The oxygen taken up for the breakup of organic matter leads to a


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

reducing environment or in the event of release of excess nutrients, it may cause eutrophication.(Refer Table 3.12A) Table 3.12A: Biological Oxygen Demand in Surface Water Samples

For the present study the BOD varied from 1.04 to 3.98 mg/l along the western transect (stns. S1, S2 and S3), 1.12 to 2.98 mg/l along the middle transect (stns. S4, S5, S6, and S7) and from 2.02 to 3.69 mg/l along the Eastern transect (stns. S8, S9 and S10) (Table 3.12A). In general the surface values were lower than the subsurface values. The low BOD values indicate that oxidisable organic matter brought to the nearshore waters is effectively assimilated in coastal water. The narrow range of variation in BOD values indicate that the water column is well mixed in the project area.

Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD): Chemical oxygen demand (COD) determines the oxygen required for chemical oxidation of organic matter with the help of strong chemical oxidant. The organic matter gets oxidized completely by potassium dichromate (K2Cr2O7) in the presence of H2SO4 to produce CO2 plus H2O. The excess K2 Cr2 O7 remaining after the reaction was titrated with ferrous ammonium sulphate [Fe(NH4)2(SO4)2.6H2O] using ferroin as indicator. The volume of dichromate consumed gives the oxygen required for oxidation of the organic matter.

For the present study the COD varied from 30.4 to 41.6 mg/l along the western transect (stns. S1, S2 and S3), 30.4 to 49.6 mg/l along the middle transect (stns. S4, S5, S6 and S7) and from 30.4 to 49.6 mg/l along the Eastern transect (stns. S8, S9 and S10) (Table 3.12B).


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.12B: Chemical Oxygen Demand in Surface Water Samples

Heavy Metals

The concentration levels of Cadmium, Lead, Chromium and Mercury measured at all 10 locations across the depth are presented in Table 3.13.

Table 3.13: Concentration of Heavy Metals in Surface Water Samples


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Cadmium (Cd): The bioavailability and toxicity of trace metals such as Cd, Cu, and Zn are related to the activity of the free metal ion rather than the total metal concentration. For Cd it is the CdC12 complex that predominates in seawater. Therefore, salinity is the overriding factor which can alter free Cd ion activity {Cd2+}, and hence, bioavailability and toxicity in marine systems. The cadmium concentration in the study region was < 1.0 µg/l at all 10 locations.

Mercury (Hg): Mercury is considered as a non-essential and toxic element for living organisms. Mercury, amongst other heavy metals has attracted global concern due to its extensive use, toxicity, widespread distribution and biomagnification. A chemical whose concentration increases along a food chain is said to be biomagnified. The bio-concentrate of mercury in aquatic organisms such as oysters and mussels has been reported to be much greater than those contained in the environment in which they live. During the study period, the concentration of mercury ranged from <1.0 µg/l at all 10 locations.

Lead (Pb): Lead has been used by man for centuries and is amongst the most widely dispersed environmental contaminant. The considerably greater toxicity of organo-lead compounds compared to inorganic forms has led to studies whether; such compounds may be formed by natural process. Available literature suggests that alkylation of lead is purely a chemical process which may occur in organic-rich anoxic sediment.

The lead concentration for the sea water samples was estimated as lead strongly gets accumulated in fishes especially with shell fish. The lead concentration in the study region was < 1.0µg/l at all 10 locations.

Chromium (Cr): In dissolved form chromium is present as either anionic trivalent Cr(OH)3 or as hexavalent CrO4

2-. The amount of dissolved Cr3+ ions is relatively low, because these form stable complexes. Oxidation ranks from Cr(II) to Cr(VI). In natural waters trivalent chromium is most abundant. Chromium is a dietary requirement for a number of organisms. This however only applies to trivalent chromium. Hexavalent chromium is very toxic to flora and fauna. Chromium water pollution is not regarded one of the main and most severe environmental problems, although discharging chromium polluted untreated wastewater in rivers has caused environmental disasters in the past. Chromium (III) oxides are only slightly water soluble; therefore concentrations in natural waters are limited. Cr3+ ions are rarely present at pH values over 5, because hydrated chromium oxide (Cr(OH)3) is hardly water soluble.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Chromium (VI) compounds are stable under aerobic conditions, but are reduced to chromium (III) compounds under anaerobic conditions. The reverse process is another possibility in an oxidizing environment. Chromium is largely bound to floating particles in water. The LC50 value for chromium in sea fish lies between 7 and 400 ppm, and for algae at 0.032-6.4 ppm. In the study region chromium concentration was very low and the values from < 1.0µg/l.

Phenol: The main source of phenolic compounds in seawater is through plants. Additionally, they can also be released during humification processes occurring in soil. Higher concentrations occur in industrial wastewaters. Phenols can be toxic to marine organisms and can accumulate in certain cellular components. Chlorination of phenol-containing waters can lead to formation of chlorophenols with unpleasant odour and taste. The concentration of phenol in the study area was < 1.0µg/l all 10 locations.

Petroleum Hydrocarbons: The coastal waters are susceptible to oil pollution due to various maritime activities like fishing operation, spillage from oil tankers, port activities etc. In the study area the dissolved and dispersed Petroleum hydrocarbons from 0.05µg/l at all 10 locations. Out of the 13 fractions (Octane, Nonane, Decane, Undecane, Dodecane, Tridecane, Tetradecane, Pentadecane, Hexadecane, Heptadecane, Octadecane, Nonadecane and Eicosane) analyzed only 3 fractions (Dodecane, Tetradecane and Hexadecane) were found to be present in all samples collected from 10 stations. Of these three fractions, Hexadecane alone constituted 86% of total petroleum hydrocarbons.

3.5.8 Groundwater Quality

The groundwater occurs under unconfined condition and recharge takes place from the rain water. Nearly 50 open wells exist in the site. All are open wells having 3-5 m diameter and 15-20 m depth. The water table in these wells varies from 2m to 8m.

3.5.8.1 Groundwater Quality Monitoring

As shown in Figure 3.10, the groundwater quality monitoring was carried out at 6 locations i.e. Chhara (GW1),Sarakhari (GW2), Kob (GW3), Nanawada (GW4), Velan (GW5) and Kaj (GW6). The details are summarized in the following table.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Sl No.

Location code

Description Direction Distance

Latitude Longitude

1. GW1 Charra West 7.87 20044’32.36” 70042’56.35”

2. GW2 Sarakhari South East

8.62 20042’44.52” 70051’47.58”

3. GW3 Kob East 6.00 20045’16.25” 70053’9.34”

4. GW4 Nanawada North West

1.5 20045’49.62” 70048’28.77”

5. GW5 Velan South East

3.7 20042’57.12” 70049’32.30”

6. GW6 Kaj West 2.5 20044’57.16” 70047’28.80”

The groundwater quality monitoring results are presented in Table 3.14.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 67 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 3: Description of the Existing Environment Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table: 3.14 Results of Groundwater Quality Monitoring (March – May 2010)

Location (Groundwater Samples) IS 10500 Standard Sl. # Parameters Chhara

(GW1) Sarakhari (GW2) Kob (GW3) Nanawada

(GW4) Velan (GW5) Kaj (GW6) Desirable

Limit Permissible Limit

1. pH 8.2 8.2 8.1 7.5 7.7 8.1 6.5-8.5 -- 2. Odour Odourless Odourless Odourless Odourless Odourless Odourless Odourless -- 3. Taste Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable --

4. Colour, Hazen Unit 1 1 1 2 2 1 5 10

5. Turbidity, NTU 3 3 3.2 3.8 3.5 3.1 5 10

6. Total Suspended Solids (mg/l) 5 6 6 7 6 5 -- --

7. Total Dissolved Solids (mg/l) 482 491 812 1734 1162 624 500 2000

8. Total Hardness as CaCO3 (mg/l) 150 140 140 520 290 160 300 600

9. Chloride as Cl (mg/l) 30 30 160 425 265 30 250 1000

10. Residual Free Chlorine (mg/l) BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.2 --

11. Sulphate as SO4 (mg/l) 18 26 34 74 62 32 200 400

12. Nitrate as NO3 (mg/l) 8.7 9.2 9.7 11.2 10.4 8.2 45 100

13. Total Alkalinity (mg/l) 240 240 260 290 250 270 200 600

14. Fluoride as E (mg/l) 0.82 0.84 0.78 0.88 0.86 0.78 1.0 1.5

15. Dissolved Iron as Fe (mg/l) 0.045 0.052 0.061 0.082 0.055 0.045 0.3 1.0

16. Zinc as Zn (mg/l) 0.42 0.45 0.45 0.78 0.32 0.24 5 15

17. Calcium as Ca (mg/l) 44 40 40 192 108 48 75 200

18. Magnesium as Mg 9.7 9.7 9.7 9.7 4.8 9.7 30 100


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table: 3.14 Results of Groundwater Quality Monitoring (March – May 2010)

Location (Groundwater Samples) IS 10500 Standard Sl. # Parameters Chhara

(GW1) Sarakhari (GW2) Kob (GW3) Nanawada

(GW4) Velan (GW5) Kaj (GW6) Desirable

Limit Permissible Limit

(mg/l)

19. Cadmium as Cd (mg/l) BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.01 --

20. Copper as Cu (mg/l) BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.05 1.5

21. Mercury as Hg (mg/l) BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.001 --

22. Selenium as Se (mg/l) BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.01 --

23. Boron as B (mg/l) 0.2 0.1 0.11 0.12 0.01 0.01 1.0 5.0

24. Manganese as Mn (mg/l) 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.1 0.3

25. Aluminium as Al (mg/l) BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.03 0.2

26. Arsenic as As (mg/l) BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.05 --

27. Cyanide as CN (mg/l) BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.05 --

28. Anionic detergent , MBAS BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.2 1.0

29. Phenolic Compounds (mg/l) BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.001 0.002

30. Mineral Oil (mg/l) BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.01 0.03

31. Total Coliform MPN/100ml Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil

Source: Monitoring done by CES (i) Pvt. Ltd BDL: Below Detectable limit

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 69 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC January 2011 Chapter 3: Description of the Existing Environment Revision: R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Physical Parameters

Groundwater Quality is slightly alkaline in nature. pH values of water samples is varying between 7.5 and 8.2 which are within the desirable limits.

The water is odourless and taste of water is agreeable. Color in Hazen Unit varied between 1 and 2, which is well within desirable limit

Total Suspended Solids (TSS) varied from 5 to 7 mg/l. Total Dissolved Solids ranged between 482 and 1734 mg/l. High concentration of TDS has been recorded at GW3 Kob (812mg/l), GW6 Kaj (624 mg/l) and GW5 Velan (1162 mg/l). Total Hardness in the groundwater samples has been recorded between 140 to 520mg/l as CaCO3 which is below the prescribed limits. Maximum total hardness is recorded at GW3-Nanawada (520mg/l) whereas minimum hardness (140mg/l) is recorded at Sarakhari (GW2) and Kob(GW3).

Chemical Parameters

The value of the Chlorides recorded varying between 30 mg/l and 425 mg/l. Maximum Chloride concentration (425 mg/l) was recorded at Nanawada (GW4) followed by 265 mg/l at Velan (GW5) whereas the minimum chloride concentration (30mg/l) are recorded at Chara (GW1) and Sarakhari (GW2). The residual chlorine is found to be below detectable limit (BDL).

The value of the Sulfate recorded ranged between 18 mg/l and 74 mg/l which were well below permissible limits of 400 mg/l. Maximum concentration of sulfate (74mg/l) is recorded at Nanawada (GW4) whereas the minimum concentration (18 mg/l) was observed at Chhara (GW1).

The values of the nitrates varied between 8.7 mg/l and 11.2 mg/l which are well within permissible limit 100 mg/l respectively.

Total Alkalinity is varied from 240 to 290 mg/l as CaCO3 well within the permissible limits.

Fluoride levels have been recorded varying between 0.78 mg/l and 0.88 mg/l which are well within permissible limit 1.5 mg/l.

Dissolved Iron levels are varying between 0.045 mg/l and 0.082 mg/l which are well below the permissible limit 1.0 mg/l.

Calcium levels recorded varied between 40 mg/l and 192 mg/l. Maximum concentration of Calcium (192 mg/l) has been recorded at Nanawada (GW4) followed by 108mg/l at Velan (GW5) whereas the minimum concentration (40mg/l) at Sarakhari (GW2).The concentration of Calcium are well within below the permissible limits of 200 mg/l.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

The concentration of Magnesium recorded varied between 4.8 mg/l and 9.7 mg/l which are well below the permissible limit 100 mg/l.

Manganese values recorded varied between 0.02 mg/l and 0.04 mg/l which are well within the permissible limit 0.3 mg/l.

Anionic detergent in MBAS, Phenolic Compounds, Mineral Oil are not detected in the samples.

Heavy Metals

The Boron values recorded varied between 0.01 mg/l to 0.12 mg/l which are well below permissible limit 5.0 mg/l.

Zinc levels recorded varied between 0.24 mg/l and 0.78 mg/l which are much below the permissible limit 15 mg/l respectively.

Other heavy metals such as Cadmium, Copper, Mercury, Selenium, Arsenic, Cyanide, Chromium, lead etc. could not be detected in the water samples.

Biological parameters

Total Coli-form, E.coliform, and fecal coliform are absent in the groundwater samples.

3.5.9 Land Use and Land Cover

Method of Data Preparation

The land use/land cover has been presented in the form of a map prepared by using Survey of India Topographical sheet no. 46 L/09, 46 L/10, 46 L/13, and 46 L/14 and HTL from IRS P6 L4X image; scene – 06284, path – 06048. The satellite data has been processed using ERDAS Imagine software supported with ground checks and ground truth verification. Area and distance calculations have been carried out using GIS software after geo-referencing the interpreted data with the help of Survey of India topographical maps of the scale 1:50,000.

A map depicting major land use/ land cover classes comprising lands under Agriculture, Exposed Rocky Substrate, Habitation with Vegetation, Limestone Quarry, Mangrove Sparse, Mud Flat with Algal Growth, Mud Flat with Sparse Vegetation, Open / Vacant Land, Open Scrub, River, Salt Marsh, Salt Pan, Sandy area with Moderate Vegetation, Sandy area with Sparse Vegetation, Sandy Tidal Flat, Sea, Water body is provided in Figure 3.11. The map also marks the area within 10 km of the project site as the area of interest.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Areas under Different Land Use

The land use classification of the area within 10 km of the project site is summarized in Table 3.15.

Table 3.15 Area Statistics of Land use/ Land cover Map

Land use/Land Cover Classes Sq.m. Sq.km. Ha. Percentage

Agriculture 163541640 163.54164 16354.2 52.04

Aquaculture Pond 108856.75 0.10885675 10.8857 0.03

Embankment 127248.9922 0.127248992 12.7249 0.04

Exposed Rocky Substrate 2187300.031 2.187300031 218.73 0.70

Habitation with Vegetation 6615433.27 6.61543327 661.543 2.10

Limestone Quarry 887294.6172 0.887294617 88.7295 0.28

Mangrove Sparse 1725884.125 1.725884125 172.588 0.55

Mud Flat with Algal Growth 89652.3311 0.089652331 8.96523 0.03

Mud Flat with Sparse Vegetation 10313476.58 10.31347658 1031.35 3.28

Open / Vacant Land 3041297.551 3.041297551 304.13 0.97

Open Scrub 18132374.35 18.13237435 1813.24 5.77

River 14782950.24 14.78295024 1478.3 4.70

Salt Marsh 375227.5352 0.375227535 37.5228 0.12

Salt Pan 19423196.85 19.42319685 1942.32 6.18

Sandbar 618253.8286 0.618253829 61.8254 0.20

Sandy Area with Moderate Vegetation

4173131.924 4.173131924417.313 1.33

Sandy Area with Sparse Vegetation 7493590.168 7.493590168 749.359 2.38

Sandy Tidal Flat 206752.333 0.206752333 20.6752 0.07


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.15 Area Statistics of Land use/ Land cover Map

Land use/Land Cover Classes Sq.m. Sq.km. Ha. Percentage

Sea 58333532.5 58.3335325 5833.35 18.56

Stoney Waste 1075353.539 1.075353539 107.535 0.34

Waterbody 1033252.479 1.033252479 103.325 0.33

Total Area 314285700 314.2857 31428.6 100.00 Source: Interpretation & Ground Verification carried out by CES (i) Pvt. Ltd

Cropping Pattern

Among cereals the main crops are Bajra and Wheat. Jowar is generally grown for fodder purpose. Jowar is grown in and around Kodinar for grain purposes. Sugar Cane is also grown in Kodinar region. In district as a whole largest area is occupied by cotton, followed by Bajra and Jowar. In the recent years area under cotton has slowly and gradually gone down and its place has now been taken up by another important cash crop, namely Ground Nut. In the recent years the food crops are being replaced by non-food crops. The area under Paddy is negligible and is grown under irrigation by few cultivators just to meet their own requirements. Adad, Gram and Mung constitute the principal varieties among pulses. Among non-food crops, Groundnut, Sesame and Cotton predominate. Cultivation of such crops as Barley, Tur, Tobacco, Garlic, etc. is either totally absent or negligible due to inadequacy of rains.

3.5.10 Biological Environment

Biological system constitute of plant and animal communities which interact not only among themselves but also with physical and chemical characteristics of the environment. Biological communities are indicators of climatic and edaphic factors because of their strong interrelationship. Stability of the biosphere depend on the biodiversity of the area , which in turn leads to the stability of climate and, water regime, soil fertility, quality of air, and overall health of life support systems on earth. Biodiversity is the source from which the human race derives food, fodder, fuel, fiber, shelter, medicine, and raw materials for industry, for humankind’s ever changing, ever increasing, needs and aspirations.

Therefore biological communities are important features of the environment. The study has been carried by primary survey of the project area, consultation with the local habitants and secondary data review.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

A Flora of the Project Area

The Project district consists of Tropical Dry Deciduous, Northern Tropical Thorn and Littoral and Swamp Forest. As per the State of Forest Report 2009 by Forest survey of India, the forest cover of Junaghad district is 1600 Km2 (19.32% of the geographical area of the district). The dense forest cover consists of only 1% of total forest whereas the moderate and open forest types are 59% and 40% respectively. Besides 24 Km2 area of the district is consist of scrubland.

Within the 10km radius from the project site there are four (4) Reserve Forest covering an area of 731.86 ha. There are five (5) patches of unclassified forest covering an area of 526.3 ha. No forest land will be acquired for the project. The distance of the forest areas from the project site is given in the Table 3.16.

Table 3.16: Forest Area within 10km radius from the Project Site

Village Name

Survey No. Area (Ha) Category of Forest Aerial Distance from Thermal power Site

Sarakhari 587 135.73 Reserve Forest 4 km

207 353.79 Reserve Forest 1.0 km Nanavada

207/4 14.01 Reserve Forest 1.0 km

Chhara 532 228.33 Reserve Forest 8.7 km

394 82.38 Unclassified

394/5 43.01 Unclassified


384 222.37 Unclassified

Velan


3.5 km and 5.2km

The striking feature of the project area is the large portion of the landscape which is devoted for agricultural practices. The villages nearest to the Thermal Power site are Kaj (approx 2 Km) and Nanawada (approx 1.5 Km) whose land will be purchased for the development of the Project. Primary flora survey of the area was conducted in the vicinity of the villages and on the Thermal Power site and associated facility areas.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Large fields of Cotton (Gossypium spp.), Groundnut (Arachis hypogaea) and Sugarcane (Saccharum officinarum) were observed throughout the area. Groundnut and Cotton crops were more common in Kaj and Nanawada areas whereas the major crop grown in Kodinar area was Sugarcane. The other major crops of the project area are Pearl millet (Pennisetum glaucum) and Wheat (Triticum aestivum). Jowar (Sorghum vulgare) is also cultivated in the area.

Most of the agricultural fields have planted trees such as Naryal (Cocos nucifera), Neem (Azadirachta indica), Vad (Ficus bengalensis), Badam (Terminalia catappa) and Sabaval (Leucenia leucocephala).

Pulses cultivated in this area are Mag (Vigna aconitifolia), Tuver (Cajanus cajan). Bhindi (Abelmoschus esculentus) Methi (Trigonella foenumgranecum) and Brinjal (Solanum melongena) are the vegetables grown in the project area

Sugarcane Field in the Project area View of Bajri Field after harvesting

Cotton Field in the Project area Groundnut Field in the Project area


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Fruit yielding varieties observed in the villages were Sitafal (Annona squamosa), Tadfali (Borassus flabellifer), Papaya (Carica papaya), Khajoor (Phoenix dactylifera), Jamfal (Psidium guajava), Amali (Tamarindus indicum) Mango (Mangifera indica) and Chikku (Achras zapota). Besides agricultural fields tree species were observed along roads and households in the villages. The major species constituted of Neem (Azadirachta indica), Baval (Acacia nilotica), Khair (Acacia catechu) and Pipal (Ficus religiosa)

Shrubs are the dominant perennial species of this area, represented mainly by Ganda Baval (Prosopis juliflora), Aakado (Calotropis procera & Calotropis gigantea), Chani Bor (Zizyphus nummularia), Ketki (Agave americana), Fafdo Thor (Opuntia sp), Thor (Euphorbia nivulia) Kerdo (Capparis deciduas) and Lantana (Lantana camara).

Herbaceous species constitute of Tulsi (Ocimum sanctum), Kothimdu (Cucumis callosus) Anghedo (Achyranthes aspera), Darudi (Argemone mexicana) Jhinj (Dicanthum annulatum), Piludi (Solanum nigrum) Panicum

Hoka tree (Palm) grown in the area Naryal tree grown in the area

Methi grown after Groundnut harvest Vad tree grown in the agricultural field


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

antidotale and Cenchrus ciliaris. The climbers were observed along the agricultural hedges and road side hedges of the study are such as Chanothi (Abrus precatorius) Galo (Tinospora cordifolia) Jungli turia

There are four Reserve Forest and five patches of unclassified forest in the 10 km radius of the project area. The forest types are open shrub type with dominant bushes which are found abundantly in arid zone. Plantation has been also done by forest department.

A quantitative study was done to determine the diversity of open shrub forest. Random quadrat survey was conducted in the forest area. Quadrat size of 10m x10m was used to determine combined diversity of trees, shrubs and climbers, since the area was dominated by shrub species. For herbs and grasses quadrat size of 1m x 1m was used.

Frequency, Density, Abundance, importance value of the area is given in the table below. The IVI value reflects the dominance of species in an area.

View of quadrat survey in the Forest Area

Gando baval in the Project area Bor in the Project area


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.17: Assessment of Flora

Species Frequency Density Abundance Importance Value Index (IVI)

Trees &Shrubs

Acacia catechu 11 0 1 7

Azadirachta indica 11 0 2 10

Acacia senegal 11 0 1 7

Acacia nilotica 11 0 2 10

Leucenia leuocephala 11 0 1 7

Prosopis cineraria 11 0 2 10

Terminalia catappa 11 0 1 7

Prosopis juliflora 67 4 6 67

Calotropic gigantea 22 0 2 13

Zizyphus nummularia 78 5 6 74

Agave americana 11 0 3 14

Euphorbia nivulia 11 0 2 10

Lantana camara 44 1 3 28

Xanthium strumarium 22 1 4 22

Opuntia sp 11 0 2 10

Dicanthum annulatum 11 0 1 7

Leucenia leuocephala 11 0 1 7

Herbs & Grasses

Apluda arista 33 1 3 68

Ipomea cairica 22 0 2 30

Aloe barbadensis 22 0 2 30

Ocimum sanctum 22 0 2 30

Achyranthes aspera 33 0 1 26

Parthenium hysterophorus

22 0 2 30

Cynodon dactylon 67 2 2 86


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

The Flora of forest area was represented by shrub species. Dominant species in the area are Zizyphus nummularia and, Prosopis juliflora. Other species are Lantana camara, Agave americana, Euphorbia nivulia, Calotropic gigantea. Few herb species were present at the site Cynodon dactylon, Apluda arista and Aloe barbadensis were common herbaceous and grass species

Shannon – Wiener Index (H): The number of species and number of individuals in a community is measure of species diversity which depends on stability of the habitat. Vegetation of the study area was assess by determining Shannon – Wiener diversity index (1963).

H = -Σ (ni / n) loge (ni / n)

ni = Number of individuals of each species in the sample

n = Total number of individuals

Assessment of diversity index of the project area shows that the diversity of the area is low for both trees & shrubs and grasses & herbs. The value of Diversity Index for trees & shrubs is 1.59 and for grasses & herbs it is 1.44.

The comprehensive list of the Flora of the area is given in the Table 3.18. Table 3.18: Flora of the Project Area

S.No Botanical Name Local Name

Trees

1. Acacia nilotica Baval

2. Acacia senegal Gorad

3. Acacia catcheu Kanti,Babnar Kher

4. Casuarina equsetifolia Saru

5. Holoptelia inlegrifolis Kanjho

6. Syzygium cumini Jambu

7. Pongamia pinnata Karanja

8. Butea monosperma Khakharo

9. Prosopis cineraria Khijado

10. Azadirachta indica Limado

11. Ficus religiosa Piplo

12. Ficus bengalensis Vad

13. Ficus glomerata Umbar

14. Delonix elata Sandhesaro


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.18: Flora of the Project Area


15. Moringa oleifera Saragvo

16. Leucenia leuocephala Sabaval

17. Eucalyptus species Nilgiri

18. Tamarindus indica Amli

19. Zizyphus mauritiana Bordi

20. Terminalia catappa Badam

21. Annona squamosa Sitafal

22. Carica papaya Papaya

23. Phoenix dactylifera Khajoor

24. Psidium guajava Jamfa

25. Mangifera indica Mango

26. Musa paradisiacal Banana

27. Achras zapota Chikku

Shrubs

28. Prosopis juliflora Ganda baval

29. Calotropic gigantea Akado

30. Agave americana Ketki

31. Vitex negundo Negod

32. Euphorbia nivulia Thor

33. Jatropha curcas Ralanjyot

34. Zizyphus nummularia Chani bor

35. Tecoma undulata Ragatroydo

36. Opuntia sp Fafdo Thor

37. Capparis deciduas Kerdo

38. Lantana camara Lantana

39. Thevetia peruviana Pili karan

40. Xanthium strumarium Gokhru

41. Hibiscus rosa sinensis Jasund

42. Bougainvillea spectabilis Bougainvel

43. Gossypium herbaceum Kapas

44. Solanum melongena Brinjal


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.18: Flora of the Project Area


Herbs and Grasses

45. Cassia auriculata Awal

46. Argemone mexicana Daroodi

47. Bolnariochloa intarmedia Dharokhadi

48. Dichanthium annulatum Jhinjv

49. Apluda arista Bhangaro

50. Cucumis callosus Kothimdu

51. Panicum antidotale -

52. Cenchrus ciliaris -

53. Solanum nigrum Piludu

54. Aloe barbadensis Aloe

55. Parthenium hysterophorus Gajar gass

56. Tridex procumbens Bhangro

57. Vigna aconitifolia Mag

58. Cajanus cajan Tuver

59. Zea mays Makai

60. Sorghum bicolor Jowar

61. Triticum aestivum Gehu

62. Abelmoschus esculentus Bhindi

63. Solanum indicum Ringni

64. Trigonella foenumgranecum Methi

65. Vincea rosea Sada Bahar

Climbers

66. Abrus precatorius Chanothi

67. Tinospora cordifolia Galo

68. Luffa. acutangula Jungli turia

69. Luffa cylindrica Galku

70. Ipomea cairica Besharam

Medicinal Plants of the Study Area

Plants are known for their therapeutic value and uses since ancient period. The medicinally important plants observed growing in the study area and their usage is given in Table 3.19.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.19: Medicinal Plants and Usages

Scientific Name Vernacular Name

Useful parts Medicinal uses

Leaves Boils and digestive disorder, and injury Aloe vera Kumarpathu Whole

plant Constipation, fever, liver trouble, piles

leaves Antidote, cough, digestive disorder, rheumatism, swellings

Abrus precatorius Chanothi

Roots Asthma, Cough, analgesic, peptic ulcers

Roots Malaria.

Seeds Demulcent Ocimum sanctum Tulsi Whole plant Bronchitis, cough, ear ache, flatulence

Fruits Astringent, joint pain Zizyphus

nummularia Chanibor

Leaves Joint pain, Boils

Zizyphus mauritiana Bor, Bordi Fruits Asthma, blood purifier, dysentery, fever, vomiting

Bark Astringent, biliousness, bronchitis,

cough, diarrhea, dysentery, lecuoderma, piles, skin diseases Acacia nilotica Baval

leaves Diarrhea, gonorrhea

Argemone mexicana Darudi Leaves Boils

Leaves Anthelmintic antipyretic antiseptic Azadirachta indica Limdo

Barks Antiseptic, blood purifier, boils, fever, tumors, ulcers, wounds

Calotropis gigantea Akado Roots Dental problem, rheumatism, stomach disorder

Carica papaya Papaya Fruit Abortifacient , bleeding piles, skin

diseases

Fruit Asthma, Diarrhea, dysentery, thirst,

tonic Syzygium cumini Jambu

Seeds Diabetes

Vincea rosea Sada Bahar Whole Plant

Leaukamia, Hypotensiv, Antispasmodic , Atidot


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Dependence on Plants by the Local Inhabitants

Man depended on plants since time immemorial. Our knowledge of the intimate relationship between early man and plants is mainly due to the surviving tradition. This relationship now forms the base of the interdisciplinary science known as Ethanobotany. The inhabitants of the project area depend on plants for Fruit, fodder for cattle, fuel etc. The people in the area are mostly farmers and do cultivation for their livelihood. The agricultural crops also provide fodder to their cattle. Some of the plants are discussed below

Acacia nilotica (Baval): Seeds and pods are used as cattle fodder. Wood is used as timber and for manufacturing agricultural implements & window frames. Also used as fuel by poor people

Ailanthus excels (Ardu): Used in skin diseases, wood is used for preparing small boats, knife handle, toys, and match sticks. Leaves and shoots are used as fodder

Azadirachta indica (Limdo) : Leaves used to fumigate the surroundings as an insects and mosquitoes repellent. Leaf extract in water is sprinkled on crops to kill pests. Leaves are spread on the beds of child suffering with viral infections like chicken pox, etc

Ficus bengalensis (Vad): This tree are planted in agricultural fields for shade and cool air

Arachis hypogaea (Groundnut): Oil, fodder

Carica papaya (Papaya), Terminalia catappa (Badam) , Annona squamosa (Sitafal) , Mangifera Indica (Aam), Psidium guajava (Jamfal) Achras zapota (Chikoo) : Fruit Trees

Orchards of Mango (Mangifera indica) and Chikku (Achras zapota) were observed in the study area. The “Kesar” variety of Mango from Junagadh region is very delicious and attracts a special attention in the national and international markets. Coconut plantation is very popular in this area. Most of the Coconut trees (Cocoas nucifera) were observed in between the agricultural fields and village surroundings.

Rare and Endangered Flora in the Study Area

The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity.

Hyphaene dichotoma (Hoka / Palm tree) observed in the project area has been assigned the status of Lower Risk/near threatened (ver 2.3) as International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN)

Hyphaene dichotoma is common tree in the coastal belt of Gujarat especially at Diu, Una, in Saurashtra and Ubharat in South Gujarat

B Fauna of the Project Area

For the documentation of the faunal biodiversity of the study area a baseline survey had been conducted and consultation with local habitants.

Avifauna of the Study Area

The common birds observed in the area are Peacock, Myna, Cattle Egret, Babbler, Raven, Bulbul, Pigeon and Koel. These birds are also observed in the residential areas. Flamingoes, Cranes and Sea gulls are the common birds seen feeding in the coastal areas.

During winter seasons migratory birds are also reported to visit the nearby areas. There is fresh water Wetland Kaj - Nanavada close to the Thermal Power Site. The wetland has come in existence partly due to natural delta region of small rivers emerging from the Gir and meeting the Arabian Sea near Kodinar, and partly due to construction of earthen bund to store fresh river water and prevent inflow of seawater. During winter, large numbers of resident and migratory birds visit this wetland. Seagulls, Pelican, Flamingo, Common and Domicile Crane, Coot, Painted Stroke, Rosy Pelican, Common Teal, Cotton Teal and different species of Ducks can be spotted in the wetlands.

About 40 species of birds were observed by Indira Gadhvi (pers.comm. 2003) in the Kaj wetland. The wetland regularly harbours more than 20,000 birds during winter.

Table 3.20: Species of Avifauna with high Population

Scientific name Common name Population in Jan 2003

1 % Bio-geographic population

Pelican onocrotalus Great White Pelecanus 300 230

Grus virgo Demoiselle Crane 27120 1000

Platalea leucorodia Spoon bill 500 230


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Scientific name Common name Population in Jan 2003

1 % Bio-geographic population

Philomachus pugnax Ruff 10000 1000

Limosa limosa Black Tailed Godwit 70000 1000

Note: 1% population estimates based on Wetlands International (2002)

Two globally threatened and four near threatened species have been reported in the area. The species are given below.

Vulnerable species

Greater Spotted Eagle (Aquila clanga)

Eastern Imperial Eagle (Aquila heliacal)

Near Threatened species

Painted Stork (Mycteria leucocephala)

Black-necked Stork (Ephippiorhynchus asiaticus)

Lesser Flamingo (Phoenicopterus minor)

Pallid Harrier (Circus macrourus)

Black headed ibis (Threskiornis melanocephalus)

Conservation dependent species

Dalmatian Pelican ( Pelecanus crispus)

The threats and conservation issues of the wetland are:

Draining of water in peak migratory season for irrigation

Invasion by Prosopis juliflora

Grazing

Poaching

The wetland is facing siltation due to over-grazing in the catchment area. This is an irrigation reservoir, and the villagers have the right to use water for irrigation. The lake is bordered by three villages- Nanavada, Pipalava and Chikhli. Maximum depth of the lake is 2 m. During the hightide, particularly on full moon and no moon days, tidal water from the Arabian Sea touches the dam. Thus, one side of the dam is a large, shallow freshwater lake with moderate vegetation and on the other side the tidal mudflat attracts waterfowl in winter. The maximum water is seen during July and August and minimum during March when the lake is totally dry. As the farmers of surrounding villages draw the water to irrigate their crops


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

from October onwards, the lake almost dries out by the end of February or March. The farmers use diesel engine or submersible water pumps to draw the water.

The comprehensive list of avifauna found in the region is given below Table 3.21.

Table 3.21: List of Birds dwelling in the Area

Local name Common Name Scientific Name IWPA Status 1972

Kadar Myna Acridotheres tristis

Schedule IV

Nano kalkalio Kingfisher Alcedo atthis Schedule IV

Murdhabi Common Teal Anas crecca Schedule IV

Tiliyari batak Duck,Spot billed

Anas poecilorhyncha

Schedule I

Jalbhil Darter, Indian

Anhinga melanogaster

Schedule IV

Pidi dhanchidi Pipit Anthus campestris Schedule IV

Kaljango Spotted Eagle Aquila clanga -

Shahi Garud Imperial Eagle Aquila heliacal -

Khokhadbaglo Heron Ardeola grayii Schedule IV

Dhorbaglo Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis Schedule IV

Sonara Nightjar indian Caprimulgus asiastiuc Schedule IV

Hoco Coucal greater Centropus sinensis

-

Panpatai Harrier Marsh Circus aeruginosus

-

Panpatai Harrier Montagu’s Circus pygargus -

Panpatai Pallid Harrier Circus macrourus -

Kaburar Rock Pigeon Columba livia -

Kagdo Crow Corvus splendens Schedule IV

Desichans Blue Jay Coracias benghalensis Schedule IV

Rangodhlo Courser Cursorius -


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



Indian coromandelicus

Nani batak Duck Dendrocygna bicolor

Schedule IV

Kado kosi Black drongo Dicrurus macrocercus Schedule IV

Karobaglo Egret, Western reef

Egretta gularis -

Dhonk Black necked Stork

Ephippiorhynchus asiaticus

Schedule IV

Chatki makhimar Flycatcher, Red-Throated

Ficedula parva Schedule IV

Dasadi Common Coot Fulica atra Schedule IV

Jalmurgi Moorhen Gallinula chloropus

-

Kunj Crane Grus grus Schedule IV

Kunj Demoiselle Crane

Grus virgo -

Kalkalio White breasted Kingfisher

Halcyon coromanda Schedule IV

Gull Gull brown headed

Larus brunnicephalus -

Motagadero Black Tailed Godwit

Limosa limosa -

Tarklo Chestnut-headed Bee-eater

Merops leschenaulti -

Vachetdholo baglo

Egret Mesophoyx intermedia

Schedule IV

Dhonk Painted Stork Mycteria leucocephala

Schedule IV

Chakli Sparrow Passer domesticus

-


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



Mor Peafowl Pavo cristatus Schedule I

Pen Pelican Pelecanus crispus

Schedule IV

Gulabi Pen Pelican Pelecanus onocrotalus

Schedule IV

Babbler Marsh Babbler Pellomeum palustris Schedule IV

Vichetkajio Cormorant Indian

Phalacrocorax fuscicollis

Schedule IV

Nanokajio Little Cormorant Phalacrocorax niger Schedule IV

Tilio Ruff Philomachus pugnax -

Nano Surkabh Flamingo Phoenicopterus minor Schedule IV

Surkhab Flamingo greater

Phoenicopterus rubber

Schedule IV

Batumdi Sandgrouse Pterocles exustus

Schedule IV

Bulbul Bulbul Pycnonotus cafer Schedule IV

Nana vabagli Little Tern Sterna albifrons -

Holdi Ring Dove Streptopelia decaocto Schedule IV

Holdi Rufous Turtle Dove

Streptopelia orientalis Schedule IV

Dhorikankansar Black headed ibis Threskiornis

melanocephalus

Schedule IV

Dubki Little Grebe Tachybaptus ruficollis Schedule IV

Titodi Lapwing Vanellus indicus Schedule IV

Saphadpuchtitodi Lapwing Vanellus leucurus Schedule IV

Wildlife of the Project area: There is no Forest area within the Thermal Power Site. However, open scrublands are present between agricultural fields. There are four Reserved Forest within 10 km of the proposed site. The list of fauna dwelling in the area is given in the Table 3.22.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.22: List of Wildlife dwelling in the Area

Status Category Common Name Scientific Name

IWPA 1972 IUCN

Nilgai or Blue Bull Boselaphus tragocamelus

Sch III LC

Jackal Canis aureus Sch II LC

Rat Rattus rattus Sch V LC

Jungle Cat Felis chaus Sch II DD

Field mouse Mus booduga Sch V LR/ LC

Monkey Macaca mulatta Sch II LR/ nt

Mammals

Common Mongoose Herpestes edwardsi Sch II LR/ nt

Common garden lizard Calotes versicolor - -

Common Indian monitor Varanus bengalensis Sch I LC

Indian chameleon Chameleon zeylanicus

Indian cobra Naja naja Sch II

Russels viper Vipera russelli Sch II LR

Reptiles

Common Krait Bungarus caeruleus - LC

(V: Vulnerable NT: Near Threatened LC: Least Concern

LR/lc or LC: Least Concern DD-data Deficient)

Domestic Fauna

Animal husbandry is popular in the region. Domestic animals are integral part of the ecosystem of the area. They feed on agricultural remains and in the open scrubland. Every farmer owns buffalos and cows. Other animal reared include goat, Ox, Cat and Dog.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Rare and Endangered Fauna in the Study Area

Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, amended on 17th January 2003, is an Act to provide protection of wild animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith or ancillary or incidental thereto with a view to ensuring the ecological and environmental security of the country. The Wildlife falling under schedule I are most critical and require protection, while hunting of all the schedule species is prohibited.

Among the birds in the study area, Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus), is included in schedule I of Wildlife protection Act (1972), while other birds are included in Schedule IV. Greater Spotted Eagle (Aquila clanga) and Eastern Imperial Eagle (Aquila heliacal) fall under vulneravle category. Painted Stork (Mycteria leucocephala), Black-necked Stork (Ephippiorhynchus asiaticus), Lesser Flamingo (Phoenicopterus minor), Pallid Harrier (Circus macrourus), Oriental Darter (Anhinga melanogaster), Black headed ibis (Threskiornis melanocephalus) fall under the category near threatened as per IUCN status.

Among the reptiles, Common Indian monitor (Varanus bengalensis) fall under Schedule I and Indian Cobra (Naja naja) and Viper (Viper russelli) fall under schedule II

Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi), Jackal (Canis aurens), Monkey (Macaca mulatta) and Jungle Cat (Felis chaus) fall under Schedule II and Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus) fall under Schedule-III of Wild Life Protection act 1972.

Marine Biology

Marine study of the project area has been conducted by INDOMER for the proposed Thermal Power Project. The biological parameters considered in the study are Primary production, phytoplankton biomass and population,

Domestic animals in the project area


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

zooplankton biomass and population, macro benthic biomass and population, and fishery of the region. . The methodology for the study is described below.

Primary Productivity: Primary Production was estimated at all 10 locations i.e. stations S1 to S10 (Figure 3.9). From the water sampler, the samples were immediately transferred to 125 ml Dissolved Oxygen (DO) bottles (two light bottles and one dark bottle). One light bottle containing sample was fixed with Winkler A and Winkler B for analysis of initial oxygen content. The other light bottle and dark bottle with sample were kept in a bucket containing same water sample for 6 hours to allow photosynthesis and respiration. After 6 hours the samples were fixed with Winkler A and Winkler B, and later the DO was analyzed in the laboratory. The increase in dissolved oxygen of water as a result of photosynthesis was measured in the light bottle; simultaneously the decrease in oxygen content in the dark bottle was measured to estimate the respiration alone in the same sample of water. From the DO values the amount of organic carbon synthesized during photosynthesis was calculated.

Phytoplankton: Phytoplankton samples were collected at 10 locations i.e. stations S1 to S10 (Figure 3.9). Phytoplankton net (60 micron) was towed 0.5 m below the water surface for 5 minutes and the collected samples were immediately preserved in 5% formalin. The preserved phytoplankton samples were transferred into sedimentation chamber for settlement. After settlement, 1 ml aliquot of sample was taken for quantitative population analysis. Depending upon the biomass concentration, sub samples were taken to study the whole species diversity. Organisms were counted and identified upto genus level under a microscope using standard identification key and Sedgwick rafter counting chamber.

Zooplankton: Zooplankton samples were collected at 10 locations i.e. stations S1 to S10 (Figure 3.9). Zooplankton net (300 micron) was towed 0.5 m below water surface for 5 minutes and the collected samples were immediately preserved in 5% formalin. The biomass values of zooplankton were calculated from the displacement volume of water. The preserved zooplankton samples were transferred into sedimentation chamber for settlement. After settlement, 1 ml aliquot of sample was taken for quantitative population analysis. Depending upon the biomass concentration, sub samples were taken to study the whole species diversity. Organisms were counted and identified upto genus level under a microscope using standard identification key and counting chamber.

Macro Benthos: Seabed sediment samples for macro benthos were collected using Van Veen grab sampler at 5 locations, i.e. stns. (S2, S5,


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

S6, S7 and S9) (Figure 3.9). The intertidal benthos samples were collected at 3 locations along the beach (stns. IB1, IB2 and IB3) as shown in (Figure 3.9). The benthic organisms were separated by sieving through 500 micron mesh and preserved using formaldehyde with rose bengal. The samples were sorted and identified up to groups/Genera level using stereo zoom microscope. The wet weight was taken to calculate the biomass of benthic organisms.

Microbiology: The microbiological samples were collected at 10 locations, i.e. stations S1 to S10 (Figure 3.9). Samples were collected in sterilized bottles and transported for analysis. Pour plate method was used to culture the microorganisms. The agar media used for analysis were: Nutrient agar, MacConkey agar, M.FC agar, Thiosulphate Citrate Bile Sucrose agar, Xylose Lysine Deoxycholate agar, M. Enterococcus agar and Cetrimide agar. Plates were incubated at 37° C except for total viable bacterial count, for which the plates were incubated at room temperature (28° C). After 3 days, the colonies were counted and identified based on their colour characteristics.

Fisheries: The information on fisheries and their potential were collected from local fishing villages and from the Commissioner of Fisheries, Government of Gujarat, Gandhinagar.

Result and Discussion

The Primary production, phytoplankton biomass and population, zooplankton biomass and population, macro benthic biomass and population reflect the productivity of a water column at primary and secondary levels, associated with the seabed, provide information regarding the integrated effects of stress due to disturbances, if any, and hence are good indicators of early warning of potential damage.

Phytoplankton and primary productivity: Phytoplankton is the primary source of food in the marine environment. The concentration and numerical abundance of the phytoplankton indicate the fertility of a region. The plankton population depends primarily upon the nutrients present in the sea water and the sunlight for photosynthesis. This primary production is an importance source of food for the higher organisms in the marine environment. The measured primary productivity results are shown in Table 3.23.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.23- Primary productivity in coastal waters

Station Gross Photosynthetic activity

Net Photosynthetic activity

Photosynthetic quotient (PQ)

Primary production mgC/m3/day

S1 1.46 0.64 1.0 480

S2 0.68 0.531 1.0 398

S3 1.28 0.821 1.0 615

S4 1.10 0.95 1.0 713

S5 0.74 0.58 1.0 518

S6 0.84 0.69 1.0 518

S7 1.04 0.58 1.0 518

S8 1.12 0.51 1.0 383

S9 0.96 0.40 1.0 383

S10 1.20 0.94 1.0 705

The results indicate that the area is highly productive and the values vary from 300 to 713 mgC/m3/day. A comparative statement of primary production along Various phytoplankton groups were observed and their percentage compositions are shown in (Annex 3.2 - Tables 1 to 11)

The floral diversity fluctuates from 39 to 48 species. Bacilleriophyceae (Diatoms) formed the major group followed by Dinophyceae (Dianoflagellates) and Cyanophyceae (blue green algae). Phytoplankton population analyzed at various stations showed that their numerical abundance varied from 2406847 to 3966684 nos/100m3. Highest phytoplankton population was observed at station S8 of Eastern transect and the minimum was at station S2 of Western transect. The biomass varied from 27.69 to 68.40 ml/100 m3 in this region. The most dominant species contributing to the population are Thalassiosira subtilis (0.52 to 8.55%), Coscinodiscus gigas (0.68 to 7.03%), Diophysis caudata (0.69 to 6.86%), Hyalodiscus stelliger, (1.37 to 6.10%) and Biddulphia sinensis (0.22 to 5.74%).

Based on the Primer software, the Shannon-Wiener (H‘) diversity clearly showed the diverse nature of project area (4.855– 5.243). The similarity in species composition and abundance among stations varied from 49.72% to 70.58% with an average similarity percentage of 60.37%.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Zooplankton: The zooplankton diversity fluctuates from 40 to 49 species. Various zooplankton groups and their percentage composition observed at various stations are shown in (Annex 3.3-Tables 12 to 22). Highest Zooplankton population was observed at station S1 of middle transect and the minimum was at station S9 of Eastern transect. The zooplankton data indicated a high standing stock in the area of observation. Zooplankton population analysis at various stations showed that their numerical abundance varied from 931688 to 1731461 nos/100 m3 (Annex 3.3-Table 12-21). The percentage occurrence of various groups varied from place to place.

The zooplankton biomass at various stations varied from 16.29 to 35.83 ml/100m3 (Annex 3.3-Table 12-21). Zooplankton population mostly consists of Parapontella bervicorins (0.68%-10.47%), Labidocera acuta (1.76% - 10.20%), Centropages typicus (0.57%-7.43%), Temora stylifera (0.79% - 7.43%) and Acartia spinicuda (0.52% - 6.25%). The Shannon-Wiener (H’) diversity clearly showed the rich diversity of the project area (4.617– 5.113). The similarity in species composition and abundance among stations varied from 62.23% - 80.64% with an average similarity percentage of 71.29%.

Benthos: Benthic faunal population in an environment depends on the nature of the substratum and the organic matter content of the substratum.

Subtidal benthos: The sediment characteristics of the study area showed very fine sand and medium sand. The numerical abundance of the benthic fauna varied from 75 to 1050 nos/m2 (Annex 3.4- Table 23). The faunal population mainly consists of Amphipods, Polychaetes, Bivalves, Gastropoda, Gorgonian, Echinodermata, Arthropoda, Scaphopoda and fish larvae.

Intertidal benthos: The intertidal faunal population is shown in (Annex 3.5-Table 27). The existence of fauna appeared to be very poor. In all the three (IB1, IB2 and IB3) samples collected, only Amphipods, Polychaetes, Decapoda, Crustacea and Gastropoda were present. The numerical abundance of the Inter tidal benthic fauna varied from 250 to 1100 nos/m2.

Inference: The Shannon-Wiener diversity was low in the project area *(0.9183-2.781). Similarly the Margalef richness (d) values were also low (0.2171-1.168). However the evenness was similar in all stations. Generally in a healthy environment, Shannon diversity and Margalef richness indices are higher and in the range of 2.5 – 3.5. Values less than these are normally attributed to some sort of stress or disturbance. However in the project area there is no evidence of such stress or pollution. The only


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

explanation that can be offered to the observed low values is the nature of sediment (dominated by sand) and the low organic carbon content. These factors obviously contributed to low number of species. The similarity in species composition and abundance among stations widely varied from 0.00% to 85.26% with an average similarity percentage of 28.03%.

Diversity: Diversity measures were calculated for each sample. Indices calculated were: Margalef’s species evenness coefficient (J’), the Shannon – Wiener diversity coefficient (H’) and Simpson’s diversity index (1-λ ).

Table 3.24: Phytoplankton diversity indices calculated for stations 1-10

Stations S N D J' H'(loge2) 1-Lambda'

S1 45 3105443 2.943 0.9268 5.090 0.9649

S2 45 2406847 2.994 0.9199 5.052 0.9633

S3 40 3160649 2.606 0.919 4.891 0.9599

S4 39 2642988 2.57 0.9185 4.855 0.9585

S5 46 3749478 2.973 0.9404 5.195 0.9683

S6 41 2524598 2.713 0.9421 5.047 0.9646

S7 48 3536822 3.117 0.9387 5.243 0.9691

S8 44 3966684 2.83 0.945 5.159 0.9683

S9 42 2578248 2.777 0.9194 4.957 0.9612

S10 43 3685804 2.778 0.9146 4.963 0.9626

Table 3.25: Zooplankton diversity indices calculated for stations 1-10


S1 45 1714189 3.065 0.8681 4.768 0.9529

S2 46 1400020 3.18 0.9245 5.107 0.9651

S3 43 1473296 2.957 0.9312 5.053 0.9642

S4 39 1714228 2.647 0.9193 4.859 0.9597

S5 43 1154627 3.009 0.9137 4.958 0.9606

S6 43 1638285 2.935 0.8823 4.787 0.9498

S7 47 1262051 3.274 0.8952 4.972 0.9589


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

S8 43 1424930 2.964 0.8896 4.827 0.9565

S9 41 879872 2.922 0.8849 4.741 0.9515

S10 44 1576234 3.013 0.9064 4.949 0.9629

The diversity values (H') for phytoplankton and zooplankton were found to be ≈5.0 indicating the region is healthy without any pollution and can be classified as a pristine region.

Table 3.26: Benthic community diversity indices calculated for stations 1-10 and IB 1-3


S1 4 325 0.5187 0.7867 1.573 0.6054

S2 7 1050 0.8625 0.8156 2.29 0.7206

S3 2 100 0.2171 1.00 1.00 0.5051

S4 2 75 0.2316 0.9183 0.9183 0.4505

S5 4 500 0.4827 0.8714 1.743 0.6563

S6 5 525 0.6386 0.8998 2.089 0.7406

S7 5 425 0.6609 0.8799 2.043 0.7075

S8 2 75 0.2316 0.9183 0.9183 0.4505

S9 3 475 0.3245 0.8694 1.378 0.5885

S10 8 400 1.168 0.9269 2.781 0.838

IB1 3 250 0.3622 0.9372 1.485 0.6225

IB2 6 550 0.7924 0.8597 2.222 0.7286

IB3 4 1100 0.4284 0.886 1.772 0.6628

S- Total number species (richness); N- total number of individuals; d- Margalef’s richness index; J'- Pielou’s evenness index; H'- Shannon-Wiener diversity index; 1- Lambda'- Simpons’s diversity index.

Microbiology: Microorganism distributions in the marine and brackish environment play an important role in the decomposition of organic matter and mineralization. Bacterial counts in the surface water and in sediment samples at all stations were analyzed, and are presented in (Annex 3.6 -Tables 24 & 25). The bacterial colonies were identified up to generic level. Organisms isolated were normally expected in all coastal waters, under moderate human influence. The total count in the water sample at the surface closer to the coastal areas was found to be higher due to terrestrial


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

and creek run off and towards the open sea the count was found to be lesser. Escherichia coli, Vibrio, Total coli forms, Proteus klebsiela and Shigella like organisms were found to be present in very low numbers. Other counts indicated lesser populations. This result implies that in this region there is no indication of any microbiological pollution.

Bacterial densities were higher in the sediment samples than the water samples. This could be ascribed to the fact that the coastal and shelf sediments play a significant role in the demineralization of organic matter which supports the growth of microbes. Higher bacterial population in sediments than water is generally due to the rich organic content of the former and the lesser residence time of microorganism in the water than the sediments. The pathogenic organism such as (TVC) Escherichia coli, Vibrio like organisms, Shigella, Vibrio cholera, Vibrio parahaemolyticus, Total coli forms have been recorded in the study area. The counts indicated lesser population which shows that the environment is healthy and pollution free.

In general the coastal waters are influenced by Escherichia coli, Salmonella sp., Klebsiela sp., Enterobacter sp., Bacillus sp., and Staphyloccous sp., and Vibrio like organisms. Estuaries and creeks are influenced by E.coli, Salmonella sp., Shigella sp., Vibrio cholera, Vibrio parahaemolyticus, Pseudomonas sp., and other pathogens like Total Coli forms and Total Viable Counts.

Fishery: The fishery of the region is assessed based on the data obtained from the Department of Fisheries, Govt. of Gujarat. The estimated annual landings in Gujarat was 6.83 lakh MT during 2008-2009. The marine fish landing in Junagadh district for the year 2008 - 2009 are presented in (Annex 3.7- Table. 26). The available data indicate that the yearly fish landings are not constant and they fluctuate widely. While the total landing in Junagadh district was 233,294 MT in 2004-2005 and 281,456 MT in 2005-2006. However it improved during 2006-2007 reaching a figure of 300,804 MT. Multiday trawl net, Gill net, Cast net, Alivi net, Boat siene, Hooks and Drag nets are primarily used for fishing by these communities. In general, the dominant species of Chhara region are Fishes such as, Ribbon fish, Sharks, Skates, Catfish, Black Pomfret (Parastromateus niger), White Pomfret (Pampus argenteus), Eels, Seer fish, Leather Jacket, Silver Bar,Carangies, Mackerel, Tunas, Whitebaits Penaeid and Non Penaeid Prawns, Clupeoids, Scianoids, Trichiuridae and Upenoids. The dominant species of prawns are Penaeus monodon, P. indicus, Metapenaeus monoceros, M. dobsoni and M. brevicorins. In addition Crabs and Cephalopods are also dominant.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Since the bottom terrain of the study area was mostly rocky, experimental bottom trawling could not be done. Hence, to assess the nature of fishes available in this area, gill-netting was operated. The length of gill net is 300 m and height 17 m. The average depth was 20 m. Totally three gill net samplings with 12 hr. duration was done. However, this experimental gill net fishing was very poor and the average catch obtained. Species were identified using the books, ”The Marine and Fresh water Fishes of Ceylon” (Munro,1982), Commercial Sea Fishes of India (Talwar & Kacker,1984) and the Field guide for identification of Marine Fishery Resources published by Fishery Survey of India (2004). A set of photographs on gill net operations and groups of fish collected are given in the following pages

Among the catch commercially important species such as, Ophisthopterus tardoore, Arius sp., Cynoglossus sp., Lutjanus sp., Johnius sp., and Epinephelus sp., was found. In addition Phylum: Echinodermata class Crinoidea (Feathers stars), gastropods and Gorgonian were observed.

Fishing is done in coastal villages such as Velan, Madhwad, Kotada, Kob, etc. Fishing is the major livelihood activity in the coastal area. List of fish dwelling in the area is given in Table 3.27.

Table 3.27: List of Fish Dwelling in the Coastal Area

Local name Common name Scientific name

Bumla Bombay Duck Harpodon nehereus

Patti Ribbon Fish Trichiurus savala

Boyee Mullet Mugil dussumieri

Mendeli Golden Anchovy Coilia dussumieri

Sag Leather Jacket Chorinemus lysan

Chapri Seer fish Caranax atropus

Chaksi Indian shed Hilsha ilisha

Vichuda Silver Pomfret Pampus argenteus

Pathu White Pomfret Pampus Chinensis

Jinga Prawn Penaus indicus

Koth Rock Porch Otolithoides brunneus

3.5.11 Socio-Economic Pattern

Socio Economic Profile


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

This section highlights the socio-economic scenario of the area covering a 10 km radius around the proposed (2 x 660 MW) Supercritical Thermal Power Plant Site.

Area

Administratively, the villages and settlements within this area, fall under the Kodinar Taluka and Una Taluka of Junagarh district. The nearest villages to the proposed power plant site include Nanavada (1.56 km, North from the site), Kaj (2.37km, West from the site) and Jantrakhadi (3.24km, North from the site), all in the Kodinar Taluka.

The following presentation is based on the census data of 2001 whereas the socioeconomic conditions of study area based on the field studies carried by CES are presented in Chapter 7 of this report.

Population

As per 2001 Census the total population of Junagadh District is 24,48,173, of which Kodinar Taluka has a population of 1,98,181 and Una Taluka has a population of 3,30,809. Among the villages in the 10km radius coverage area, Velan is the largest (in terms of population), having a population size of 12,529 persons and comprising 1987 households. The smallest village is Fafni Nani, having a population of only 673 persons and comprising 123 households. The average household size in the coverage area is 6.1, while the average household size of the district is 5.7.

Figure 3.12 Average Household Size in Villages Compared to District

Sex Ratio

The sex ratio of the villages in the area is quite high, ranging from 906 females per 1000 males (Velva) to 1124 (Jantrakhadi). The overall district


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

has a sex ratio of 955, while the average sex ratio of the villages is 990 females per 1000 males.

Figure 3.13. Sex Ratio Variance of the Villages

Literacy: The highest literacy rate among the villages is found in Devli Village, Kodinar Taluka (80.4%), while the lowest is in Sokhda Village, Una Taluka with only 28.5%. The average literacy rate of the villages is 59.9%.

Figure 3.14 Literacy Variation Among the Villages

The basic demographic details of the villages in the area are given in Table 3.28 below. The table also includes the District and Taluka demography, however, neither Kodinar Town nor Una Town fall within the 10km radius.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.28 Population and Household Information

SN Villages Rural / Urban

Total Population

Number of HH

Average HH Size

Sex Ratio (females per 1000 males)

Literacy Rate (%)

Junagadh District 2448173 432884 5.7 955.0 67.8

A Kodinar Taluka 198181 32075 6.2 974.0 65.9

A.1 Kodinar Town Urban 32610 5348 6.1 931.0 77.4

1. Ronaj Rural 1614 262 6.2 1023.0 62.9

2. Mitiyaj Rural 4735 823 5.8 991.0 65.6

3. Fafni Moti Rural 2098 354 5.9 952.0 55.8

4. Jamanvada Rural 1158 193 6.0 956.0 74.7

5. Fafni Nani Rural 673 123 5.5 1027.0 42.1

6. Advi Rural 1896 310 6.1 953.0 67.7

7. Dolasa Rural 6561 1019 6.4 994.0 72.0

8. Velva Rural 1519 233 6.5 906.0 69.5

9. Malgam Rural 1760 291 6.0 982.0 71.2

10. Devli Rural 6754 990 6.8 984.0 80.4

11. Kadodara Rural 2498 389 6.4 1003.0 72.0

12. Pipalva Bavana Rural 1476 262 5.6 979.0 60.6

13. Jantrakhadi Rural 722 123 5.9 1124.0 52.6

14. Panch Pipalva Rural 2100 295 7.1 977.0 76.1

15. Nanavada Rural 1737 327 5.3 949.0 66.8

16. Malsaram Rural 2955 503 6.0 986.0 55.9

17. Sarkhadi Rural 4079 678 6.0 1023.0 70.9

18. Chhara Rural 5788 997 5.8 1003.0 58.0

19. Kaj Rural 3933 630 6.2 1004.0 73.0

20. Velan Rural 12529 1987 6.3 1026.0 46.4

B Una Taluka 330809 55391 6.0 977.0 55.5

B.1 Una Town Urban 51261 8875 5.8 945.0 76.8


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.28 Population and Household Information

SN Villages Rural / Urban

Total Population

Number of HH

Average HH Size

Sex Ratio (females per 1000 males)

Literacy Rate (%)

1. Lerka Rural 953 163 5.8 1028.0 35.5

2. Chikhli Rural 2308 381 6.1 981.0 40.6

3. Sokhda Rural 1527 236 6.5 1025.0 28.5

4. Kob Rural 4714 768 6.1 1019.0 38.9

Source: Census of India 2001

Scheduled Caste & Scheduled Tribe

The Scheduled Caste (SC) population shows great variance, with villages in Una district having a very low SC Population (0% in Sokhda to 2.4% in Lerka), while in Kodinar Taluka the range being from 5.5% SC Population in Panch Pipalva to a mostly SC populated village i.e. Nanavada (81.5% SC Population). On the converse, the ST population is less than 2% in all villages in the area, except for Fafni Nani which has a ST population of 6.2%. Figure 3.9 shows the variation in SC & ST populations of the villages. SC and ST distribution in the study is presented in Table 3.29.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 3.15 SC & ST Population Variation

(Note: Data Points Indicate Percentage SC/ST Population in the Villages.)

Table 3.29 Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe Population

SN Villages SC Population (%) ST Population (%)

Junagadh District 9.6 0.8

A Kodinar Taluka 16.5 0.4

A.1 Kodinar Town 12.0 0.2

1. Ronaj 15.1 0.0

2. Mitiyaj 28.5 0.1

3. Fafni Moti 13.6 0.0

4. Jamanvada 13.8 0.5

5. Fafni Nani 6.5 6.2

6. Advi 29.5 0.9

7. Dolasa 11.8 1.1

8. Velva 21.2 0.0

9. Malgam 28.0 0.0

10. Devli 11.2 0.0

11. Kadodara 27.2 0.0

12. Pipalva Bavana 29.1 0.0

13. Jantrakhadi 6.2 0.0

14. Panch Pipalva 5.5 0.5


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.29 Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe Population

SN Villages SC Population (%) ST Population (%)

15. Nanavada 81.5 0.0

16. Malsaram 15.0 0.0

17. Sarkhadi 29.3 0.0

18. Chhara 12.1 0.0

19. Kaj 24.7 0.0

20. Velan 9.5 0.1

B Una Taluka 7.4 0.3

B.1 Una Town 6.1 0.3

21. Lerka 2.4 0.0

22. Chikhli 1.6 0.0

23. Sokhda 0.0 0.0

24. Kob 14.8 0.0


Work Participation

The work participation rate is highest in Jamanvada with 58.6%, while it is lowest in Sakhadi and Sokhda with 26.9% in both villages. The average work participation of the villages in the area is 39.4%, of which 29.2% are main workers and 10.2% are marginal workers. This is depicted in Figure 3.16 below. Among the various categories of workers, cultivators account for an average of 43.7% while agricultural labour accounts for 32.7% (As seen in Figure 3.17). Table 3.30 gives the details of work participation across the villages. The percentage wise distribution is shown in Figure 3.16.

Figure 3.16 Average Percentages of Main, Marginal and Non Workers


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 3.17 Categories of Workers (Average Percentages over all villages)

Classification of Land use within Study Area

Total land area within the study area is 22550.68ha. The land use is classified by census department in four categories viz. irrigated land, Unirrigated land, culturable wasteland and area not cultivated.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 3.30 (A) Work Participation Rates

SN Village Work Participation Rate (%)

Main Workers (%)

Marginal Workers (%)

Non Workers (%)

Cultivators (%)

Agricultural Labours (%)

Household Industries (%)

Other Workers (%)

Junagadh Dist 40.9 32.1 8.8 59.1 29.7 15.6 1.1 32.1

A Kodinar Taluka 35.6 28.2 7.4 64.4 27.8 18.4 1.3 31.6

A.1 Kodinar Town 28.5 27.2 1.5 71.5 4.8 2.4 1.0 86.7

5. Ronaj 30.7 25.5 5.2 69.3 23.8 38.9 2.6 34.7

6. Mitiyaj 30.6 27.0 3.6 69.4 35.9 42.4 1.1 20.6

7. Fafni Moti 49.6 32.0 17.6 50.4 52.2 34.0 4.0 9.8

8. Jamanvada 58.6 39.0 19.6 41.4 28.6 66.4 1.6 3.4

9. Fafni Nani 28.8 26.9 1.9 71.2 40.7 27.9 0.0 29.9

10. Advi 30.8 29.5 1.3 69.2 59.6 21.7 1.5 17.1

11. Dolasa 37.2 32.5 4.7 62.8 52.4 15.2 2.0 30.4

12. Velva 27.0 27.0 0.0 73.0 32.0 54.9 1.2 12.0

13. Malgam 54.1 44.9 9.2 45.9 48.3 35.9 8.3 7.6

14. Devli 40.5 26.9 13.6 59.5 53.1 20.0 1.5 25.5

15. Kadodara 44.9 32.0 12.9 55.1 52.4 26.3 3.2 18.1

16. Pipalva Bavana 41.2 25.9 15.2 58.8 42.1 35.7 0.2 22.0


DRAFT FINAL REPORT


17. Jantrakhadi 52.6 28.3 24.4 47.4 43.7 50.3 1.6 4.5

18. Panch Pipalva 49.3 36.4 12.9 50.7 69.2 16.7 0.7 13.4

19. Nanavada 52.1 30.2 21.9 47.9 57.5 38.2 0.2 4.1

20. Malsaram 33.8 27.8 6.1 66.2 30.3 33.8 0.3 35.6

21. Sarkhadi 26.9 22.0 4.9 73.1 47.0 28.1 2.6 22.2

22. Chhara 34.7 24.1 10.6 65.3 22.4 53.8 2.5 21.3

23. Kaj 35.0 27.6 7.4 65.0 47.6 22.9 0.7 28.8

24. Velan 27.2 25.1 2.1 72.8 5.0 4.7 2.7 87.6

B Una Taluka 39.8 30.5 9.3 60.2 37.7 30.4 1.5 30.3

B.1 Una Town 30.0 28.1 1.9 70.0 3.6 5.2 1.7 89.4

25. Lerka 49.1 48.9 0.2 50.9 42.9 50.2 1.5 5.3

26. Chikhli 50.9 32.8 18.2 49.1 41.8 26.2 0.2 31.8

27. Sokhda 26.9 25.3 1.5 73.1 84.9 8.5 0.0 6.6

28. Kob 43.0 23.9 19.1 57.0 34.9 50.0 0.1 15.1


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

3.5.12 Common Property Resources

Common property resources (CPR) are integral aspect of the social and institutional arrangements made to meet the everyday requirements of village community. CPR is accessed by common people and used for communal purposes.

A primary survey including meeting with villagers of the project area were made to identify the CPR during the study. The villagers informed to the consultants that the proposed thermal power site is approximately 1.5 – 2.0 km away from the Kaj and Nanwada village habitation and common property resources are not getting affected due to the proposed development in the area. During the survey following type of community property resources, as given in Table 3.31, were identified in these two villages.

Table 3.31: List of Common Property Resources available in the villages

Sl.No. Type Location Ownership

A: Kaj Village

1. Pipeline for drinking water supply

Inside the Village lane Government

2. Temple(bageswari) In middle of village Public

4. Temple(chamunda) In middle of village Public

5. Pray hall for karadia samaj after death

of any person of Karadia samaj In middle of village Public

6. Temple Ranted Maa In middle of village Public

7. Library (Mahavir jyotbaba fule pustkalya) One side of village Public

8. Angawadi On road side (Way of Nanawada)

Government

10. Water supply tanker Rode side of village Government

11. Tower (Airtel) On road side (Way of Nanawada)

Air tel company


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



12 Primary school Road side of village Government

13. High School Road side of village Government

14. Haweda(Place for animal drinking water)

Road side near high school of village

Government

15. Forest dep’t. office Opposite primary school Government

16. Animal husbandry clinic Inside forest office Government

17. Panchyat office Roadside of village Government

18. Aganwadi Inside of Panchyat office Government

19. NDDB Milk dairy office Behind Panchyat/common service centre

Government

20.

Cooperative society office(Kaj Seva sahkari Mandal for loan and other agricultural material distribution

Main Rode side of village Government

21. Temple Bajrangwali Main Road side of village Public

22. Temple Sita Ram bapa Main Road side of village Public

23. Water tanki for Water supply Main Road side of village Government

24. Haweda (place for village cattle drinking water)

Main Road side near water tanki Government

25. Grazing land Near the village Government

B: Nanawada Village


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



1. Cahamunda mata temple Main Rode Side of village Public

2. Primary school Centre of village Government

3. Water tanki (uchi tanki) Rode side of village Government

4. Well for drinking storage Near water tank (Uchi tanki) Government

5. Aganwadi(1) In front of primary school Government

6. Aganwadi(2) Main Road side of village Opp water tanki

Government

7. Community hall Middle of village tanki Government

10. Pray house after dead of any family member of village

Middle of the village Public

11. Ramapeer,(religious place) One side of village Public

12 Cremation ground (Shamshan ghat)

Out side near the village Government/public

13. Graveyard (Kabristan) One side of village Public

14. Randel mata (religious place) One side of village Public

15 Arogya (government dispensary)(locked) not working

One side of village Government

16. Grazing land Near the village Government

Source: Field Visit, CES

Details of development of grazing land are available in different villages is discussed in EMP.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 110 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 4: Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures Revision: R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

CHAPTER – 4

IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATION MEASURES 4.1 Identification of Impacts

Environmental Impact can be defined as any alteration of environmental conditions or creation of a new set of environmental conditions, adverse or beneficial, caused or induced by the action or set of actions under consideration. Environmental impacts can be categorized as either primary or secondary. Primary impacts are those, which are attributed directly by the project, secondary impacts are those, which are indirectly induced and typically include the associated investment and changed patterns of social and economic activities by the proposed project. Identification of significant impacts would provide a way forward to other elements of EIA study such as quantification and evaluation of site specific impacts.

Project activities that are potential sources of impact during construction and operations phases of the proposed project are presented in Table 4.1. While impacts during construction phase will be localized affecting mainly construction workers, spatial extent impacts during operations may extend much beyond the project site.

Table 4.1: Identification of Impacts

Sr. No

Component of Environment

Construction Phase Activities

Operation Phase Activities

1. Air Quality Dust emissions from excavation, vehicle movement, erection of plant, material handling during construction.

Flue gas emission from stack,

Fugitive emissions due to coal handling,

Fugitive emission due to ash handling.

2. Noise Levels Use of construction machinery

Vehicle movement.

Operation of turbine, pumps, boiler etc

Vehicle movement

Coal handling

3. Water quality Surface runoff from the construction Site

Construction waste disposal

Disposal of wastewater

Disposal of cooling tower blow-down

Disposal of RO plant reject

Runoff from coal stack yard


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Sr. No

Component of Environment

Construction Phase Activities

Operation Phase Activities

4. Land use Site preparation

Leveling

Disposal of ash

Fuel handling/spillage

5. Ecology Habitat disturbance during development activity

Effect due to emission of pollutants in flue gas

6. Socio-economics Increased job opportunity

Increased job opportunity

These impacts are discussed phase wise in subsequent sections.

4.2 Construction Phase Impacts

4.2.1 Air Quality

Potential impacts on existing air quality during the construction phase would be due to dust generated during excavation, earth work, vehicles movement, loading and unloading of the construction materials.

Fugitive emissions generated due to vehicular movement are not expected to travel beyond a distance of 50 to 100 m from the point of their origin. Since, there is no habitation within 200 to 300m of the project site the impact on air environment during the construction phase is not expected to be significant as far as air pollution is concerned.

Combustion of diesel in various construction equipment could be one of the possible sources of incremental air pollution during the construction phase. The fuel utilisation rates of various equipments expected to be in operation during construction phase is given in Table-4.2 Under the worst case scenario, it has been considered that equipment used for construction work, are operating at a common point.

Table- 4.2: Fuel combustion during construction phase

Sr. No. Equipment Fuel Consumption rate lit/hr

No. of units Total Fuel Consumption (l)

1 Transit mixers 20 3 60 2 Dumpers 30 6 180 3 Generators 30 2 60 4 Batching plant 40 3 120 5 Dumpers 20 20 400 6 Loaders and

unloaders 25 3 75

7 Excavators 25 2 50


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Sr. No. Equipment Fuel Consumption rate lit/hr

No. of units Total Fuel Consumption (l)

8 Dozers 20 3 60 9 Roller 20 5 100 10 Motor grader 20 3 60 11 Total 1165

The increase in concentration of air pollutants in the study area due to operation of construction plant and machinery will be so low that it will not need any specific control measures except for periodic maintenance. Thus, the operation of construction equipment is not expected to have any major impact on the ambient air quality as a result of the project.

Mitigation measures for minimizing impact on air quality during construction phase shall comprise:

Vehicles with an open load carrying shall not be used for moving potentially dust-producing materials. Vehicles shall have properly fitting side and tailboards.

Materials having the potential to generate dust shall not be loaded to a level higher than the side and tail boards, and shall be carried in vehicles fitted with cover lids / tarpaulin cover

Excavated materials shall be placed in the designated dumping/disposal areas.

Material shall be stabilized during summer season, each day, by watering at every two hours interval.

The heights from which materials are dropped shall be limited to 1.5 m. to restrict fugitive dust generation.

Water shall be sprayed at construction sites once every hour for period of two minutes to suppress dust, during handling of excavated dry soil or debris.

Water sprays shall be used during the delivery and handling of all raw sand, and aggregate and other similar materials, when dust is likely to be created and to dampen all stored materials during dry and windy weather.

All motorised vehicles on katcha roads on the Site shall be allowed a maximum speed of 15 -20 kilometers per hour.

Concrete batching plant sites and ancillary areas shall be cleaned frequently and water shall be sprayed to minimise any dust emissions.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Barriers/hoarding shall be provided securely around all construction work sites during the main construction activity, when reasonably practicable, to contain dust within the site area and also to reduce air turbulence caused by wind or passing traffic.

Workers working in dust generating areas shall use nose masks. Placards advising workers to use nose masks shall be displayed.

4.2.2 Noise Levels

During the construction phase, noise will be generated due to movement of vehicles, and operation of light & heavy construction machineries including pneumatic tools (dozers, tippers, loaders, excavators, graders, roller, concrete mixer, generators, concreting pumps, vibrators, cranes, compressors etc.). The construction activities are expected to produce noise levels in the range of 75 – 95 dB (A). With point source of a strength of 95 dB (A) at a reference distance of 2 m, the noise produced will not exceed 45 dB (A) beyond a distance of 250 m from the boundary of construction yard/site (the drop off rate will be 6 dB (A) for doubling the receptor distance from a point source). The villages are located sufficiently away from the construction site and will not have any impact during construction phase.

Workers working at noisy areas may be affected (if they do not use ear muffs/plugs), if actual exposures exceeds the prescribed safety limits (8-hour long limit of 90 dB (A)) as per Factories Act / BOCW Act 1996.

Mitigation measures for minimizing noise levels during construction phase shall comprise:

Stationary equipment shall be located so as to minimize noise impact on the neighbouring community.

Plant and equipment known to emit noise strongly in one direction shall be oriented, wherever possible, in a direction away from noise sensitive receptor;

Silencers and mufflers shall be fitted and maintained on construction equipments.

Work shall be scheduled in such a way that activities that generate high noise levels shall not be done simultaneously;

Truck loading, unloading, and hauling operations shall be scheduled so as to minimize noise impact near noise sensitive locations and surrounding communities;


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Equipment and plant will not be kept idling when not in use

Plant at site shall be serviced regularly

Placards shall be displayed near high noise areas

Earmuffs/Earplugs shall be made mandatory for workers working in high noise areas

No workers shall be allowed to work near equipments generating more than 90 dB noise for more than 8 hrs;

No workers shall be allowed to work near equipments generating more than 100 dB noise for more than 2 hrs;

No workers shall be allowed to work near equipments generating more than 110 dB noise for more than 1/2 hrs;

Audiometric test shall be carried out for workers exposed to noise level more than above limits continuously.

4.2.3 Water Quality

The main source of water pollution during construction stage would be sullage and sewage generation from construction camps/temporary housing for the workers. The other sources of pollution during the construction stage will surface run off from construction sites. Proper drainage system shall be provided to prevent water logging/stagnation of water in construction camp. No significant impact on the surface water as well as groundwater quality is envisaged during construction phase.

Mitigation measures for minimizing impact on water environment during construction phase shall comprise:

A drainage system shall be constructed to drain off all surface water from the work site into suitable drain outlet.

Sedimentation tanks of sufficient capacity to trap silt-laden water before discharge into the outlet drain shall be provided.

Wastewater arising from site offices, canteens or toilet facilities shall be treated and reused for green belt

Temporary drainage works shall be maintained, removed and reinstated as necessary, and precautions shall be taken for avoidance of damage by flooding and silt.

Bentonite slurries or other grouts used construction shall be collected in a separate slurry collection system. It will be reused to the extent possible. When reuse does not remain practicable then it shall be


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

disposed off at nearest landfill site after obtaining permission from relevant agency

Oil separator /interceptors shall be provided to prevent the release of oils and grease into the drainage system. These will be cleaned on a regular basis

4.2.4 Land Use

The land use pattern in the proposed project site is open scrub and agriculture. Construction activities attract a sizeable workforce. This may have temporary reversible impact on the existing land environment. These may be mitigated by adopting the following measures.

Provision of temporary workers camps shall be made with proper water supply and sanitation facilities.

After completion of construction, areas utilized for establishment of workers camp shall be cleaned to restore the area.

Prolonged storage of waste (liquid/solid) material may be a source of pollution. The major source of solid waste is from the construction camps/yards.

Specific measures that shall be adopted for waste management are as follows:

Construction Material: This includes concrete lumps, cement lumps, tested concrete cubes, soil, rock, bitumen test samples and broken bricks. These shall be collected from site and used as land fill or transported to designated dumping site.

Metals: Metal pieces and welding rod stubs etc shall be collected from site and segregated at source. These shall be stored in the scrap yard and later disposed off to the scrap dealer.

Plastics, Rubber & Glass: These shall be collected in the dustbins placed at various positions at site/depot/office premises. These shall be sold to scrap dealers.

Ordinary Combustibles: Waste like paper, cloth and wood shall be collected in the dustbins placed at various positions at site and office premises, segregated and stored at the scrap yard. Later it shall be sold to scrap dealers.

Waste Oil: Secondary containment shall be provided in diesel shed. Steel trays would be used to prevent spillage. Any spillage shall be collected in a sump/tray. Spillage shall be closed containers. Also


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

the waste lubricant oil shall be stored in closed containers and sold to waste oil reprocessors.

Food Waste: It shall be collected in specially food waste containers with lid. Food waste shall be disposed to municipal collection bins or buried in designated areas for composting.

Empty Cement Bags: These shall be stored in designated storage space and sold to scrap dealers.

Contaminated Soil: Soil contaminated, if any due spillage of Petroleum./oil/lubricants (POL), rust dust, Bentonite slurry, coolant & paint shall not be mixed with any other waste and shall be disposed only at designated area.

Used Cartridges: Used toners/printer’s cartridges shall be stored properly and returned to dealers. It will be ensured that the same shall be recorded in the Bill/Invoice.

Lead acid Batteries: Used Lead acid Batteries shall be stored on hard surface, preferably on rubber mats. Old Batteries shall be returned to dealers. It shall be ensured that the same will be recorded in the Bill/Invoice.

4.2.5 Biological Environment

Most of the area of the thermal power plant site is open scrubland and remaining is agricultural land. Thus, the site development activities will not lead to any loss of any rare or endangered species.

However, deposition of fugitive dust on the young leaves of the nearby vegetation may lead to temporary reduction of photosynthesis.

The proposed project, in construction phase, does not envisage disposal of any waste in water body. Hence, construction activities will not cause any impact on the aquatic ecology.

With a view to minimize ecological disturbance following measures shall be adopted:

Tree cutting shall be limited to absolute minimum numbers.

Tree cutting shall be carried out only after obtaining proper permission.

For each tree cut, five trees shall be planted.

Excavation for foundation, base preparation etc. shall be limited to absolute minimum area.

Agricultural soil shall be used for landscaping and not back-filling.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

4.2.6 Impacts during Construction Phase of Marine Outfall

Laying of outfall pipeline on seabed in a trench involves minor amount of dredging. The dredge material has to be placed back as back filling. Seabed along the dredging areas primarily consists of fine sand and silt.

Identified dredging effects include:

entrainment and removal of organisms,

increased turbidity at the dredging site,

fish injury associated with exposure to suspended sediment,

decreased dissolved oxygen and

fish behavioral effect due to noise.

The recovery of disturbed habitats following dredging ultimately depends upon the nature of the new sediment at the dredge site, sources and types of re-colonizing animals and the extent of disturbance. Recovery rates are generally more rapid in highly disturbed sediments that are dominated by opportunistic species compared to stable sand habitats that are dominated by long-lived components with complex biological interactions controlling community structure. In general, the studies conducted elsewhere indicate that the dredging impacts are relatively short term in areas of high sediment mobility.

The baseline data collected from the project region and the review of the available information indicate that the water quality parameters are within the acceptable limits for the coastal waters. The coastal waters are well mixed, remain clean and free from any pollution.

The construction of seawater intake head and warm water outfall diffuser in the sea will result in marginal impacts on marine community. But such impacts are confined to a limited duration of the period of construction. Recommendations given by the marine experts and stipulations of the regulatiry authority shall be complied with to mitigate the adverse impacts.

4.3 OPERATIONAL PHASE IMPACTS

4.3.1Air Quality

Impact Due to Coal Handling

The coal handling system envisaged for the proposed 1320 MW station will receive imported coal through twin stream pipe conveyor from the coal jetty at the proposed port at Charra village located about 7 km from the power plant. Pipe conveyor is found to be preferable due to following reasons:


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Transportation of material over long distance in a single flight thereby eliminating elaborate and costly transfer towers

Maximum protection of material and environment by spillage free transportation

Compact design with low space requirement and minimized foundation needs

Impacts due to vehicular movement (for coal transport) are eliminated.

Coal from ship of capacity 1,50,000 Tons will be unloaded at 3000 TPH. Pipe conveyors will transport the coal to uncrushed coal stockpile located within the power plant boundary. Stacker reclaimer will be used for stacking uncrushed coal and reclaiming to the crusher. From crusher, crushed coal will be stacked in a crushed coal stockpile. In crusher house coal would be sized to (-) 20 mm in ring granulator / hammer mill type crushers after screening the fines in vibrating screens.

Special precaution will be taken to minimize air pollution during coal handling by providing dust extraction and spray type dust suppression arrangements in different transfer points and stock pile areas. Fire hydrant ring main encompassing the coal stack is considered to combat incidence of fire due to self-ignition.

Impact during operation of TPP on Air Quality

The proposed thermal power plant is coal fired and impacts on ambient air quality would be mostly due to coal burning in bolers. Extremely small amount of oil will be used as support fuel; during start-up and low load conditions (@1.0 ml/unit). For calculating the emission load of PM, NOx and SO2 for modeling purpose 100% worst coal consumption at full load has been considered.

For the prediction of the impacts of stack emission during its operational phase, Air Dispersion Mathematical Model was applied for the criteria pollutants like PM, sulphur dioxide (SO2) and oxides of Nitrogen (NOx).

Industrial Source Complex Short Term (ISCST3) model has been used for the prediction. Procedure prescribed by CPCB Guidelines has been followed for modeling.

The details of stack and emissions for the proposed thermal power project are presented in Table 4.3.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table No. 4.3: Stack and Emission Characteristics for SPEGPL Thermal Power Project (2 x 660 MW)

Stack Height Meter 275

Number of Stack No. 1

Total No. of flues in the stack No. 2

Flue Diameter Meter 7

Flue Gas Exit Velocity/ flue m/sec 25

Flue Gas Exit Temperature °K 423

Volumetric Flow Rate/ flue Nm3/sec 962.2

Rate of Coal Consumption (Considering GCV as 5000 Kcal/kg for worst coal)

Tons/hr 511

Emission Rate/Flue

PM g/sec 33.9

SO2 (Assuming 0.7% Sulphur Content) g/sec 994.0

NOx g/sec 440.0

Note: The stack has two independent flues each connected to one boiler.

Meteorological Data

The hourly micro-meteorological data were recorded for three months (1st March to 31st May, 2010) using weather monitoring system. This site specific hourly met data like wind direction, wind speed, ambient temperature, stability classes have been used for dispersion modeling.

Determination of Atmospheric Stability Pasquill – Gifford Stability Classes has been applied to estimate the stability class during day time. Stable conditions were assumed during night time.

Mixing Heights

Hourly daytime mixing height has been derived on the basis of the data presented in a IMD publication “Hourly Mixing Height and Assimilative Capacity of Atmosphere in India”. The pre-monsoon season data has been used. The hourly mixing depth considered for the dispersion modeling is presented in Table 4.4.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 4.4: Mixing Height Data Used for Modeling

Time Period, Hr. Mixing Depth (m)

21:00 – 05:00 0

06:00 85.0

07:00 90.0

08:00 180.0

09:00 395.0

10:00 745.0

11:00 880.0

12:00 1235.0

13:00 1555.0

14:00 1755.0

15:00 1855.0

16:00 2005.0

17:00 1700.0

18:00 1500.0

19:00 1355.0

20:00 730.0

Source: IMD

Application of ISCT3 Model

The impact of stack emission on the ground level concentration (GLC) of PM, SO2 and NOx in the ambient air have been predicted through Industrial Source Complex – Short Term Model. The assumptions made for short-term computations are as follows: -

1. The ISC short-term model for stacks uses the steady state Gaussian plume equation for a continuous elevated source

2. The wind power law is used to adjust the observed wind speed, from a reference measurement height of 10m, to the stack or release height.

3. The plume rise is estimated by, Briggs formulae.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

4. Buoyancy Induced Dispersion is used to describe the increase in plume dispersion during the preliminary phase

5. Stack tip down wash is not considered

6. Processing of Calm conditions is considered as default of the model

7. It is assumed that the pollutants do not undergo any physicochemical transformation and that there is not pollutant removal by dry deposition.

8. Washout by rain is not considered

9. Polar coordinate system has been used for computations, and

10. The model computations have been done for 10 km periphery of the power plant stack and additional 10 km outside the 10 km periphery.

Presentation of Results

For the short-term simulations, the concentrations were estimated around 324 receptors to obtain an optimum description of variations in concentrations over the site in 625sq. km. covering 16 directions for the monitoring period. For each time scale, i.e. for 24 hours (short term) the model computes the 50 highest concentrations observed during the period over all measurement points.

The 24 hours, maximum predicted incremental ground level concentrations (GLCs) for PM, SO2 and NOx are 0.96, 28.12 and 12.45 μg/m3 respectively and direction is 4 km East. The first 10 maximum 24 hourly concentrations predicted for PM, SO2 and NOx are presented in Table 4.5.

The isopleths overlaying on the topographical map of the study area, for maximum 24 hourly concentrations of PM, SO2 and NOx are presented in Figures 4.1through 4.3.

Table 4.5: First 10 Maximum 24 Hourly Incremental Concentration

Maximum PM NOX SO2 X Co- ordinate Y Co-ordinate

1st 0.95902 12.44752 28.12007 2771.64 -1148.05

2nd 0.95840 12.43944 28.10182 4000.00 0.00

3rd 0.95808 12.43523 28.09233 3695.52 -1530.73

4th 0.94111 12.21495 27.59468 3000.00 0.00

5th 0.90736 11.77693 26.60515 4000.00 0.00

6th 0.89631 11.63356 26.28127 4619.40 -1913.42

7th 0.88793 11.52479 26.03554 1530.73 - 3695.52


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Maximum PM NOX SO2 X Co- ordinate Y Co-ordinate

8th 0.88256 11.45509 25.87810 5000.00 0.00

9th 0.87598 11.36967 25.68513 4000.00 0.00

10th 0.87238 11.32291 25.57949 3000.00 0.00

Resultant Concentrations after Commissioning of the Project

The resultant concentration after the commissioning of the proposed power plant on the GLC of PM, SO2 and NOx are predicted by super imposing the predicted values on the maximum baseline concentrations recorded during the study period irrespective to the direction and distance of the monitoring location. The cumulative ground level concentrations (baseline + increment) after commissioning of the proposed project are presented in Table 4.6.

The estimated cumulative GLCs for PM, SO2 and NOx after commissioning of the thermal power project are found to be within the ambient air quality standards, as shown in Table 4.6.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 123 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February2011 Chapter 4 : Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 4.6: Resultant Maximum Ground Level Concentration after Commissioning of the Project at the Air Quality Monitoring Stations

Base Line Monitored Ambient Air Quality

Incremental ground level concentration

Cumulative ground level concentration Sl. #

Monitoring Location

Direction

Distance

SO2 NOX PM10 SO2 NOX PM10 SO2 NOX PM10

1 Nanawada North 1.5 km 5.33 8.80 45.60 0 0 0 5.33 8.8 45.6

2 Chikhli North East 5.5 km 6.07 8.10 46.83 13.74 6 0.46 19.81 14.1 47.29

3 Sokhda North East 6.2 km 5.55 7.62 47.65 16.16 7.15 0.55 21.71 14.77 48.2

4 Kob East 7.0 km 5.55 8.16 49.67 23.15 10.24 0.79 28.7 18.4 50.46

5 Velan South 4 km 5.35 7.88 46.53 22.64 10.02 0.77 27.99 17.9 47.3

6 Kaj South West 2.5 km 6.08 7.70 51.34 0.2 0.08 0 6.28 7.78 51.34


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 4.1: Isopleths of Nitrogen Oxides (µg/m3) overlaying the topographical map of study area


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 4.2: Isopleths of Sulphur Di-oxide (µg/m3) overlaying the topographical map of study area


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 4.3: Isopleths of SPM (µg/m3) overlaying the topographical map of study area


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

4.3.2 Noise Level

The major noise generating sources in the proposed power would be coal crusher, coal mill, air intake fans, boiler house, STG, compressors, BFPs etc. The expected noise level, at a distance of 2m, from the operation of different machineries of thermal power plant is presented in Table 4.7.

Table 4.7 Expected Noise Levels from different Unit of Power Plant

Units Average noise level (Leq) in dB(A)

Coal pulverizers 86

Fine dust exhausters 85

Boiler feed pumps 85

Forced Draft fans 85

Condenser room blow turbine 77

De-mineralizers 86

Pressure reducing section 83

Turbo-generators 82

Compressors 85

Auxiliary generators 86

The noise emission for individual units/equipment as prescribed under EPA Rule at manufacturing stage is 85 dB(A). Therefore, the noise generation from different equipment/units will be restricted to 85 dB (A) through manufacture specifications.

The sound pressure level generated by noise source, decreases with increasing distance from the source, due to wave divergence. An additional decrease in sound pressure level with distance from the source is expected, due to atmospheric effect or its interaction with objects in the transmission path.

For hemispherical sound wave propagation through homogeneous loss free medium, one can estimate noise levels at various locations, due to different source using model based on first principle as per the following equation:

Lp2 = Lp1 – 20 log (r2/r1) – Ae 1,2,3………. --------- (1)

Where, Lp2, Lp1are the noise levels at distances r2 and r1 from the source and Ae is the environmental attenuation factor. Combined effect of all the


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

sources then can be determined at various locations by logarithmic addition.

The site is located 1.5 km away from nearest residential area. In the first approximation one can assume that for all general population in the villages, every noise source in the plant is a point source. The average equivalent sound power level of such point source can be estimated for different distances and directions from hypothetical source by applying following equation:

Lp = Lw – 20 Log r – Ae – 8 --------- (2)

Where, Lw is sound power level of the source, Lp is sound pressure level at distance r and Ae is the environmental attenuation factor.

The combined noise level Lp (total of all the sources at a particular place) is given by:

Lp(total) = 10 log [ 10 (Lp1/10) + 10 (Lp2/10) + …………] ----- (3)

Where, Lp1, Lp2------ are the noise levels at sampling points due to the sources A, B------ etc.

Using this model i.e. the equation (1) & (3), it is found that the impact due to increased number of noise sources in the industry will not have any significant impact on the nearby villages. The impact at nearest Nanawada village, where the baseline noise level is found to be 49.95 dB(A), will by less than 50.0 dB(A).

Prediction of Impact on Community

Equivalent noise levels for day are used to describe community noise exposure. The noise levels will be maintained within the prescribed limit by providing necessary acoustic enclosures, silencers etc. There would be no impact on the community due to the operation of the power project.

Prediction of Impacts on Occupational Health

Equivalent noise levels Leq over 8 hours need to be described the noise exposure in the work place environment. Workers working in the noisy area may get affected if equivalent 8-hour exposure in more than the prescribed safety limits by OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration). The OSHA has proposed 8-hour long limit of 90 dB (A) for exposure in the high noise levels. Ministry of Labor, Government of India has also recommended similar criteria vide factories Act, Schedule # XXIV (Government Notification FAC/1086/CR-9/Lab-4 dated 08/02/1988).

In order to reduce the impact on occupation due to operation of plant, the workers working in the noisy areas shall be provided with ear mufflers and


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

its use will be mandatory for them. The noise generation during operation phase will be reduced at source itself by adopting good practices such as inspection and maintenance of equipment at regular intervals, lubrications etc.

Compressors, turbines and pumps are the main sources of noise. Workers maintaining, supervising and operating machines get exposed to noise levels (Leq) of 75 – 90 dB(A). The uses of noise protection devices are suggested for these workers. The workers are exposed to these levels for short duration of time only and mostly spend the remaining time in control room cabins, which will be acoustically insulated.

Operational Phase

Noise levels could be generated from the industry from turbines, crushers, compressors, pumps, safety valve, rotating equipment and the FD Fans. However, a typical 90 dB(A) combined Leq level has been prescribed during operation for computing impacts.

In view of the above, all equipment in the power plant would be designed/operated to have a noise levels limited to 85- 90 dB(A). In addition, since most of the noise equipment would be in closed structures, the noise transmitted outsides would be still lower.

According to Factories Act the allowable noise level for the workers is 90 dB (A) for 8 hours exposure a day. It is seen that in the plant premises many of the machinery/ equipment generate noise levels more than 85 dB (A). Therefore, adequate protective measures in the form of ear muffs/ ear plugs to the workers working in the noise areas would be provided. In addition, high noise levels of equipment could be reduced by adoption of appropriate preventive measures such as suitable building layout in which the equipment are to be located, adding sound barriers, use of enclosures with suitable absorption material, etc.

The impact of noise generated due to proposed power plant is insignificant on the human settlements in the area under study. The impact of noise generated from the proposed power plant on its workers is expected to be insignificant except for the employees working near compressors, FD fans, PA fans, and Blowers. For these sources, the workers can be protected using ear plugs and arranging their duties in cycles so that exposure will be for shortest term.

4.3.3 Water Quality

Water is required at proposed coal based thermal power plant (TPP) for various purposes like DM water for steam generation, condenser cooling


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

water, coal & ash handling systems, service water, domestic use, fire water, greenbelt etc. The water demand of the power plant will be fulfilled through sea water. GRP will be used to convey the seawater up to the plant. The amount of seawater withdrawal is estimated to be 13,193m3/hr for different operations of the power plant. The water balance diagram is given Figure 4.4. The breakup of water requirement is presented in Table 4.8:

Table 4.8: Breakup of Water Requirement

Sl. No.

Process Unit Water Requirement (m3/hr)

1. Cooling Tower Make – up 10,930

2. Demineralization Plant 133

3. Coal handling plant (wash water spray water)

40

4. Service water 60

5. Potable water for plant 10

6. D.G set 10

7. A/c and Ven 10

8. Firefighting (intermittently) 25

An amount of 1885 m3/hr will be treated through reverse osmosis plant for supplying to DM plant, potable water for plant, DG set coal handling plant – (wash water spray water), service water, A/c & vent, and drinking water to the proposed colony in future. For the proposed project, the recycling seawater cooling system for condensers employing natural draft cooling towers (NDCTs) are provided. The water requirement for cooling system is estimated based on the basis of 1.3 cycles of concentration (CoC) towards cooling water makeup.

The proposed re-circulating/closed condenser cooling system using seawater and natural draft cooling towers (NDCTs) will mitigate the thermal impact on the receiving water body.

No Groundwater will be extracted for the power plant operation. Hence, there will be no stress on the groundwater in the project area. Further, spread channel is suggested for recharging as well as to prevent seawater intrusion. Necessary HDPE lining will be provided in the ash disposal area to prevent adverse impacts on the groundwater resources.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

SPEGPL has applied to Gujarat Maritime Board to draw required quantity of seawater for the proposed project.

The seawater intake point has been identified based on coastal bathymetry as well as coastal hydrodynamics in the project area as discussed in subsection 4.3.4.

4.3.3.1 Wastewater Management and Impacts

The wastewater generated from the plant will go to the guard pond and ETP. Part of it will be reused for Dust suppression, Fly ash conditioning, etc. The domestic wastewater will be treated in the sewage treatment plant. The treated effluent will be used for greenbelt development. Thus, no wastewater will be disposed either to river or to creek.

The wastewater generated from the ETP will be used within the premises of the plant. No wastewater will discharged outside the plant premises.

The cooling tower blow-down (7660m3/hr) and Reverse Osmosis reject (1225m3/hr) will be disposed to the sea. The outfall has been designed based on modeling and the outcome of the study that riefly discussed in the following subsections.

The intake and marine outfall has been fixed based on the model studies which are discussed in the following sections.

4.3.4 Seawater Intake and Marine Outfall

Study for deciding location of marine outfall was carried out by National Institute of Oceanography. Finding of the study are summarized herein.

Power plant requires seawater quantity of 13193 m3/h for condenser cooling. The intake will be through pipeline. The pumping station will be constructed outside the CRZ limits. The water will be drawn from the sea at location 20o 42’ 54” N: 70o 44’ 54.5” E where a depth of 9 m below CD is available (Refer Figure 4.5).

Buoyant jet model results show the dilution of 30-40 times would be attained when plume reaches the bed. The salinity difference of 9 ppt would be diluted to 0.3 ppt at the release site. Hence the effluent should be released in the sea at location, 20o 42’ 47.3” N 70o 45’ 46.3” E with a minimum initial jet velocity of 3 m/s through a 12 ports each having 0.3 m dia. The ports should be separated by 6 m in order to avoid overlapping of the plumes. The diffuser should be kept at height of 0.5 m above bed level. The ports should align perpendicular to the coast line making an angle of 60o with horizontal plane is required to allow the fluid to pass through relatively longer trajectory in order to get more initial dilution.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Salinity was predicted giving the input 13193 m3/h at discharge location. Results indicate that increase in the salinities near release location at 100 m distance in the low tide would be around 0.3-0.4 ppt above ambient which is within the natural variation in the coastal waters. Temperature rise would be 0.2o C above ambient. In this near-field model, it was considered that the release would be made through diffuser where as in the far-field model it was a point discharge. The plume would attain near ambient conditions within 100 m distance from the release site. The plume would move along the coast and the possibility of reaching the coast is remote. The currents at intake indicate that the velocity varies between 0.2 to 0.4 m/s which shows the currents do not vary appreciably in this region.

Marine environmental implications during the operational phase of the project would be essentially confined to the i) impingement and entrainment of organisms during abstraction of sea water ii) release of biocides added to the water used in the plant and iii) adverse influence of release of effluent on the water quality, sediment quality and flora and fauna of the coastal region.

It is suggested that the impingement and entrainment of biota can be avoided by suitable modifications in the caisson at intake. The opening at the caisson should have more area as compared to the pipe dia so that the velocity at the intake would be lower than that of the pipe. The release of biocides should be kept as minimum as possible.

The impacts on currents at the intake are negligible. The impacts on water quality show that the salinity at discharge location would increase by 0.3 ppt above ambient and temperature increase by 0.2o C. Actual dilutions are much better with multi-port diffuser. With diffuser system the salinity is expected to rise by 0.3 ppt above ambient. However this is confined to the area within 50 – 100 m radius. Hence the stress is limited to near release site. The marine biota beyond this area of the coastal segment would be unaffected.

4.3.4 Land Use Pattern

The propose power plant site is located away from the CRZ as per the map prepared by the Institute of Remote sensing, Anna University, Chennai, and does not fall in HTL. Most of the land identified for the proposed project is under the private ownership which will be purchased from the owners. There is no forest land or ecologically sensitive areas falling within the project site.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

4.3.5 Ash Management

The proposed thermal power plant will use imported coal which will be transported through sea route up to the jetty. The characteristics of the coal proposed to be used at project site are given in Chapter 2. It is proposed to collect fly ash from the ESP hoppers in dry form and provide/supply to utilizers depending on the demand. The balance unutilized ash (mostly bottom ash and some fly ash) will be disposed off into ash pond by scrapper chain conveyor. An area of about 31.5 ha land has been identified for ash disposal within the project premises. The area will be provided with proper lining (HDPE) to arrest the leaching. This will reduce impact on the soil quality as well as groundwater. The details of ash management are discussed in Chapter 8(EMP).

4.3.6 Terrestrial Ecology (Within Plant Area)

During Operation phase there will be no significant impact on terrestrial ecology. The current land use is predominantly agricultural. Tree cover in the area is less and restricted to road side plantation and at the boundary of the agricultural fields.

There is no habitat for the conservation of threatened and endangered species in the area. The existing protected area Gir National Park and Wildlife Sanctuary is located approximately 25 km (refer Figure 4.6) from the project site

The loss of agricultural land is likely to impact the fodder requirement of cattle in the area. Avifauna of the area will be benefited by the plantation and green belt development in the area.

Mitigation Measures

Green belt development should be undertaken to enhance esthetic and ecological value of the area. Some trees species suggested for green belt development are Cassia fistula (Amaltas), Melia azaderach (Dhenk), Ficus bengalensis (Vad), Azadirachta indica (Neem), Alstonia scholaris (Saptparni), Syzygium cumini (Jambu), Pongamia pinnata (Karanj), Polyalthia longifolia (Ashok) and Nerium indicum (Kaner). Detail about green belt development is provided in Chapter 9 Section 9.6.

Social forestry may be practiced for success of the plantation. Local people can be involved in plantation and maintenance of plantation as part of the project in consultation with Forest Department.

High variety of grass plantation and other fodder scheme must be taken in the area in association with Agriculture Dept / Agricultural University Jaunagadh for cattle rearing in the area.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

The plantation should be monitored and maintained for minimum 3 years and dead plant should be replaced immediately. Fencing and other protective measures should be taken for the survival of plantation.

Environmental awareness program should be organized for conservation of flora and fauna in the area. All these measures, if implemented properly will improve the vegetation scenario of the area.

Impact on Ecology in Study Area8

There are major 3 ecosystems that are present in the area within 10 km of the project site. Moreover, there are 3 Schedule-I species that are present in the this zone.

These ecosystems and species are listed below.

A. Wetlands: Kaj-Nanawada wetlands and coastal mudflats:

The proposed Thermal Power plant would be situated in south-west side of Nanawada/Kaj wetland which is also known as Pipalva no Bandharo. Kaj –Nanawada wetland is located 10 km eastward of Kodinar town in Junagadh district. The wetland receives water mainly through its major inlet source the ‘Sagavadi’ River. The ‘Sagavadi’ River originates from Gir forest area and flows to this wetland. When Kaj-Nanawada wetland overflows, it reaches in to Sodam Bandhara through mudflats. The wetland is bounded on South-Eastern side by a salinity bund. It is primarily a tidal regulatory dam constructed by the Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat in 1995. The wetland is bordered by three villages: Nanavada, Pipalava and Chikhli. Maximum depth of the wetland is 2.0 Meters. During the high tide, particularly on full moon and no moon days, tidal water from the Arabian Sea touches the dam. Thus, one side of the dam is a large, shallow freshwater lake with moderate vegetation and on the other side is the tidal mudflat. This unique combination of fresh and brackish waters in same area attracts a large number of waterfowls particularly in winter. The maximum water is seen during August-September and minimum during March-April when the lake is totally dry. Since the farmers of surrounding villages often drain the water to irrigate their crops from October onwards, the lake almost dries out towards the end of winter.

The Kaj-Nanawada/Pipalvano Bandharo wetland is one of the fresh water reservoirs important for groundwater recharge, hydrological cycle of the region as well as for irrigated agriculture purpose for the surrounding fields.

8 Source: Ecological Consesrvation Plan prepared by Natural Heritage Conservation Society for SPEGPL in February 2011


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

This wetland also acts as a buffer during the heavy rain and coastal flooding as it absorbs the flood force/shock. It also provides great services of coastal erosion control.

The Kaj-Nanawada wetland is recognized as one of the ‘Wetlands of International Importance for migratory birds’ by the Wetlands International, as it harbors large populations of waterbirds including many globally threatened species.

Kaj-Nanawada Wetlands is also an Important Bird Area (IBA) listed by Bombay Natural History Society, Mumbai and Birdlife International, U.K.

The wetland regularly harbors more than 20,000 birds during winter. At least two globally threatened species are seen here every winter. Besides this, four Near threatened species have been seen till now.

The area is of utmost importance as it harbors large populations of migratory birds particularly in winter season. These wetlands are of extremely important for various migratory bird species which comes during winter season. These species include Demoiselle cranes, Pelicans etc. This wetland also harbors some of the Globally Threatened important species such as Sociable Lapwing etc.

According to bird count conducted by Dr. Indra Gadhvi in 2003, there were 40 species of birds totaling up to 100,000 (One Lakh) birds. Of these total populations of birds, they found 300 White Pelicans, 27,120 Demoiselle Crane, 500 Spoonbill, 1000 Ruffs, 7000 Black Tailed Godwits.

A latest census conducted in February 2010 by Dr. Indra Gadhvi and team reported total 58 species of birds with total population of 24668.

Following impacts are envisaged due to proximity of proposed Thermal Power Plant on the Kaj-Nanawada and coastal mudflats:

• Since major catchment of the wetlands is from Gir Lion Sanctuary through ‘Sagavadi River’, there would be no impact of the project on the overall water flow and hydrology of the wetlands.

• The construction activities of Thermal Power Plant unit and other related infrastructure would involve RCC construction, excavation, steel fabrication, transportation of Heavy machines and vehicles etc. These activities in turn would generate dust, waste, exhaust gases, disturbance due to noise, vibrations, traffic increase, visual impacts etc. However, these impacts will be localized affecting distance of about 10 m on either side of road and hence will not have any impact on wetlands and mudflats.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

• The operational stage of the Thermal Power Unit would involve storage of fuel (coal), burning of coal and flyash generation, ash storage in ashpond etc. These would generate, coal dust, flyash spread through air into the wetland. These would also increase in suspended particles, Sox & NOx and heavy metal concentration in surrounding area. However, since predominant wind direction is away from welanads, these air pollutants will not impact wetland and mudflats.

Mitigation Measures:

Even though there will not be any direct impact on wetland and mudflats, as a additional precaution, following measures are recommended:

• Do not disrupt natural drainage leading to wetland ecosystem.

• Construct intake and outfall channels carefully to minimize disturbance.

• Schedule proper timing (March-June) of construction in area close to wetland to avoid disturbance to breeding and wintering of birds in to the wetland.

• Ash pond should be located and designed properly and ensure no spillage of ash to surrounding wetland area.

• Chimneys should be designed properly to ensure minimum flyash spread in surrounding areas to affect the ecosystems and species.

• Constant monitoring of water parameters of Kaj-Nanawada and Sodam Bandhara should be carried out.

• A proper wetland conservation and management plan should be prepared and implemented. The conservation plan must involve, monitoring of abiotic and biotic components, improvement in micro habitats of wetlands to ensure more diversity of the species, community involvement for regulation on fishing activities etc.

B. Marine/coastal Eco-systems:

Proposed Thermal Power Plant would also require construction of inlet and outfall structures near the coast. These activities may result in some impacts on marine biodiversity. The marine and coastal habitats could be divided in two different habitats i.e. 1) Marine water environment which includes Arabian sea, and another is the 2) Coastal sandy beach.

The Marine area of Arabian Sea facing Chhara village in Kodinar taluka, does not have any fragile ecosystem such as Coral reef or major Mangrove forests. However, small mangrove patches in the creek at about 7-8 km,


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

near Sarakhadi, Ahmedpur Mandvi, West and North of Diu. This mangrove cover is very small, sparse and mostly of single species Avicennia marina. The deep sea area off Kodinar Coast particularly starting from Muldwarka to Jafrabad is important wintering/feeding grounds for endangered and Schedule-I, species i.e. Whale Shark and Sea turtles.

The coastal beach near proposed Port construction area is sandy with grassy and bushy vegetation (Prosopis juliflora) patches. Sandy coastal beach on cost of Kodinar taluka is used for nesting of two species of Sea turtles i.e. Green Sea turtle and Olive Ridely. Both the species are reported to regularly nest on this coast. Unfortunately, this important coastal area has not been explored, surveyed or studied for Sea turtle nesting activities in the past. However, interaction with local NGOs have indicated that sea turtle nesting was observed at about 5 km distance from the proposed land fall point for the outfall. Sea turtle require sandy beach for nesting. Since area marked for port is rocky cliff, it is not suitable for sea turtle nesting.

Even though the proposed thermal power plant will not have any direct impact on seaturtle nesting it is recommended that as a part of CSR, SPEGPL should support the groups working for sea turtle conservation in the area.

C. Coastal thorn forests:

The Coastal thorn forest habitats near Chhara village, in Kodianar Taluka of Junagadh district is well known for several reasons. This coastal tract of thorny forests is mainly composed of Prosopis juliflora an exotic invasive species. Though, forests of monotonous exotic species are normally not favored, however, in this case it is acting as a barrier against salinity ingress and wind actions as well as provides shelter to several important species, such as Asiatic Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus), Wild Pig (Sus scrofa), Cheetal (Axis axis) etc.

As the proposed project will not be acquiring forest land for any of it’s activities, there will not be any direct impact on coastal thorn forests.

D. Species Present in the Impact Zone:

There are 4 species of conservation concern which are present in impact zone (10km) of the proposed project by SPEGPL. These species are Sea turtle, Whale Shark, Asiatic Lion and Indian Peafowl.

Sea turtle:

Sea turtles are marine animals/reptiles with special adaptations. They are also sometimes referred to as “marine turtles,” referencing the fact that they have adapted to live primarily in the marine environment. All seven living


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

species of sea turtle in the world are endangered, and conservation efforts all over the world are attempting to prevent their extinction. They occupy specific niche in the marine water ecosystem.

Five of the seven species of sea turtles are found in Indian coastal waters. Sea turtles have received considerable attention in recent years. All five species that occur in Indian waters are listed in.

• Appendices I and II of the Convention on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals (CMS)

• Appendix 1 of the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (CITES).

• Olive ridley turtles (Lepidochelys olivacea), Loggerhead (Caretta caretta) and Green turtles (Chelonia mydas) are listed as Endangered in the IUCN Red List.

• Leatherback (Dermochelys coriacea) and hawksbill turtles (Eretmochelys imbricata) are listed as Critically Endangered.

• All these species are listed as endangered under Schedule 1 of the Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 – the single most important law for species protection in India.

Though the importance of these sea turtles is acknowledged in state, union and international legislation and policies, they are under severe threat from fishery related mortality, depredation of eggs and developmental activities.

The major threats to the sea turtles throughout its range in India are:

Incidental capture in gill nets and trawl nets: The mechanized fishing which takes place within 5-10 km of the shoreline results in the mortality of large numbers of sea turtles along the Indian coast every year. These deaths are due to accidental capture and drowning of turtles in trawl nets and gill nets.

Loss of nesting sites due to anthropogenic activities: Beach development is another area that poses a threat to sea turtles. Developmental activities close to the beaches, such as construction of roads, tourist resorts, housing and industrial projects, result in the loss of nesting habitats. Besides this, Casuarina plantations on the major sea turtle nesting beaches have also resulted in a drastic decline of the nesting population.

Predation (non-human): Predation of the turtle eggs (exposed due to beach erosion) by dogs, wild pigs, jackals etc during the nesting season of turtles is another threat to turtle populations.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Predation by human beings: Predation of turtle and turtle eggs for human consumption is prevalent along the Indian coast. This results in large scale intentional killing of turtles for the food industry. The shells or carapace scutes are also used for ornamental purposes.

Illumination: Most of the turtle nesting beaches are artificially illuminated for developmental activities. Artificial illumination (lights) causes disorientation of nesting turtles and their hatchlings (baby), leading to their heavy mortality of hatchlings. This affects their overall survival rate and population.

The peak nesting period for Olive ridleys Sea turtles is reported to be between June and November. The nesting season for the green turtle extends from September to January with peak in December and January along the Saurashtra coast.

Even though the proposed thermal power plant will not have any direct impact on seaturtle nesting it is recommended that as a part of CSR, SPEGPL should support the groups working for sea turtle conservation in the area.

It is interesting to know that despite presence of an operational Jetty at Muldwarka, sea turtles are still nesting on this beach. There are several records with local NGOs that Sea turtles are nesting in the vicinity of 1.0 km from the operational jetty. The operational port/jetty belongs to Ambuja Cement and it imports coal and exports, clinkers and cement from this jetty. Moreover, the location of the proposed port/jetty would be on a rocky coast, therefore, there are less chances that the jetty and port project would cause loss of any nesting habitats of the sea turtle.

Not with standing all above facts, as an endeavour to support sea turtle conservation activity following measures are recommended :

• Sea turtles and their hatchlings often misguided by the illumination on the coast, therefore, it is suggested to orient lights on jetty and port in such a way that minimum illumination is visible from outside. This would ensure natural movement of the turtles in this region.

• It is suggested to avoid construction of port and Jetty in peak nesting seasons to avoid disturbance to the Sea turtle species.

• Take up Sea turtle Conservation plan on the Gujarat coast or support Gujarat Forest Department in their ongoing conservation and protection activities.

• Take up beach improvement activities along with local forest department so that maximum sea turtle on this coast can take place.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

• Contingency plan to handle accidental oil spill.

• Ensure no spillage of oil, coal or any other material on the sandy white beach that change the texture of the sand.

• Inlet and outfall of the thermal power plant be designed away from the sea turtle breeding ground/mating ground off their nesting beaches.

• Inlet and out fall channels should not restrict movement of the sea turtle.

• Outfall should be designed in such a way that there would not be higher difference in sea water temperature.

• It is suggested to take up awareness and education programs involving local Fishermen, forest department and community.

Whale Shark: The whale Shark (Rhincodon typus) is the largest living fish species of the world. It is a slow-moving filter feeding fish belong to Shark family. The Shark is found in tropical and warm oceans, lives in the open sea with a lifespan of about 70 years. The species originated about 60 million years ago. Although Whale Sharks have very large mouths, they feed mainly on plankton, microscopic plants, animals and school of small fish. The name "Whale Shark” comes from the fish's physiology; as large as a Whale, it too is a filter feeder.

The Whale Shark inhabits all tropical and warm-temperate seas. They are known to migrate every spring to the continental shelf of the central west coast of Australia. Although typically seen offshore, it has been found closer to land, entering lagoons or coral atolls, and near the mouths of estuaries and rivers. Its range is generally restricted to about ±30° latitude. It is capable of diving to depths of 700 meters (2,300 ft), and is migratory. Despite its size, the Whale Shark does not pose significant danger to humans. Although massive, Whale Sharks are docile fish and sometimes allow swimmers to hitch a ride. Whale Sharks are actually quite gentle and can play with divers. Divers and snorkelers can swim with this giant fish without risk.

The major threats to the Whale Shark on Gujarat coast are:

Commercial Fishing: The Whale Shark is targeted by commercial fisheries in several areas where they seasonally aggregate. The population is unknown and the species is considered vulnerable by the IUCN. Many countries including India have provided it highest protection status. India in May 2001 declared it as Schedule-I species under Wildlife Protection Act 1972. There is a ban on fishing, selling, importing and exporting of Whale Sharks for commercial purposes. This is particularly important because the


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Whale Shark does not attain sexual maturity before the age of 30 years, and poaching at this rate would pose a serious threat to its breeding and in turn upset the fragile marine ecosystem.

Accidental ensnares: of Whale Shark in fishing nets is often observed on Gujarat coast particularly off Kodinar coast. Winter is a peak period for fishing and that is when Wale Sharks are found to visit in good number Kodinar coast. This results in accidental catch of Whale Shark in fishermen’s nets.

Risk of Oil spill: In 2010, the Gulf of Mexico oil spill resulted in 4,900,000 barrels (779,000 m3) of oil flowing into an area south of the Mississippi River Delta, where one-third of all Whale Shark sightings in the northern part of the gulf have occurred in recent years. Sightings confirmed that the Whale Sharks were unable to avoid the oil slick which was situated on the surface of the sea where the Whale Sharks feed for several hours at a time.

There is a campaign to spread awareness about the world's largest fish, by Gujarat Forest Department, Tata Chemicals, and Wildlife Trust of India. The government is also providing compensation of Rs: 25000 for the loss of a net to the fishermen. Indian Coast Guard has also joined the programme both as motivator of community and also in keeping vigil.

The calm and deep open sea water off the Verabal-Jafrabad coast is an important area for endangered Whale Sharks (Schedule-I). It came to our notice that there have been many rescues of Whale Sharks off the Kodinar Coast by local NOGs, Forest department and fishermen suggesting the importance of the area for this endangered species.

Though, there are no direct threat from the proposed project to this species, it is recommended that conservation and mitigation plan as described below should be supported by SPEGPL.

• Contribute or augment ongoing conservation efforts by forest department and NGOs.

• Contingency plan for handling any accidental oil spills.

• Educate workers and Port/Jetty staff about the whale shark.

• Carry out preliminary survey for presence of Whale Shark before beginning jetty, outfall and inlet construction to avoid any disturbance to the species.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Asiatic Lion (Panthera leo persica):

The Asiatic lion (Panthera leo persica) or Indian Lion is a subspecies of the lion which survives today only in the Gir Forest of Gujarat, India. In 2010, the Gujarat government census reported that 411 Asiatic lions are in the Gir forest; a rise of 52 over the last census of 2005. The Asiatic lions once ranged from the Mediterranean to the north-eastern parts of the Indian subcontinent, but excessive hunting and decline in natural prey reduced their habitat. Asiatic lion are smaller and lighter than their African counterparts, but are equally aggressive. Asiatic lions are highly social animals, they living in units called prides. Lions prey predominantly on deer (Sambar & chital), antelope (nilgai), gazelle (chinkara), wild boar, buffalo and livestock.

The Gir Forest National Park of western India has about 411 lions (as of April 2010) which live in a 1,412 km² (558 square miles) sanctuary covered with scrub and open deciduous forest habitats. The population in 1907 was believed to consist of only 13 lions when the Nawab of Junagadh gave them complete protection.

Population recorded during official Census of Asiatic Lions in and around Gir forests.

No. Area No in 2005 No. in 2010

1 Gir National Park & adjoining area 291 297

2 Girnar Sanctuary 17 24

3 Mityala &Paniya Sanctuaries,

Savarkundla, Lilya, adjoining

areas of Bhavnagar & Amreli

39 69

4 Coastal areas (Una, Kodinar,

Sutrapada, and Chhara)

12 21

Total 359 411 Source: http://www.asiaticlion.org/population-gir-forests.htm

The Gir National Park is at about 20 km distance from the proposed power plant site boundary.

In coastal habitats near Chhara village there have been instances of spotting lions, occasionally. However, interaction with the experts in the area revealed that the reason could be due to increase in population of Asiatic lions in Gir forests, the lion began to disperse outside Gir landscape


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

in to human dominated sub marginal habitats (Prosopis juliflora dominated coastal forest) that are often not the natural habitats lions occupy.

Further, it was opined that the coastal tract of thorny forests is mainly composed of Prosopis juliflora an exotic invasive species. Though, the forests of exotic species are normally not favored, however, in this case it is acting as a barrier against salinity ingress and wind actions. Apart from acting as a barrier, the coastal forest has been harboring several important species, such as Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus), Wild Pig (Sus scrofa), etc. Such sub-marginal habitats are generally “population sink” for predator such as lions. Movement of lions in thorny Prosopis juliflora patches, chasing prey and fighting in between lion individuals due to lower food availability often causes injuries to the species. These injuries further cause health problems for the individual lions due to ‘maggot flies’ due to humid coastal climate. There are un confirmed information that there are many lions have already been rehabilitated from this area to the enclosures for treatment and then released in to their natural habitats.

Even though the proposed project may not have any direct impact on lion, it is dtrongly recommended that SPEGPL should take up the conservation action with proper attention to the rescue/rehabilitation or handling of presence of lions if any in this area in future.

Following measures should be adopted:

• An appeal be made to the Gujarat Forest Department to rehabilitate Asiatic lion visiting the area

• Lions rescue and rehabilitation plan should be discussed with local forest officers.

• All the workers and staff of the project unit must be made aware and educated about the presence of the lions in this area.

• All the staff and workers must be instructed not to chase, tease, or disturb the Asiatic Lions if they are come near the project area.

4.3.7 Solid and Hazardous Wastes

The spent oils and lubricants / waste oils likely to be generated at proposed TPP, oily sludge / oily material recovered through API / TPI separator at ETP, spent catalyst / resins and the biomedical waste from occupational health centre would fall under the category of hazardous waste as per Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules Amendment – 2003 published by MoEF, Govt. of India. Proper authorisation from State Pollution Control Board will be obtained for handling, treatment and disposal of the above categories of hazardous wastes. Majority of these


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

wastes (spent oils, lubricants and oily sludge etc.) will be preferably sold to the potential users with necessary authorization for reprocess/reuse. In case some of them require disposal, they shall be disposed in a secured landfill after necessary approval by the State Pollution Control Board. The non-hazardous (solid) wastes at proposed project site are sludge from sea water treatment plant, biological sludge from STP; and the domestic solid waste from plant area.

The total non-hazardous solid waste in the form of sludge generation from project related units, viz. sea water, OWS and sewage treatment plants is estimated insignificant, i.e., <10 m3/hr (240 m3/day). The non-hazardous solid waste, i.e. after sludge thicker/centrifuge and sludge drying beds, could be used as landfill material/manure in greenbelt area or even for reclamation of low lying areas, however they will be ultimately disposed as per MoEF guidelines in consultation with GPCB.

4.3.8 Domestic Solid Wastes

The estimated domestic solid waste from proposed power project premises would be less than 1 TPD (insignificant). The domestic solid waste normally constitutes about 50% organic matter. This material can be composted to yield the compost manure which can be used in the green belt area within project premises.

The proposed fuel, imported coal, being environmental compatible with low ash content, low sulphur content and higher GCV as per the predicted impacts of air pollutants (SPM, SO2, NOx) on the surrounding agriculture fields would be insignificant during normal operation phase. The proposed greenbelt in and around the proposed project site would contribute further towards attenuation of air & noise impacts and the proposed permanent vegetative cover in the form of green belt will improve the aesthetics in project area.

The impact of aerosols released from the proposed cooling towers large scale NDCTs would have insignificant impact on visibility in view of higher ambient temperature including seasonal variations in project region.

Keeping in view the above details the overall impacts from proposed 1320 MW coal based power project at Kaj would be insignificant on surrounding environment, with implementation of EMP as delineated in this study.

4.3.9 Infrastructure

The proposed project does not envisage coal transport by road only fly ash truck movement would add to road traffic. Hence, impacts will be negligible.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

4.3.10 Summary

Summary of impact assessment is presented in Table 4.9 & 4.10.

Table 4.9: Summary of Impacts likely to accrue during construction phase

SN Aspect Impact Duration Impact Significance

Disturbance at site due to various site preparatory activities

Short-term Reversible

Moderately significant, as the area to be acquired is quite small.

1. Land Environment

Increased soil erosion from quarry sites


Not significant as this impact can be managed by appropriate management measures

Degradation of water quality due to disposal of untreated effluents from labour camps


Not significant, as quantity of effluent is quite small

2. Water Environment Impacts on water

quality due to runoff carrying high suspended solids from construction sites


Not significant, as quantity of effluent is quite small

Noise generation by operation of various construction equipments


No major impact is envisaged, as habitations are at a distance for the project site. 3.

Noise Environment

Increase in noise level due to increased vehicular movement

Short-term

ReversibleNo Significant increase in noise level is expected

4. Air Environment Impacts on ambient

air quality due to emissions generated as a result of fuel

Short-term

Reversible Insignificant increase in SPM & SO2 levels.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 4.9: Summary of Impacts likely to accrue during construction phase

SN Aspect Impact Duration Impact Significance

combustion operation of various construction equipment

Fugitive emissions from storage sites of construction material


Insignificant impacts as no human population resides in the area likely to be affected.

5. Ecology Impacts on ecology due to increased human interferences


No impact is anticipated as all workers will be provided with alternate fuel

Increased stress on existing infrastructure due to immigration of labour population


Impacts to be mitigated to a large extent by providing sanitation, sewage and solid waste management facilities 6.

Socio-economic Environment Improvement in

employment potential as a result of project construction activities and mushrooming of allied activities


Positive impacts as marginal improvement in employment scenario are expected.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 147 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 4: Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 4.10: Summary of Impacts likely to accrue during project operation phase

S.No Aspect Impact Duration Impact Significance

Change in land use pattern Long-term Irreversible Marginal impact, as the area likely to be affected is quite small

Generation of solid waste/ coal dust ash during coal and ash handling and other project related activities

Long-term Irreversible Non significant if appropriate mitigation measures implemented. 1. Land

Environment

Impacts in water quality due to disposal of various types of liquid wastes Long-term Irreversible

Minor impacts, which are to be managed by appropriate treatment of various types of effluents. The related effluents to be reused to the extent possible.

2. Water Environment

Noise generation due to operation of various equipments/machineries in the thermal power station

Long-term Irreversible Impacts on workers operating in high noise, which is to be mitigated by adopting appropriate management measures

Impacts on workers operating in high noise areas Long-term Irreversible Impacts on workers operating in high noise, which is to be

mitigated by adopting appropriate management measures 3. Noise

Environment Impacts on ambient air quality due to stack gas emissions Long-term Irreversible

Minor impact Emissions to be controlled by commissioning ESP and providing stack of adequate height.

4. Air Environment

Impacts on vegetation due to SPM and SO2 emissions Long-term Irreversible

No significant impact Emissions to be controlled by commissioning ESP and providing stack of adequate height.

5. Ecology Availability of employment Long-term Irreversible Significant positive impact

6. Socio-economic Environment

Mushrooming of allied activities in and around the project area Long-term Irreversible Significant positive impact

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 148 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 4 :Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Impact Statement

The impact on socio-economic status of the project would be predominantly positive, if proper implementations of the measures suggested in the EMP are ensured.

Overall Impact

The overall impact of the proposed power plant project would be beneficial because the socio-economic benefits are very positive and the adverse impact on the air, noise, water, land and biological environments shall be mitigated using the best available technology and procedures.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 149 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 5 : Environmental Monitoring Programme Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

CHAPTER – 5

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME 5.1 Introduction

The Environmental Monitoring Programme is an important aspect of Environmental Management Plan. The objective is to monitor the environmental parameters that are established as critical through this study. This would help the project proponent in assessing the pollution levels around the site and would signal the potential problems for adoption of control measures.

5.2 Environmental Monitoring Programme

The Environmental Monitoring Programme encompasses location, duration, frequency of the parameters that has to be monitored. This monitoring is envisaged to learn the change in status of the environment during construction and operation of the proposed thermal power project. The monitoring will further reflect on the mitigation measures that have to be adopted with the change in the status of pollutants. Details of Environmental Monitoring Programme during construction phase of the project is presented in Table 5.1.

Table 5.1 Construction Phase Environmental Monitoring Programme Sl No. Area of

monitoring Number and Location Of Sampling Stations

Parameters to be analysed

Frequency of Sampling

During Construction Phase 1. Ambient Air

Quality At three locations covering one upwind and two downwind

PM10 & PM2.5, SO2, NOX and CO

Two days continuous in each quarter

2. Noise Level At construction Yard and Construction Sites

Leq (day) and Leq (night)

Quarterly

3. Water Quality Two surface water samples

Physical, chemical and biological parameters

Twice in a year (non- monsoon season) during construction period

4. Soil Quality At one location Physicochemical parameters

Twice in a year (non- monsoon season) during construction period

5. Marine Ecology

6 locations Biological Parameters

Two times a year


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Operation phase Environmental Monitoring Programme of the project is presented in Table 5.2.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 5.2: Operation Phase Environmental Monitoring Programme

Sl.No. Area of Monitoring

Number and Location Of Sampling Stations Parameters to be analysed Frequency of

Sampling

1. Meteorology One observatory in the plant area

Wind speed and direction Temperature Relative Humidity Rainfall

Hourly basis for each day

Hourly and daily basis, depending on the

parameter

2. Ambient Air Quality

4 Stations viz: i) One station in the upwind ii) Two stations in the downwind iii) Township

PM10 & PM2.5, SO2 , NOx and CO As, Hg, Pb, Ni, BAP, O3

Twice a week; each for 24 hour

period.

3. Stack Emission Stack monitoring Particulate Matter Once a fortnight

4. Surface Water Quality

3 stations, one station on the Sea near the intake well and two stations on the Sea near the confluence point of the discharge channel (upstream & downstream)

Physical and chemical parameters. Bacteriological parameters. Heavy metals and toxic constituents.

Once a month Once in a year

Once in 3 months

5.

Ground Water Quality and depth of Water Table

4 stations, at villages, close to the ash disposal site. One at upstream and rest at downstream of ground water flow around ash pond.

Physical and chemical parameters. Bacteriological parameters. Heavy metals and toxic constituents.

Once a month. Once in a year

Once in 3 months

6. Soils 5 stations, 3 around the ash disposal areas and 2 stations, close to the air quality monitoring stations

Physical and chemical parameters and heavy metals Once in three years

7. Terrestrial Ecology Within 10 km radius of power plant

Plantation survival rate Symptoms of injuries on plants. Avifauna of the area

Twice a year Annually Annually

8. Marine ecology 6 locations Phytoplankton, Zooplankton, Benthos Quarterly

9. Noise

6 Stations viz: i) Plant boundary (2 locations) ii) Local Market iii)Township iv) 2 nearby villages

Industrial Zone Commercial area Residential area

Ambient Equivalent continuous Sound Pressure Levels (Leq) at Day and Night times Once in every season.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

5.3 Monitoring Plan

The environmental monitoring plan during construction and operation phase has been presented in Table 5.1.

Environmental Management Department (EMD) will monitor all the activities as mentioned in Table 5.1. The EMD will document all the monitoring results/observations. The EMD will report to the designated institutions i.e. GPCB. The EMD will adopt suitable mitigation measures if any aspect is found to be non-conforming with the stipulated standards.

5.4 Environmental Procurement Schedules

The equipments to be used for environmental monitoring should be as per Indian Standards (BIS). Equipments should be updated scientific instruments and automatic, wherever possible. The equipments of environmental monitoring are presented in Table 5.3.

Table 5.3: Laboratory Equipments required for Environmental Monitoring

Sl. No Equipment Quantity

I.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Meteorology

Thermometers (Max and Min, Dry and Wet Bulb)

Thermohygrograph

Barograph

Self Recording Raingauge

Automatic Wind Recording Instrument

2 Sets

2 Sets

2 Sets

2 Sets

1 Set

II.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Ambient Air Quality

Respirable Dust Sampler (PM10 & PM2.5)

Vacuum pump with electric motor

Spectophotometer

Generator

2 Sets

2 Sets

1 No.

1Set

III.

1.

Stack Emissions

Stack emission kit with necessary accessories

1 Set

IV.

1.

Ambient Noise

Integrating Noise Level Meter with frequency analyser

1 Set


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 5.3: Laboratory Equipments required for Environmental Monitoring

Sl. No Equipment Quantity

V.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

Water Quality

BOD incubator

Bacteriological incubator

Oven

Muffle furnace

Analytical balance (Singlepan Digital)

Spectrophotometer

pH meter

Turbidimeter

Electrical conductivitimeter

Thermometer

Flame Photometer

Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer

Distillation apparatus

Hot plate

Magnetic stirrers

Necessary glassware’s, reagents and chemicals

1 No.

1 No.

1 No.

1 No.

1 No.

1 No.

1 No.

1 No.

1 No.

1 No.

1 No.

1 Set

2 Sets

4 No.s

2 No.s

--

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 154 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 6: Additional Studies Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

CHAPTER – 6

ADDITIONAL STUDIES 6.1. Social Impact assessment and R& R Action Plan

Construction of the proposed thermal power project will bring changes in quality of life of the people in the region through enhanced employment and business opportunities.It will help in the development of ancillaries and will generate multiple opportunities. It will be beneficial for local people with improved commercial, industrial activities, educational opportunities, entertainment, and health services. Hence, the project will boost the local economy.

6.1.1 Description of the Area for Social Study

The study area is falling under Kodinar Taluka and Una Taluka of Junagarh district. The nearest villages to the proposed power plant site are namely Nanawada, Kaj and Jantrakhadi, all in the Kodinar Taluka. The census data of 2001 has been discussed in section 3.5.9. In order to assess the impacts on socioeconomic conditions, survey and public consultation were carried out within the study area. The project specific data is discussed in the following subsections. The villages surveyed in the study area are summarized in Table 6.1.

Table 6.1 Villages within 10km Radius of Proposed Site

SN Settlement Household Sample

1. Mitiyaj 149

2. Fafni Moti 61

3. Fafni Nani 30

4. Advi 60

5. Dolasa 201

6. Velva 88

7. Malgam 60

8. Kadodara 101

9. Pipalva Bavana 61

10. Jantrakhadi 30

11. Panch Pipalva 100

12. Nanavada 145

13. Malsaram 121

14. Sarakhadi


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 6.1 Villages within 10km Radius of Proposed Site

SN Settlement Household Sample

15. Kaj 402

16. Velan 88

17. Lerka 35

18. Chikhli 60

19. Sokhda 57

20. Kob 122

21. Kotada 123

22. Venkabara 275 Source: Field studies carried out by CES (i) Pvt. Ltd

Observations those follow hereunder are solely based on response to sample survey conducted by M/s CES in 2010.

6.1.1.1 Socioeconomic Baseline Condition in the study area

Overall 2671 household were surveyed which represent around 20% of the population of the surveyed villages. The survey results are discussed in the following sections.

A. Respondent’s Relationship to the Head of the Household

In all the villages, the highest percentage of respondents was the heads of households themselves. In households where the head of the family was not available, wife or children (adults) participated in the survey. In a few cases, the respondent was the parent of the household head.

Figure 6.1: Respondent’s Relationship to Household Head by Village

B. Respondent’s Years of Residence in the Village


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

In all the villages, most of the respondents had resided in their current village for over 20 years. All the respondents from Advi, Fafni Moti, Fafni Nani, Jantrakhadi, Nanawada and Panch Pipalwa were residents of these villages for more than 20 years. The distribution can be seen in Figure 6.2.

Figure 6.2: Number of years of residence in present village

C. Type of Government Identification Owned by Respondent

More than 90% of respondents in all villages owned a Ration Card. In some villages, less than 10 percent owned either a Voter ID or Driving License. Further around 1% of the respondents in 2 villages (Dholasa and Velva) owned a passport.

Figure 6.3: Type of Government ID Owned by Respondent

6.1.1.2 Gender and Age Patterns of Household Heads

In all villages, around 90% of the households surveyed had male heads of the household. The only exceptions being Kotada and Vanakbara, where


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

males accounted for less than 90% and the percentage of females was 13% and 20% respectively.

Figure 6.4: Gender Distribution of Household Heads

In terms of age structure, most household heads had an age range between 31 years to 60 years, with some villages showing a majority in the 31-45years age group, while others showed a majority in the older age group of 46-60years. Only Sokhoda showed a majority (more than 54%) of the household heads being upto 30 years of age.

Figure 6.5: Age Structure of Household Heads

6.1.1.3 Occupation of the Household Head

There are four distinct occupational categories among the surveyed villages, i.e. Agriculture, Daily Wage Labour, Wage Employee and Fishing, each showing a majority among certain villages. In Bhavna Pipalwa (59%), Fafni Moti (41%), Fafni Nani (60%), Jantrakhadi (96.7%), Kaj (90.8%), Kob


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

(37.7%), Lerka (31.4%), Malashram (38%), Malgam (53.3%), Nanawada (83.4%) and Panch Pipalwa (74%), the majority of the household heads are engaged in Agriculture. In Advi (61.7%), Chikhli (56.7%), Dholasa (58.7%), Mityaj (44.3%) and Velva (44.3%) the majority of the household heads are engaged as Daily Wage Labours. In Kadodra (67.3%), Kotada (82.9%), Madhwad (88.3%), Sokhoda (36.8%) and Velan (73.3%) the common occupation of household heads is of a Wage Employee. Lastly, Fishing is the major occupation of the coastal village of Vanakbara, where 60.7% of the household heads are engaged in this activity. Other minor occupations include Government Service, Private Jobs and having their own business.

Figure 6.6: Occupation of the Household Heads

6.1.1.4 Education of the Household Head

In all villages, about 50% of the household heads are literate or can read only. 4.2% household heads are Graduates.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 6.7: Education of the Household Head

6.1.1.5 Household Demography

A. Social Category of the Household

The majority of households surveyed in all villages were of the OBC category, except in Advi (66.7%), Kadodra (80.2%), Mityaj (55%), Nanawada (86.2%), and Velan (51.9%) where the majority of the households were Scheduled Caste (SC).

Figure 6.8: Social Category of the Households

B Number of Total Family Members in the Household

The majority of households surveyed had a family size of about 3-5 members, with Fafni Nani (50%), Jantrakhadi (50%), Kotada (48.8%), Madhwad (52.8%), Malgam (63.32%) and Velva (52.3%) having a larger household size of 6-8 family members.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 6.9: Number of Total Family Members in the Household

6.1.1.6 Household Annual Income and Savings

A. Annual Income of Household

The majority of households surveyed have an annual income of upto Rs. 1,00,000. Only in Fafni Moti (52.5%), Fafni Nani (60%) and Kaj (57.5%) did the respondents mention that their household annual income was over Rs, 1,00,000.

Figure 6.10: Annual Income of the Households

6.1.1.7 Source Income of Household

In relation with the occupation of the household head, the major sources of income in all villages are either Agriculture or Daily Wage Earnings. The Figure below shows details by village.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 6.11: Source Income of Household

6.1.1.8 Annual Savings of Household

Majority of the households surveyed have very meager savings of upto Rs. 10,000 annually.

Figure 6.12: Annual Savings of Household

6.1.1.9 Household Loan Details

In all villages the majority (more than 80%) of the households surveyed did not avail of any loan. Those households that did avail of loans, around one-third availed a loan amount of Rs. 20,000-50,000.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

A Availing Government Schemes

While more than 90% of the total number of households surveyed mentioned that they did not avail the benefits of any Government Schemes, 6.3% of the households did avail certain Government schemes such as National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme and Indira Awas Yojana. Further, of the 6.3% households, 68.5% mentioned that their annual income showed an increased after availing of these schemes.

6.1.1.10 Household Amenities

A. Type of Infrastructure Owned

All respondents in all the villages mentioned that they owned residential structures. Further, it was elicited that a few respondents also owned some commercial infrastructure or farmhouses.

B. Type of Residential Structure

As seen in Figure 6.13 below, the majority (more than 80%) of households surveyed in all villages have a one-storied residential house, except in Mityaj, Sokhada and Vanakbara, where 50-65% households had a one storied house, and the remainder had a two-storied house. Further it can be seen that only in Dholasa, Kotada, Madhwad and Vanakbara respondents owned three-storied houses (less than 1%).

Figure 6.13: Type of Residential Structure

C Livestock Owned by Household Most respondents mentioned that the household owned sheep (36.7%), followed by goats (22.2%), Buffalo (18.7%), Cows (13.4%) and Chicken (7.6%). Other livestock included ox and donkeys.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 6.14: Livestock Owned by Total Households

D. Type of Agricultural Equipment Owned

In all villages the households owned Tractors, Threshers (except Vanakbara, as it was a non-agricultural fishing village) and Pumps (Diesel and Electric).

E. Type of Household Items Owned

The most common household commodities, as found in all the villages, include TVs, Electric Fans and Mobile / Landline Phones. Some households also mentioned owning items such as Fridges and Radios. A very small number of households reported having other items such as: Electric Oven, Mixer, LPG Connection, Video Player, Audio Player and Water Filters.

Figure 6.15: Type of Household Items Owned


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

F. Access to Utilities

1. Access to Potable Water

Access to Potable water varied among the villages, the three most common sources of potable water include: Common Dug Wells, Pump Wells and Piped Public Water Supply. The majority of households using a particular source are as follows:

Dig Well (Common): Advi (100%), Chikhli (96.7%), Fafni Moti (82%), Fafni Nani (76.7%), Kob (96.7%), Lerka (94.3%), Malgam (51.7%), Nanawada (62.1%), Sokhada (100%), Velva (88.6%).

Pump Well (common): Panch Pipalwa (77%)

Piped Public Water Supply: Bhavna Pipalwa (100%), Dholasa (99.5%), Jantrakhadi (100%), Kaj (90%), Kadodra (100%), Kotada (98.4%), Madhwad (98.9%), Malashram (99.2%), Mityaj (98.2%), Vanakbara (77.1%), Velan (100%)

2. Access to Electricity

More than 95% of the surveyed households in all villages have electric connections through the power lines. However, a minority of households are dependent on private generators.

3. Access to Toilets

In 48.2% of the total households surveyed do not have access to toilets, while 38.2% have private indoor toilets and 13.6% have private outdoor toilets.

6.1.1.11 Status of Women in the Household

A. Number of Women in the Household

The average household size was found to be between 3-5 family members in all villages (as seen above). In relation to this, 57.5% household reflected the number of females in the family to be between one and two, followed by three to five females in 38.3% households.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 6.16: Percentage of Women in the Household (Total)

B. Annual Income of Women Household Members

In terms of women’s income, the respondents in all the villages mentioned that female family members earned upto Rs. 20,000 annually, except in Nanawada where 100% of the respondents mentioned that women in their family had an annual income of Rs. 20,001-50,000 and in Kaj where 66.7% of the respondents mentioned that women in their family earned Rs. 50,001-1,00,00. Further it was mentioned that the source of income for the women who were earning included animal husbandry, wage labour work, business and Government Service jobs.

C Women in the Decision Making Process

More than 85% of the total respondents mentioned that women were involved in the decision-making in their households.

6.1.1.12 Status of Women in the Household Land Possession

A. Possession of Agricultural Land

In almost all villages, respondents (20% to 100%) mentioned that they possess agricultural land, except in Madhwad where less than 1% owned agricultural land and in Vanakbara (around 2%) as this is a fishing village. Those who owned and worked on the land mentioned that they mainly grow Ground nut, Cotton, Bajra, Sugar Cane and some areas have wheat.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 6.17: Percentage of Respondents Possessing Agricultural Land

B. Size of Agricultural Land in Possession

In all villages, most of the respondents mentioned that their agricultural land was of upto 5 bigha in size. However, in Fafni Nani, none of the respondents had less than 5 bigha of land, with most of the respondents mentioning that they owned 5-10 bighas. Further, in Malgam and Sokhada the majority respondents (around 40.4% and 45% respectively) mentioned owning land of 10-15 bigha, while in Kob and Velva, the majority (42.1% and 35.1% respectively) owned more than 15 bigha of agricultural land.

Figure 6.18: Size of Agricultural Land Owned by Respondents


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

C. Market Value of Agricultural Land

Of those respondents who mentioned possessing agricultural land, the majority of respondents from villages away from sea coast opined that the market value of their land is above Rs. 100,000 per acre. Excepting in Bhavna Pipalwa, Kob, Lerka, Madhwad (100%), Mityaj and Nanawada where more than 50% respondents opined that their land is valued between Rs. 50,001-1,00,000 per acre.

Figure 6.19: Market Value of Agricultural Land Owned by Respondents

D. Health Status

Nearly all respondents in all villages mentioned that either they or a family member had a health problem during the past year. Fever was cited as the most common health problem, as well as some respondents mentioning common cold and gall stone problems.

E. Migration Pattern

In all villages, migration out of the village is uncommon, less than 40% of the respondents in all villages mentioned that they migrate. However, in Chikhli and Malashram more than 40% respondents mentioned that they migrate (43.3% and 47.1% respectively). Those who migrate mentioned that they go for more than 6 months of the year. The respondents also noted that the time of migration is from April to September, or August to February or December to May. Further, they mentioned migrating to cities such as Ahmedabad, Jamnagar, Bhavnagar and Porbanadar in search of work. Respondents also mentioned that they are engaged in non-


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

agricultural labour activities during the migration period and earn an income between Rs. 20,001-50,000 in that period.

6.1.1.13 Perception about the Project

A. Awareness about the Project

More than 80% respondents in all villages showed awareness about the project. The exceptions include Advi with 65% awareness and Vanakbara with 76.4% awareness.

Figure 6.20: Percentage of Respondents Showing Awareness of the Project

B. Sources of Information about the Project

Majority of respondents mentioned that they learned about the Project by word of mouth or from their friends and relatives. However, in Dholasa more than 51% respondents mentioned that they received information about the Project from newspapers. Other sources include TV and radio, however this was mentioned by less than 16% respondents in some villages.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 6.21: Main Sources of Information regarding the Project

6.1.1.14 Perception on the Economic Benefit brought about by the Project

The majority of the respondents (82.9%) felt that the project would bring economic benefit to their village.

Figure 6.22 Respondents’ view on whether the Project will bring Economic Benefit

The majority of respondents who believed that the Project would be economically beneficial mentioned that this would come about through wage employment. A sizeable percentage of respondents in Nanawada and Panch Pipalwa also mentioned business opportunities would improve through the project.

6.1.1.15 Issues of Project Affected Persons (PAPs)

M/s SPEGPL is purchasing land for the proposed project from the land owners at mutually agreed price which is substantially higher than prevailing market rates of the prevailing area.

A. Number of PAPs and their Perceived Loss due to the Project

Through the survey it was established that a number of respondents from Kaj and Nanawada would be affected by the project, as a result of land purchase.

PAPs Village Power Plant Coal/Pipe

corridor

Total

Kaj 294 57 351 Nanawada 97 - 97 Sarakhadi - 39 39


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

In terms of the perceived loss, the PAP respondents all mentioned that they would be losing all or part of their land.

6.1.2 Social Impact Assessment

Data indicates that the major occupation in the area is Agriculture or Daily Wage Earnings followed by fishing mainly in coastal villages. Other minor occupation in the area is Government service, private jobs and having their own business. The majority of households have an annual income of up to Rs. 1 00,000. The migration rate in the study area is less than 40% as the respondents stated. The information indicates that the villagers migrated to the cities namely Ahmadabad, Jamnagar, Bhavnagar and Porbandar in searching of jobs. Those who migrate informed that they go for more than six months. The project will help reduce the migration as new business avenues will be opened up for the local skilled and unskilled workers.

Review of primary survey data indicate that more than 85% of the women have the decision making power in their households. It is an indication that the women in the area have good say and they will be benefitted after coming up of the project. The CSR policy of the project proponent include program for capacity building of PAPs. Overall, the development of project will reduce the drudgery and help organize women groups to strengthen their capacity apart from enhancing their self image and self esteem. All these efforts will promote women’s participation in mainstream development activities. Women can also play a very important role in general health care of the family which in turn can help improve the community health in the project.

According to 2001 Census the majority of population in Nanawada is Scheduled Caste (81.5%) and in Kaj the Scheduled Caste population is 24.7%. The majority of households in most villages are of OBC category. So these marginal people will be benefitted by the project.

6.1.3 Project Site Land Acquirement

Total 340 ha of land is required for the proposed plant. The field investigation reveals that most of the land is under cultivation and the land will be procured from the land owners through direct negotiations. The following table gives the land details of the project area.

Private AgricultureLand

Government Land Total Land Sl.No. Name ofVillage

ha ha Ha 1. Kaj 262-17-86 4-62-47 266-80-33 2. Nanawada 69-50-26 3-80-71 73-30-97

Total 331-68-12 23-69-42 340-11-30


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Source: SPEGPL

Discussion with SPEGPL officials indicate that land will be purchased @ Rs 500,000 per bigha9 where 1.66bigha = 1acre. Therefore, there is no R&R issues is involved in the project. A list of the landowners who are selling their land to the SPEGPL is presented in Annex 6.1.

6.1.4 Public Consultation

Public participation is an integral part of

environmental assessment. It is a continuous two way process, involving public understanding of the processes and mechanisms through which developmental problems and needs are investigated and solved.

Hence it is a valuable source of information on key impacts and potential mitigation measures.

Public consultation was conducted in Kaj and Nanawada. Public consultation included individuals, local peoples and group discussion

Public consultation was also conducted in the month of November 2010 at the Panchyat office of Kaj and Nanawada. Local people were informed about the proposed project, land requirement and potential benefits of the project to the locals.

The Issues discussed in the public consultation are as follows:

Land Puchase 9 Meeting with SPEGL on 16th September2010


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

- The land proposed to be purchased for the project is mostly under cultivation and belongs to the farmers of Kaj, Nanawada, and Sarakhadi villages.

- The villagers are willingly selling their land to the project proponent and there is no compulsion.

Job Security

- The villagers demanded that local people should be given preferrance in employment in the proposed plant.

- They also expressed that there should be more preferences to the Villagers whose land is purchased.

Infrastructure Development

- The villagers are facing lack of adequate facility for health, education, roads etc.

- They stated that there are some infrastructures like road, school, health center in these village, but there is a need of proper maintenance of these.

- The villagers are expecting better infrastructure facilities su[pport from SPEGPL.

Pollution

- Some of the participants expressed their concern about possibility of increase in pollution levels. The villagers have been informed that the appropriate pollution control devices such as ESP, Wastewater treatment plant and greenbelt development will be maintained during the operation of the power project.

Natural Resources

- The local people are mainly depended on agriculture and farming for their livelihood.

- They get crop, fruits and fodder from their agricultural land. - Some poor people also depend on the trees such as Babul (Bavel) for

fuel. - The agricultural remains are also collected from the land.

Cattle Development

- Animal husbandry is another main livelihood option of the locals. The villagers rear buffaloes, cows and goat.

- The villagers get fodder for the cattle from the agricultural field.

Training


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

- There must be Training process for the people of different section according to their skill and demand.

- Computer training should be provided to the educated youth and people. - Women should be given training in Income Generation Activities such as

embroidery, handicraft, food processing etc. 6.1.5 Potential Socio-economic Impacts

Through the survey and Public Consultation it was found that respondents from Kaj and Nanawada will be affected by the project by change of their occupation structure. Some of the respondents mentioned that they would be losing all or part of their farmland. However, in some cases the loss of land was not perceived to have any impact on their income, because they may start some better venture with this sold out price. The PAPs of both villages preferred to have cash compensation. However there was also some mentioned of Land for Land compensation, and assistance for employment generation. The majority of the respondents (82.9%) responded that the project would be beneficial for their village. Critically analyzing the baseline status of the socio-economic profile and visualizing the scenario of the proposed project, there are some positive and negative impacts on the people of the project affected area, socio-economic component would be of varied nature as summarized below:

Positive Impacts

• Villagers are selling their land at good value (better than perceived by them in the past) and they can invest this money to other land or business. It may help to increase their income.

• There is a scope of development of basic civil amenities like transport system, roads, healthcare facilities, educational institution, market etc.

• The Thermal Power Plant will increase the power generation capacity. Improved electricity situation will result in betterment of industry, irrigation facilities and drinking water supply etc. not only in Gujarat but also in other parts of country.

• Construction of this plant is expected to create significant indirect employment opportunities, as daily wage workers will be employed in construction and transportation activities, supply of materials and auxiliary and ancillary works.

• Small scale ancillaries business will be developed during construction phase around the site


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

• Proposed project will improve the existing socio-economic status of the region.

• A new mixed cultural set up will be created; new people come to work in the plant from different region and culture.

Negative Impacts

• A change in occupation pattern will occur due to the proposed plant. A number of agricultural labors will transform into industrial labors for change in land use pattern.Which will be psychological transitions phase.

• Migration of local people for seeking jobs after getting trained by SPEGPL.

• Mixing of different people and culture causes loss of cultural ethnicity.

With due consideration of above listed impacts relevant to proposed project, the envisaged quality of life of people in different villages around project site was assessed as with discussion of PAPs including the expected change due to implementation of EMP and welfare measures based on subjective assessment. Under the CSR policy, SPEGPL will run different activities to promote sustainable livelihood and improve the quality of life of the people living in the project affected villages.

SPEGPL is committed for the development in sustainable manner. Therefore, impact of the proposed plant is expected to be positive.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

6.2 Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan

In general, coal based thermal power plant does not involve any hazardous chemical process which can create potential risk to personnel and property at the site and surroundings. However, few hazardous materials and gases will be handled and stored at the coal based power plant. These can create potential hazardous situations in the unlikely event of an accidental release. For identification of hazards and to enhance the safety, risk assessment studies has been carried out for the proposed coal based power plant.

The primary emphasis in safety engineering is to reduce risk to human life and environment. The broad tools attempt to minimize the chances of accidents occurring. There always exists, no matter how remote, that small probability of a major accident occurring. If the accident involves highly hazardous materials in sufficient large quantities, the consequences may be serious to the plant, to surrounding areas and the populations therein.

6.2.1 Identification of Hazards in Proposed Thermal Power Plant

Risk is defined as the unwanted consequences of a particular activity in relation to the likelihood that this may occur. Risk Assessment thus comprises of two variables, magnitude of consequences and the probability of occurrence of accident.

The first step in risk assessment is identification of hazards. Hazard is defined as a physical or chemical condition with the potential of accident which can cause damage to people, property or the environment. Hazards are identified by careful review of plant operation and nature of materials used. The various scenarios by which an accident can occur are then determined, concurrently study of both probability and the consequences of an accident is carried out and finally risk assessment is made. If this risk is acceptable then the study is complete. If the risk is unacceptable then the system must be modified with suitable mitigation measures and the procedure is restarted.

Hazard is defined as a chemical or physical conditions those have the potential for causing damage to people, property or the environment.

Hazard identification is the first step in the risk analysis and entails the process of collecting information on: • the types and quantities of hazardous substances stored and handled at

the plant,

• the location of storage tanks & other facilities,


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

• Potential hazards associated with the spillage and release of hazardous chemicals.

Various hazardous processes at the coal based thermal power plant are described in following sub-sections.

6.2.1.1 Light Diesel Oil (LDO)

Light diesel oil (LDO) is used to light up boilers. At proposed thermal power plant, LDO will be stored in 1000 kl capacity tank and 500 kl capacity day tank as per details given in Table 7.1.

In the event of leakage of LDO from these tanks, pool fire hazard can take place, if an ignition source is available.

6.2.1.2 Heavy Fuel Oil (HFO)

At the proposed thermal power plant, heavy fuel oil (HFO) will be used for supporting combustion at low loads and during short falls of solid fuel. At proposed thermal power plant, HFO will be stored in 2000 kl capacity tank and 500 kl capacity two number of day tanks as per details given in Table 7.2.

6.2.1.3 Hydrogen Gas

At the proposed thermal power plant, hydrogen gas will be used for turbine cooling. Hydrogen will be stored in 37 kg capacity 60 nos. of cylinders considering 3 days storage, therefore, onsite generation is envisaged.

As per Indian Explosives Act, the hydrogen plant should be well construed and fenced and license should be obtained from Chief Controller of Explosives (CCE).

Hydrogen is a colourless and odourless gas. It is flammable, explosive and results in violent reaction with air. It forms sensitive explosive mixtures with bromine and chlorine. Lower and upper explosive limits of hydrogen gas in air are: LEL is 4.1 % and UEL is 74.2 %. It can be ignited by heat, spark or flame. Once ignited, it burns with a pale blue, almost invisible flame. Vapour explosion hazard is likely indoors, outdoors or in sewers.

Hydrogen gas is chemically stable and no chemical reaction occurs with common materials but contact at low temperature causes most materials to become very brittle.

Hydrogen gas can enter in human body though skin and inhalation. If atmosphere does not contain enough oxygen, inhalation can cause dizziness, unconsciousness or even death. Contact of liquid hydrogen with


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

eyes or skin causes freezing similar to burn. Health hazard of hydrogen gas is generally low for all exposures.

Table 6.2: Details of Hazardous Materials to be Stored at Proposed Power Plant

S.No Chemical Annual Requirement

Maximum Inventory at a Point of Time

Storage

1 LDO/HFO

17000 kilolitres

1500 m3 / 1350 ton

[Considering 30 days storage at site]

2 – HFO storage tanks each of 2000 kl, 1-LDO storage tank of 1000 kl capacity, 1-LDO Day tank 500 kl and 2-HFO – Day tanks each 500 kl.

2 Hydrogen.

5650 no. hydrogen cylinders

60 no. hydrogen cylinders /37 kg

[Considering 3 days storage only (since onsite generation is

conceived)]

Cylinder

6.2.1.4 Steam Generator (Boiler)

At coal based thermal power plant, boiler can create explosion hazard and subsequently pressure wave. Explosion in boiler is possible due to accumulation of an explosion mixture caused by:

a. Improper sequence of operation,

b. Insufficient ignition energy supplied, when compared to actual requirement,

c. Firing with improper fuel-air ratio

Almost all the interlocks and protections for boiler will be generally under combustion control system, through which the master fuel-trip relay is actuated.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

6.2.2 Identification of Major Hazard Potential at Proposed Thermal Power Plant

Considering the process and the materials to be used at the proposed thermal power plant, the following can be considered as major plant sections for the identification of hazard potential:

a. Coal handling plant.

b. Main plant

c. Water treatment plant.

d. Hydrogen generation plant.

e. Switch yard including sub-stations and transformers.

f. Fuel oil handling plant.

g. Cable galleries.

h. Stores where hazardous flammable and explosive materials are stored.

i. Ash dykes.

6.2.2.1 Major Hazard Potential Assessment

The likely major hazard potentials are identified as follows:

a. Slow isolated fires.

b. Fast spreading fires.

c. Explosions.

d. Bursting of pipelines.

e. Uncontrolled release of toxic/flammable/corrosive liquids.

f. Uncontrolled release of toxic/flammable gases/dusts.

g. Floods.

Depending upon the nature, scale, speed and impact, each of the above hazards may constitute an emergency.

6.2.2.2 Hazard Potential of Various Plant Sections

The hazard potential of various plant sections are presented in following subsections:

I. Plant Section with Fire Hazard

a. Coal Handling Plant and conveyor.

b. Cable in galleries and cable trays in all plant sections.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

c. Fuel oil handling and oil tanks in main plant.

d. Transformer oil and lube oil.

e. Burner area in boilers.

II. Plant Sections with Explosion Hazards

a. Hydrogen plant

b. Turbo generators where hydrogen is used for cooling generator

c. Boiler (coal/oil fired)

d. Transformer (oil cooled)

e. Coal dust in mills and boilers

III. Bursting Hazards of Pipe Lines and Vessels

a. Steam pipes due to high pressure/temperature

b. Hydrogen gas pipelines, acid and alkali pipelines

IV. Hazards Due to Release of Gases and Dusts

a. Chlorine from water treatment plant (pipe line failure).

b. Hydrogen from TG area of main plant and hydrogen plant.

c. Pulverized coal dust from mills and associated piping and flue gases.

d. Fly ash and flue gases from stack, ash ponds, ESP hoppers and bottom ash system.

e. Coal dust in transfer points of CHP crusher.

f. Flue gases from the ducts.

V. Release of Liquids

a. Chemical tanks and chlorine tonners in water treatment plant.

b. Fuel oil tanks in fuel oil handling section.

c. Ash dyke (bund failure).

d. Control fluid in 660 MW turbine system.

VI. Floods

a. Breach of ash dykes.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

6.2.3 Hazards Due to Loss of Containment

The fuel oils and hydrogen will be stored and handled at the proposed thermal power plant. The fuel oils and hydrogen are flammable in nature while chlorine is toxic. In the event of leakage or accidental release of flammable hazardous materials, it will create localized effects within the short distances in side the plant in the form of thermal radiations.

Adequate safety measures including fire fighting facilities will be provided to attend any emergency due to handling and storage of fuel oil and hydrogen at the proposed power plant. At the bulk storage of LDO/HFO, dykes will be provided for full containment for an unlikely event of leakage or spillage.

Detailed release and consequence computations have been done for potential release scenarios:

6.2.3.1 Accident Scenario

Following accident scenarios have been considered for consequence analysis:

a. Pool fire due to release of LDO from Tank

b. Pool fire due to release of HFO from Tank

c. Release of hydrogen from cylinder

6.2.3.2 Consequence Analysis And Vulnerable Zone

Consequence analysis for the above mentioned accident scenario has been carried out to estimate the vulnerable zone for each accident scenario. Once the vulnerable zone is identified for an incident, mitigation measures can be taken to eliminate damage to plant and injury to personnel.

6.2.3.3 Release of LDO from Rupture of 2000 kl Capacity Tank

LDO has minimum flash point of 660C hence formation of vapour cloud is ruled out and only pool fire of spilled LDO is likely. A pool fire of spilled LDO typically causes different levels of thermal radiations depending upon atmospheric stability classes and wind speeds at the time of fire.

I. Scenario Description

In this accident scenario, rupture of nozzle (dia 150 mm) with tank of LDO has been considered and is assumed that the spilled LDO will spread within the bund (dyke) area and the same will be filled with released LDO. If


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

ignition source is available, only pool fire is possible. The consequence calculations in this scenario include:

a. Effective pool area,

b. Combustion Rate on ignition of pool,

c. Heat radiation distance to 37.5 kW/m2, 12.5 kW/m2 and 4 kW/m2

II. Release Consequence

The computed results of consequence analysis using PHAST 6.53.1 Software for LDO are as follows:

Parameters LDO Tank

Release Quantity 1,284,753 kg

Effective Diameter 41.46 m2

Combustion Rate 152.93 kg/s

Flame Length 68.56 m

Heat Radiation Distance from Pool Boundary (m) for Different Radiation Intensity (kW/m2)

F, 1 m/s E, 2m/s D, 3 m/s B, 3 m/s

For 37.5 kW/m2

Not Reached

Not Reached

Not Reached

Not Reached

For 12.5 kW/m2

26.5801 29.0454 30.0743 27.7645

For 4 kW/m2 54.8578 66.0627 73.0957 70.7859

The consequence analysis results indicate that the maximum distance for 4 kW/m2 thermal radiation is 73.1 m under stability class D (3 m/s). The 4 kW/m2 thermal radiation will cause first degree burn for 10 sec. exposure.

Radiation vs Distance and Intensity Radius for pool fire of LDO are presented in Figure 6.23 and Figure 6.24 respectively.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Figure 6.23: Radiation vs Distance for Late Pool Fire for LDO

Figure 6.24 Radius for Late Pool Fire for LDO


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

6.2.4 Release of HFO from Rupture of Tank of 1000 kl Capacity

HFO has flash point of more than 660C hence formation of vapour cloud is ruled out and only pool fire of spilled fuel oil is likely. A pool fire of spilled fuel oil typically causes different levels of thermal radiations.

III. Scenario Description

In this release scenario, rupture of nozzle (dia 100 mm) with tank of HFO has been considered and is assumed that the spilled HFO will spread within the bund area and the same will be filled with released HFO. If ignition source is available, only pool fire is possible. The consequence calculations in this scenario also include:

d. Effective pool area,

e. Combustion Rate on ignition of pool,

f. Heat radiation distance to 37.5 kW/m2, 12.5 kW/m2 and 4 kW/m2

IV. Release Consequence

The computed results of consequence analysis using PHAST 6.53.1 Software for HFO are as follows:

Parameters HFO Tank

Release Quantity 642,377 kg

Effective Diameter 28.77 m2

Combustion Rate 73.63 kg/s

Flame Length 53.18 m

Heat Radiation Distance from Pool Boundary (m) for Different Radiation Intensity (kW/m2)

F, 1 m/s E, 2 m/s D, 3 m/s B, 3 m/s

For 37.5 kW/m2 Not Reached

Not Reached

Not Reached

Not Reached

For 12.5 kW/m2 18.4726 21.5631 22.8494 21.4531

For 4 kW/m2 43.7836 52.9834 58.6855 57.2892

The consequence analysis results indicate that the maximum distance for 4 kW/m2 thermal radiation is 58.7 m under stability class D (3 m/s). The 4 kW/m2 thermal radiation will cause first degree burn for 10 sec. exposure.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Radiation vs distance and intensity radius for pool fire of LDO are presented in Figure 6.25 and Figure 6.26, respectively.

Figure 6.26: Intensity Radius for Late Pool Fire for HFO

Figure 6.25: Radiation vs Distance for Late Pool Fire for HFO


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

6.2.4.1 Release of Hydrogen from 37 kg Cylinder

On accidental release of hydrogen from cylinder, hydrogen will be violently react with air and flash fire will take place, it getting source of ignition depending various stability classes and wind speeds.

Release Consequence

The computed results of consequence analysis using PHAST 6.53.1 Software for hydrogen release followed by flash fire envelope will be as given below:

Distance (m)

F, 1 m/s E, 2 m/s D, 3 m/s B, 3 m/s

Furthest Extent (20000 pm) 14.4909 16.3784 18.9003 19.1389

Furthest Extent (40000ppm) 10.9229 11.5595 12.7958 12.9378

Flash fire envelops distances for hydrogen releases are shown in Figure 6.27.

Figure 6.27: Details of Flash Fire Envelope


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

6.2.5 Occupational Safety for Proposed Power Plant

Coal based thermal power plant deals with various hazards, which have potential to pose occupational risk. These hazards can pose threat to occupational health risk of personnel engaged in the hazardous operations. Some major occupational risks involved in operation of coal based thermal power plants are described in following subsections along with necessary safety and preventive measures.

6.2.6 Coal Dust Emissions from Coal Handling System

Coal handling system is a major source of coal dust emissions and can create occupational risk to personnel engaged in coal handling activities. Inhalation of coal dust by personnel engaged in coal handling could pose occupational health problems. Permissible limits of exposure of coal dust in work environment under Factories Act 1948, are as under:

a. Time Weighted Average (TWA) Concentration (8 hours): 2 mg/m3, respirable dust fraction containing less than 5% quartz.

Pneumoconiosis results from the inhalation of coal dust from coal handling plant. The two forms of coal pneumoconiosis are simple pneumoconiosis and complicated pneumoconiosis of progressive massive fibrosis (PMF) are common. In simple pneumoconiosis, nodules are produced in the upper part of the lungs, particularly around bronchioles. Dyspnoea and chronic bronchitis are symptoms associated with the disease although they may not occur until the nodules are well advanced. In PMF, which may occur together with simple pneumoconiosis, the nodules are larger and more fibrotic.

6.2.7 Safeguards to Control Dust Emissions

Major safeguards to control the coal dust emissions in coal handling system are as follows:

a. Installation of appropriate dust collection system to capture the coal dust particles from coal handling system.

b. Scrubbing of coal dust emissions before discharging into the atmosphere.

c. Provide relevant Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) like face shield and dust mask to the personnel engaged in coal handling activities.

6.2.8 Occupational Risk due to Hydrogen Gas used in Generator Cooling

Hydrogen is used in cooling of generators and considered as explosion hazard. Hydrogen gas can enter in human body by skin and inhalation. If


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

atmosphere does not contain enough oxygen, inhalation of hydrogen can cause dizziness, unconsciousness or even death. Contact of liquid hydrogen with eyes and skin causes freezing, similar to burning.

6.2.9 Safeguards for Hydrogen Generation and Handling System

Major safeguards for hydrogen generation and handling system should include safety arrangements as described below:

a. Positive and negative bus bars should be given red and blue colours to avoid change in polarity. Otherwise, hydrogen will be collected in the heads of oxygen, which will cause explosion.

b. In case of more pressure, sodium hydroxide solution used for electrolysis be released through safety tubes.

c. A safety valve provided at the top of the gas washing tank should release the gas into atmosphere through flame arrestor in case of back pressure.

d. Water seal should be provided in the seal pot to prevent outside air to enter low-pressure gas holder.

e. The following protection devices should be provided in the L. P. hydrogen gas holder:

(i) Low limit switch

(ii) High limit switch

(iii) Very low limit switch

(iv) Very high limit switch to trip the supply to cells.

f. Hydrogen gas in normally filled in 45 litres capacity cylinders at a pressure of 150 kg/cm2 by using compressors. The compressors should have safety valves at each stage of compression. If pressure rises, the gas should be released to the atmosphere through flame arrestor.

g. Flame proof light fittings and power sockets should be provided to avoid arcing.

h. No smoking caution board should be exhibited in all areas on hydrogen plant. No welding or gas cutting work should be permitted upto a distance of 15 m on all sides of the plant.

6.2.9.1 Occupational Risk Due to High Noise Generation

At coal based thermal power plant, many operations, such as, generators, turbine, blowers, ID fans, etc. generate high noise levels which can pose occupational risk to personnel working in high noise areas. High noise


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

affects human beings in a number of ways disturbing work, rest, sleep and communication. Continuous exposure to high noise can damage hearing and can cause physiological and psychological problems.

6.2.10 Safeguards to Reduce the Occupational Risk Due to High Noise

Following control measures/safe guards are suggested, to reduce the occupational risk from high noise generation:

a. By selecting equipment, machines and technology generating low noise levels.

b. Use of ear muffs and plugs by the personnel engaged in high noise areas

c. Providing acoustic enclosures to the high noise generating machine and equipment wherever possible.

d. Wherever acoustic enclosures are not possible, sound proof cabin should be provided for personnel engaged in high noise area.

e. Provide silencers on engines wherever possible.

f. Provide barrier (wall, curtain, etc.) around the noise generation source wherever possible.

6.3 Disaster Management Plan

For an unlikely event of emergency caused by major emergency or accidental release of hazardous materials, planning response strategies are termed as Disaster Management Plans (DMP). DMPs cannot be considered in isolation or act as a substitute for maintaining good safety standards in a proposed plant. The best way to protect against major accidents occurrence is by implementation of high levels of safety standards.

Generally, the following five steps are involved in an emergency response:

a. Discovery and Notification: An event with an imminent threat of turning into an accident must first be discovered and the discoverer quickly notifies the same to the plant safety officer.

b. Evaluation and Accident Control Initiation: Based on the evaluation of available information, the safety authority makes a rapid assessment of the severity of the likely accident and initiates the best course of action.

c. Containment and Counter Measures: Action is first taken to contain and control the accident by eliminating the causes which may lead to


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

the spread of accident. Measures are also taken to minimize the damage to personnel, property and environment.

d. Cleanup and Disposal: After the accident is effectively contained and controlled, the cleanup of the site of the accident and safe disposal of waste generated due to the accident are undertaken.

e. Documentation: All aspects of accidents, including the way it started and progressed as well as the steps taken to contain and the extent of the damage and injury, must be documented for subsequent analysis of accident for prevention in future, damage estimation, insurance recovery and compensation payment. It may be noted that some aspects of documentation, such as, photographs of the site of accident and main objects involved in the accident, survey for damage estimation, etc. may have to be carried out before the cleanup and disposal phase. However, the effort in all cases is to recommence the production as soon as possible.

6.3.1.1 Emergency Classification

Severity of accident and its likely impact area will determine the level of emergency and the disaster management plan required for appropriate handling of an emergency. Emergency levels and the action needed for each level are indicated in following sub-sections.

6.3.1.2 Level 1 Emergency

A local accident with a likely impact only to immediate surroundings of accident site, such as, local fires and limited release of toxic or inflammable materials. The impact distance may not be more than 250 m from the site of primary accident and may require evacuation of the building where accident occurred and utmost the adjacent buildings. At the proposed power plant, minor fires and minor release of chlorine may cause Level 1 Emergency.


A plant level accident with impact distance upto 1000 m for potential threats to life and property requiring the evacuation of all plant personnel except the emergency response personnel. The demarcated limited area outside the plant may also have to be evacuated. Larger fires, release of large quantities of inflammable or hazardous materials may belong to emergency level 2. At the proposed power plant, minor release of chlorine for long time and pool fire in HFO/LDO tanks dykes can be considered as Level 2 Emergency.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT


An accident involving a very serious hazardous situation and with likely impact area extending well beyond the plant boundary limit, such as, major fire, very large release of hazardous or inflammable material and explosion of large quantity of explosive materials. Major fires will usually have the triggering effect resulting in the propagation of explosion. In a level 3 emergency, evacuation of surrounding population around the plant periphery upto a distance of 1000 m may sometime become necessary if evacuation area extend to populated village area adjoining the site of the primary accident in a direction of maximum impact..

On-site Disaster Management Plan (DMP) will meet the hazards created due to all Level 1 emergencies and most of the Level 2 emergencies. In addition to on-site DMP, off-site DMP may also have to be put into operation for some Level 2 and all Level 3 emergencies.

6.3.2 Objectives and Methodology of DMP Preparation

6.3.2.1 Objective

The objective of onsite Disaster Management Plan (DMP), for the coal based power plant is to be in a state of perceptual readiness through training, development and mock drills, to immediately control and arrest any emergency situation so as to avert a full fledged disaster and the consequence on human and property damage and in the event of a disaster still occurring, to manage the same so that the risk of damage consequences to life and property are minimized. Thereafter, proper rehabilitation, review and revisions of the DMP to overcome the shortcomings noticed are undertaken.

The document is prepared keeping in view and to conform to the requirements of the provisions of the Factories Act 1948 under Section 41 B (4) and guidelines issued by the Ministry of Environment and Forests, Government of India, and Manufacture, Import and Storage of Hazardous Chemicals Rules 2000 Schedule II under Environmental Protection Act 1986 and the various notifications issued by State Chief Inspectors of Factories from time to time.

6.3.2.2 Methodology

A DMP is usually prepared in two parts i.e. On-site DMP and Off-site DMP. The on-site DMP will be administered by the proposed TPP in the present case. The plant management may seek the assistance of other agencies, namely, fire brigade, police and health authorities, if necessary. The Off-


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

site DMP will be administered by the District Authorities with the assistance of other relevant authorities.

6.3.3 Vulnerable Zone for Proposed Thermal Power Plant

The consequence analysis and vulnerable zones for the release scenarios, namely, pool fire in tank farm of HFO & LDO, flash fire due to release of hydrogen. and toxiv release of chlorine vapour from ton cylinder have been described in Risk Assessment Section. The vulnerable zones due to different accidental release are as given below:

• Due to fire in dyke of LDO tank (2000 kl), maximum distance for 4 kW/m2 thermal radiation is 73.1 m under atmospheric stability Class D (3 m/s)

• Due to fire in dyke of HFO tank (1000 kl), maximum distance for 4 kW/m2 thermal radiation is 58.7 m under atmospheric stability Class D (3 m/s)

• Flash fire envelope distance due to release of hydrogen 19.14 m under atmospheric stability Class B (3 m/s)

6.3.3.1 Site Main Controller

The General Manager of proposed thermal power plant, or Dy. General Manager (O) in the absence of General Manager, will lead this organization as the Site Main Controller (SMC). The SMC will have the following two teams working under him:

a. Site Incident Controller Team

b. Auxiliary Team

6.3.3.2 The Site Incident Controller Team

This team will be lead by the Site Incident Controller (SIC) and will consist of five supervisors and other supporting personnel. Dy. General Manager (Operation) or in his absence the Dy. General Manager (Operation), will act as SIC. As far as possible, the supervisors should be drawn from the unit in which the primary accident has occurred.

6.3.3.3 The Auxiliary Team

This team will be lead by the Auxiliary Team Controller (ATC) and will consist of five supervisors and other supporting personnel. The Dy. General Manager (Operation), or in his absence Sr. Manager (ME) will act as ATC.

6.3.3.4 Responsibilities of Site Main Controller (SMC)

The responsibilities of SMC will be as under:


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

a. Set up Emergency Control Centre (ECC) to direct emergency operations.

b. Determine the severity of an emergency, declare appropriate emergency level and changing the emergency level, if considered essential.

c. Exercise direct control of units not affected by accident.

d. Determine most probable course of events by continuously reviewing and assessing the developments.

e. Direct the safe shutting down of the plant in consultation with SIC, ATC and other important officers, if necessary.

f. Ensure proper evacuation and treatment to injured personnel.

g. Liaison with District Administrative Authorities, Police, Fire Brigade and other agencies, if necessary.

h. Maintain emergency logbook.

i. Issue authorized statements to media.

j. Look after safe operation of the plant and rehabilitation of affected persons.

k. Declare all clear situations after the emergency is cover.

6.3.3.5 Responsibilities of Site Incident Controller (SIC)

The responsibilities of SIC be as under:

a. Assess the severity of the accident.

b. Initiate emergency actions to ensure the safety of personnel and minimum damage to the plant and material.

c. Direct rescue and fire fighting operations.

d. Search for casualties.

e. Evacuation of non-essential personnel to assembly area.

f. Setup communication with SMC and ECC.

g. Look after the responsibilities of SMC in his absence.

h. Give information and advice to external emergency services working at the site.

6.3.3.6 Responsibilities of Auxiliary Team Controller (ATC)

The responsibilities of ATC will be as under:


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

a. Provide all possible services to SIC so as to enable him to concentrate fully to handle the emergency.

b. Provide first aid to injured persons.

c. Evacuate seriously injured persons to hospitals.

d. Ensure safe shut down of the plant.

e. Direct precautionary measures to eliminate propagation of accidents in unaffected areas.

f. Ensure availability of water, power, necessary equipment and materials for tackling emergency.

g. Organize an efficient communication system within the plant and between plant and outside agencies.

h. Regulate movement of emergency services in an out of the plant.

6.3.3.7 Responsibilities of SIC Supervisors

Five SIC supervisors will have the following responsibilities:

S1 - Control of emergency including fire fighting

S2 - Search, rescue and evacuation.

S3 - Communication with Emergency Control Centre.

S4 - Liaison with external emergency services, if required.

S5 - Available for deployment as per the need.

6.3.3.8 Responsibilities of ATC Supervisors

Five Auxiliary Team Controller supervisors will have the following responsibilities:

A1 - First aid to injured personnel.

A2 - Evacuation of seriously injured persons to hospital.

A3 - Ensure safe shut down of the plant and take steps to prevent propagation of accident.

A4 - Ensure availability of critical facilities, equipment and material for tackling emergency.

A5 - Communication within the plant and with outside agencies.

6.3.3.9 Media Coordinator

The Human Resource Manager will work as Media Function. He will under the direction of the SMC, co-ordinate the following:


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

i. To liaise with various media and release written statements to the press through prior concurrence of SMC.

ii. To handle media interviews with various media. Make arrangements for televising the information about the incident, if public interest warrants.

iii. Inform State and Central Governments & statutory bodies of the nature and magnitude of the incident, the number of casualties, etc.

iv. To locate himself such that media personnel/third parties do not need to go past the plant security gates and that adequate communication links exist.

v. Media personnel often insist on visiting the incident scene.

vi. To escort media team(s) if the SMC approves such visits.

6.3.3.10 Communication Function

The IT Manager will work as communication functionary. He will perform the following duties:

i. To ensure all available communication links remain functional.

ii. To quickly establish communication links between incident site and the control room

iii. To ensure that previously agreed inventory of various types of communication equipment is maintained in working condition and frequent checks carried out and records maintained.

iv. To maintain voice record of significant communications with timings received/passed from the primary control room.

6.3.3.11 Medical Function

The OHC Head will look after medical function. He will perform the following:

i. To arrange for the First Aid team to treat the affected personnel.

ii. To arrange for treatment in the hospital.

iii. To liaise with the local medical authorities and hospitals, if the casualties are more and the situation demands treatment at more/other medical centers.

iv. To liaise with the transport coordinator for transporting the victims to various hospitals.

v. To arrange for ambulances.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

vi. The Medical Coordinator should ensure the upkeep of agreed medical supplies, antidotes and equipment that should always be kept in stock for treating victims of burns.

vii. To liaise with the Media coordinator for release of news to the press.

6.3.3.12 Warning System

A high pitch warning siren audible upto 5 km range will be available at proposed TPP for announcing the emergency and giving the all clear signal. SMC will declare the emergency level and plant personnel and, if necessary, public will be notified about the nature of the emergency by using alarm system in the following manner:

Level 1 Emergency – Single beep every five seconds

Level 2 Emergency – Double beep every five seconds

Level 3 Emergency – Continuous wailing of alarm

The alarm system should be suitably coded to also distinguish the nature of emergency, such as, fire and chlorine release.

6.3.3.13 Emergency Plan Initiation

On declaration of emergency, SMC, SIC and ATC will take charge in their respective control rooms and confer with one another about the best way to deal with the emergency. Emergency response personnel will report to their respective control centers and immediately take charge of their duties. It is of paramount importance that the measures to contain and control the accident as well as those for rescue and evacuation are implemented immediately.

6.3.4 Communication System

Communication system is most essential step is to make plant ready for communication at the time of an emergency. Communication system is a crucial factor while handling emergency.

The proposed power plant will have quick and effective communication system through, which, any situation, which can lead to emergency, can be informed to:

i. All working inside the plant.

ii. Key personnel outside during normal working hours & during off-duty hours.

iii. Outside emergency services, statutory and local authorities and

iv. Neighboring facilities and public leaving in vicinity.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Each any every section & department of the proposed power plant will be connected by internal telephones. External phone at office and residence and mobile will be also available with key personnel and top executive of the plant. Hot lines will be provided with mutual aid partner through the Emergency Control Center. Walkie-Talkie sets and Public Address (PA) System network will also be available in the plant.

The communication system begins with raising the alarm declaring the emergency, telephone messages and procedure to communicate the emergency to other persons & general public.

6.3.4.1 Raising Alarm

Manual call points will be spread throughout the proposed power plant. Fire & smoke detectors will been provided at the strategic locations. Chlorine detectors will also provided at strategic locations. Control panel for these detectors and sensors will be provided in Fire Control Room & Emergency Control Room.

As soon as any one breaks the Glass of Manual Call Point or as soon as the Smoke/Heat sensor is activated, it also give the alarm in the Control Panel, which is located in Emergency Control Center. One Repeater Control Panel will also be provided in the Fire Control Room. Location from where the Manual Call Point or Smoke/Heat sensor is activated, will be known from the Panel and accordingly Incident Controller who is always available in the Emergency Control Center will also communicate the location of alarm to the fire station and immediately fire tender will move to the site of emergency to help the Incident Controller. On the basis of the assessment of Incident Controller, information will be given to Fire Control Room to blow the emergency Siren.

6.3.4.2 Declaring Major Emergency

When an emergency situation arises in the plant, it will most probably be first noticed by some worker/operator/technician working in the particular plant area. He will immediately get in touch with shift in charge of the particular area. The shift in charge will assess the situation and initiate immediate action as per Emergency Plan. He will use his discretionary powers to shut down the plant partially or fully if he feels that the emergency situation is serious and can be contained only by shutting down. He will simultaneously get in touch with Site main Controller who is also the declarer of emergency. The Site main Controller will rush to the plant where the event has occurred to assess the situation or will get the complete information (by phone if possible) through the Incident Controller.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

The Site Controller will then assess the nature of emergency as either "Major" or "Minor". The Major emergency is one where the incident is likely to affect more than one department whereas the Minor emergency is likely to be confined within the department. In case the emergency is minor the sounding of the coded siren would be actuated by the site controller himself. In case of Major Emergency, he will declare the Major Emergency through the sounding of the coded siren.

The type of siren to be sounded for Major and Minor emergencies are given in Table 6.3. This will make all the personnel who are present in the plant to become aware about the occurrence. The plant operation personnel will shut down the plant as per their supervisor's instructions. Other non-plant personnel are required to vacate their work-spots as early as possible and move to pre-designated safe places called the assembly points.

Table 6.3: Coded Siren For Emergency Declaration

Nature of Emergency Siren Code

Major Emergency High pitched continuous wailing Siren

Minor Emergency Long siren followed by short Siren

All Clear Signal

(When Emergency is controlled)

Continuous Siren for 5 (Five) minutes

6.3.4.3 Telephone Messages

After hearing the emergency alarm and during emergency or even while just receiving the emergency message on phone, a telephone operator will play an important role. Telephone operator should be precise, sharp, attentive and quick in receiving and noting the message and subsequently effective in further Communication. A form to record emergency telephone calls will be made available with telephone operator or Person available in Emergency Control Center, who will record such calls during emergency.

6.3.4.4 Communication of Emergency

The plant will initiate effective system to communicate emergency:

a) Inside the plant i.e. workers including key personnel and essential workers, on duty & inside during normal working hours.

b) To key personnel and essential workers not on duty and outside during normal working hours.

c) To the outside emergency services and the Government authorities.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

d) To the neighboring plant & the General Public in the vicinity.

a) Inside the Plant to the Workers

Copy of the manual fulfilling the entire statutory requirement will be distributed to each individual.

Frequently training and mock drills will be conducted to make the workers aware about their duties and action to be done during the emergency.

b) To key personnel outside daring normal working hours

As per planning, the key personnel & essential workers will be available in all shifts or on short call. But due to some reason, if some one is outside the plant premises or not on duty and if their help is required, an update list and address of the essential workers and key personnel are available in the Emergency Control Center.

c) To the outside Emergency Services and the Authorities

Once the emergency is declared, it is essential that the outside emergency services should be informed in the shortest possible time.

Responsibilities will be fixed as per the Incident/Emergency Command to contact outside agencies for help and to communicate to the all the Government and other authorities, such as, Fire Brigade, Police, District Emergency Authorities, Factory Inspectorate & Hospitals, etc.

d) To neighboring areas and the General Public

A major emergency will affect areas outside the works and it is essential that neighboring areas and General Public, should be informed to enable them to take prompt action to protect their own employees and to take whatever measures may be possible to prevent further escalation of the emergency due to effects on their own installations, at the same time, they may be able to provide assistance as part of a prearranged mutual aid plan.

Further responsibilities have been fixed to inform the neighboring areas and the General Public leaving in the vicinity.

6.3.4.5 Control of Emergency

The Control of Emergency mainly involves combating the fire/explosion, toxic releases of any hazardous materials spillages/leakages using the various resources available for risk control as per the Emergency Plan. The proper & safer method of handling these hazardous materials is given in MSDS. Also the personnel working in the affected zone should be evacuated and affected persons are to be given immediate First


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Aid/Medical attention. The procedure for performing the above tasks are dealt in detail in the "On-Site Emergency Plan" prepared separately.

6.3.4.6 Control Rooms & Plant Shutdown

The control rooms which will be fully equipped with modem process control instruments and computerized automation systems are the nodal point from where the emergency is controlled. During emergencies it may be necessary to shutdown a part or the full plant as situation demands. The site main controller and the incident controller take decision on these and coordinate the plant shut down activities. The shutdown procedures, both partial and emergency will be prepared in the respective operation manuals and followed during operation.

6.3.4.7 All Clear Signal

As soon as the emergency situation has been brought under control, it is necessary to bring it to the notice of all concerned. This will be done by a coded siren. The coded siren for this would be continuous siren for five minutes. This would indicate that the emergency situation has been brought under control.

6.3.4.8 Action on Plant

6.3.4.9 Co-related Activities

The scope of the On-site Emergency Plan is to prepare and activate the emergency time activities, So that the emergency arises after failure of pre -emergency control measure can be controlled and contained with in the shortest time. Following are the three stage activities which are correlated and provide better points for emergency preparedness, emergency actions and subsequent follow up by the plant.

6.3.4.10 Pre-emergency Activities

The following are the details of pre-emergency activities:

I. Internal Safety Survey (Hazard Identification)

• It will be conducted by a team specially formed to identify various hazards in plant areas.

• Checking of Personnel Protective Equipment's will be done for its workability.

• Checking of various safety installation/facilities available at site will be done for its workability.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

• Checking of fire system, firewater pump, sprinklers & other fire fighting installation/facilities available at site will be done for its workability.

• Suggestions & schemes will be made for the modification or for the extra requirement, to make the existing system more reliable and to keep our self-updated due to latest advance technique or equipment available.

II. Third Party Survey/Audit/Study

The third party (i.e. expert/consultants from outside) safety audit and study will carry out as & when required and further to fulfill statutory obligation, these study/survey or audit will be conducted.

• To study & identify various hazards associated inside the factory.

• To check in-built safety system for its adequacy.

• To suggest modification/additions in the system if necessary.

III. Pressure Vessel and Equipment Testing

• List of the pressure vessels, gas holders and for it's testing along with its testing procedure & frequency will be available.

• Testing of different equipment will be done as per statutory or internal obligations. The records will be prepared & mentioned for reference.

IV. Non-Destructive Testing

• List of the equipment & piping along with its testing procedure & frequency will be available.

• On the basis of the results of Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) reports action plans will be made for replacement/repair of the equipment & pipelines.

• Past records of the equipment, plant & sections will be maintained to compare with the prevent equipment, etc.

V. Safety/Relief Valve or Rupture Disc Testing

• List of the safety/relief valves in plant will be prepared and readily available.

• Periodical schedule for it's testing will be prepared and testing will be done and records will be maintained.

• Action plans will be made and implemented to repair & replacement of faulty or damaged materials.

VI. Fire System Testing


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

• List of nos. of Fire Hydrant, Fire appliances, Fire Pump, Fire Monitors, Fire Alarm System Smoke/Heat Detector System and other Systems or equipments available for firefighting will be available and its periodically testing will be done and records will be maintained.

• Schedule for the testing of all the fire fighting system will be prepared & testing will be done as per schedule and records will be maintained.

• Any defect or defective equipment found during testing will be repaired, replaced or rectified to make the equipment in perfect working condition.

• Fire pump-working pressure, working mode (auto/manual), capacity, etc, will also be checked periodically.

• All the fire fighting equipments/appliances and its stand by will be checked periodically to ascertain its operability test.

VII. Mutual Aid Scheme

• Mutual Aid Scheme will be prepared & agreement will be made with the neighboring industries for getting or extending help to each other in emergency.

• Mutual Aid Co-ordination will be identified & designated.

• To check the complete co-ordination & understanding, mock drills will be conducted regularly.

VIII. Mock Drills

Internal mock drills (on site mock drill) are conducted regularly for training the persons.

The mock drills are conducted periodically to check the performance of the man & equipment and to know the draw back or deficiency in the system for its corrective action.

IX. Training

• Regular training will be organized to train the employees for handling various safety equipments etc, in emergency.

• Regular training will be also conducted to train the fire staff for handling the situation arising out of any major emergency or disaster.

X. Protective Equipment

• Adequate numbers of Personal Protective Equipment will be available and spare stocks will be also kept.

• Employees will be trained to use above PPE'S.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

XI. Communication

• Internal/External communication systems will be mentioned in good working condition.

• Telephones of fire station will be maintained in good working condition.

• Siren and gong bell system will be installed in various location of the plant, which can be operated from one button in fire station.

• Emergency siren tones will be defined to declare emergency and employees will be well conversant with that.

• Wind socks will be installed at prominent locations in the plant area to indicate wind direction.

XII. Emergency Lights

• Emergency lights provided in the control rooms and selected plant areas will be checked and mentioned.

• Sufficient numbers of torches/batteries will be available in the control room.

• Diesel operated power generating set will be maintained in working condition as a stand by in case of failure of normal power supply and supply from in DG set and the same will be checked to keep it in running condition.

XIII. Emergency Control Room

• Main Control Room will be earmarked/identified as the Emergency Control Room.

• Fire Control Room will be earmarked/identified as the alternative Emergency Control Room to be operated in case of unfavorable wind direction.

• Adequate numbers of PPE'S will be kept in both the Emergency Control Rooms.

• Adequate Telecommunication Systems will be available in the Emergency Control Room i.e. hot lines, Intercom walkie-talkies & external phones.

XIV. Plant Assemblies and Assembly Points

• Two nos. of Assembly Points will be identified within the plant, keeping in mind the wind direction.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

• Assembly Points in-charge and its alternative will be nominated to co-ordinate in case of emergency from each Assembly Point.

• Separate phones will be provided at each Assembly Points for better coordination.

• Duties of the Assembly Points in-charge will also be defined & display at all the Assembly Points.

XV. Liaison with State Authorities

Liaison with Civil Authorities, Local Hospitals, Police, Fire Brigade, Gujarat Pollution Control Board (GPCB), and Collector & Factories Directorate will be maintained and any new development etc will be informed to them.

State authorities will be called to witness the Mock Drills conducted at the plant.

XVI. Hospital Facilities

Occupational Health Center will be well-equipped and adequate number of necessary equipments; medicine & antidotes, etc., is maintained.

1. All the employees' Blood Group records are been kept readily available.

2. The doctor will be trained to handle emergency situation and casualties during the time of emergency.

3. Liaison with city hospital & other hospital in the area will be maintained.

4. Lists of blood donor's will be readily available.

XVII. Statutory Information

Statutory information required to be given to Employees, General Public & to the Govt./Statutory authorities will be ensured and distributed.

6.3.5 Emergency Time Activities

Well planned emergency organization will be set up to meet the emergency situation to remove the emergency conditions and to bring the plant to normalcy with the help of the resources available with in and outside the plant and duties/responsibilities of each and individual person will be well defined.

Further availability and correct use of different means of communications and control available, is an important emergency time activities.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

6.3.6 Post- Emergency Activities

Post emergency activities comprise of steps taken after the emergency is over so as to establish the reasons of the emergency and preventive measures.

Following steps will be established to take care of post emergency activities:

• Collection of records.

• Conductive inquiries and preparation of report.

• Conducting preventive measures and suggestions.

• Implementation of recommendation of enquiry reports.

• Rehabilitate the affected persons within the plant and outside the plant.

• To restart the plant.

6.3.7 Off-Site Emergency Plan

6.3.7.1 Need of the Off-Site Emergency Plan

The task of preparing the off-site emergency plan lies with the District Collector, however, the off-site plan will be prepared with the help of the local district authorities. Off-site emergency plan follows the on-site emergency plan. When the consequences of an emergency situation go beyond the plant boundaries, it becomes an off-site emergency. Off-site emergency is essentially the responsibility of the public administration. However, the plant management will provide the public administration with the technical information relating to the nature, quantum and probable consequences on the neighboring population.

The emergency plan will be made after considering the all-possible effects of incidents on the neighboring population and the remedial measures devised in consultation with the local authorities and emergency services.

The off - site emergency plan will be made based on the events, which could affect people and the environment outside the premises. Necessary information on the nature, extent and likely effects of such incidents will be provided. The details of those events, which are identified, are sufficient flexible to take remedial measures in extremely adverse combinations of circumstance & consequences.

The Off-Site Plan is largely a matter of ensuring Co-ordination of existing services and their readiness, as far as possible, for the specific hazards and problems, which may arise in an incident. This means that key


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

personnel have been identified, their duties defined and proper training achieved and Emergency Control Centers exists.

Thus, in brief, the two main purpose of the Off-site Emergency Plan are:

• To provide the Local/District Authorities, Police, Fire Brigade, Doctor’s Surrounding Industries and the public, the basic information of the risk and to appraise them of the consequences and the protection/prevention measures and control plans and to seek their help to communicate with the public in case of major emergency. This information will help the District Authorities to educate the public that what can go wrong, the measures taken by the company and to train them to action to be taken by individual in case of emergency.

• To assist the District Authorities for preparing the Off-Site Emergency (Contingency) Plan for the District or particular area and to organize rehearsals from time to time and initiate corrective actions or update the plans based on the lessons learnt.

6.3.7.2 Legal Authority and Responsibility for Off-Site Emergency Response

Under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 the ‘Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules‘ were promulgated in November, 1989 & amended in 2000 and ‘Rules on Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response for Chemical Accidents’ in 1996.

Under the ‘Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules‘ preparation of ‘Off-site Emergency Plan’ is covered in Rule No.14. The duty of preparing and keeping up to date the ‘Off-site Emergency Plan’ as per this rule is placed on the District Emergency Authority (DEA). Also, occupiers are charged with the responsibility of providing the above authority with such information, relating to the industrial activity under their control, as they may require for preparing the off-site emergency plan.

Under the ‘Rules on Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response for Chemical Accidents’ as gazetted in notification dated 1st August 1996 Central Crisis Group (CCG), State Crisis Group (SCG), District Crisis Group (DCG) and Local Crisis Group (LCG) need to be constituted for management of chemical accidents. The Ministry of Environment and Forests is the nodal Ministry for management of chemical disasters in the country. In order to respond adequately during a major chemical emergency, a coordinated effort at local, District, State and Central levels is needed and all available resources need be mobilized to deal with the crisis in the shortest possible time with least adverse effects. SCG and the DCG


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

have been constituted in every State and at district levels. The LCG will be the body in the industrial pocket to deal with chemical accidents and co-ordinate efforts in planning, preparedness and mitigation of a chemical accident. The Major Accident Hazard (MAH) installations in the industrial pockets will aid, assist and facilitate functioning of the LCG. As per the rules, the functions of the LCG are detailed below:

• Prepare local emergency plan for the industrial pocket.

• Ensure dovetailing of the local emergency plan with the district off-site emergency plan.

• Train personnel involved, in chemical accident management.

• Educate the population, likely to be affected in a chemical accident, about the remedies and existing preparedness in the area.

• Conduct at least one full-scale mock drill every six months and forward a report to the DCG.

• Respond to all public inquiries on the subject.

6.3.7.3 Role of Plant Management

The On-site and Off-site plans are dovetail so that the emergency services are summoned at the appropriate time and are provided with accurate information and a correct assessment of the situation. The responsibility for this is with the Site Main Controller.

The Site Main Controller will provide a copy of On-Site and Off-Site Emergency Plan to the District authorities, the Factories Inspectorate and the Emergency Services, so that on the basis of information in the plan, such authorities can make their emergency preparedness plan to formulate and execute the District / Area Off Site Emergency Plan. Further, on the advice of the authorities,

6.3.7.4 Role of Emergency Co-Ordination Officer

The various emergency services will be co-ordinated by the Emergency Co-ordination officer (ECO), who is likely to be a Collector. The ECO will liaise closely with the Site Main Controller.

The Emergency Control Centre of the plant can be utilized by the ECO to keep liaison with the Site Main Controller.

6.3.7.5 Role of the Local Authorities

Generally, the duty to prepare the Off-Site Plan lies with the local authorities. They may have to appoint an Emergency Planning Officer


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

(EPO) to carryout this duty, as part of the EPO's role in preparing for a whole range of different emergencies with is the local authority area. The EPO will need to liaise with the works to obtain the information to provide the basis for the plan. This liaison will need to be maintained to ensure that the plan is continually kept up to date.

EPO will ensure that all those organizations, which will be involved for the Off-site in handling the emergency, know their role and are able to accept it by having sufficient staff and appropriate equipments.

Rehearsals for Off-site plan are important and EPO will organize rehearsals.

It will be the duty of the local authority to inform public, rail/road traffic, and news media etc. while operating Off-Site Plan. They will also announce public protection measures, termination of emergency and subsequent public precautions.

6.3.7.6 Role of Fire Authorities

The control of fire is normally the responsibility of the Senior Fire Brigade Officer who would take over the handling of the fire fighting operation from the Incident Controller on arrival at site. They should have familiarized themselves with the location of the site, water and other fire fighting equipments. They may also be involved in On-Site Emergency Rehearsals as participants or as an observer.

6.3.7.7 Role of the Police & Evacuation Authorities

The police normally assume the overall control of an emergency, with a senior officer designated as Emergency Coordinating Officer. Formal duties of the Police during an emergency include protecting life and property and controlling traffic movements. Their functions include controlling and evacuating the public, identifying the dead and deal with casualties and informing relatives of dead or injured.

For evacuation, an early decision will be required in many cases and the advice to be given to people living 'within range’ of the accident, in particular whether they should be evacuated to safe place or told to go indoors. In the latter case, the decision can regularly be reviewed in the event of an escalation of the incident. For evacuation following factors are to be considered:

a. In the case of a release of toxic gas, likely to need evacuation.

b. If a fire is escalating. It might be necessary to evacuate people nearby, but only if there is time; if sufficient time exists, people should be


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

advised to stay away and shield them selves from the fire. This latter case particularly applies if the installation at risk could produce a fireball with very severe thermal radiation effects.

c. For release or potential release of toxic materials, limited evacuation may be appropriate in down wind if there is time. The decision would depend partly on the type of housing at risk.

The major difference between releases of toxic and flammable materials is that toxic clouds are generally hazardous down to much lower concentrations, and therefore, hazardous over greater distances. Also, a toxic cloud drifting covers a large area of land very quickly. Any consideration of evacuation must take this into account.

The shelters for evacuated persons and their welfare shall also be arranged.

6.3.7.8 Role of Health Authorities

Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals and ambulances have a vital part to play following a major accident, and they should form an integral part of any emergency plan.

In case of major fires, injuries will be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a varying degree and the knowledge and experience to handle this type of injuries cases may be generally available in most of the hospitals

Major off-site incidents are likely to require medical equipment and facilities additional to those available locally and a medical 'mutual aid' scheme should exist to enable the assistance of neighbouring authorities to be obtained in the event of an emergency.

6.3.7.9 Role of the "Mutual Aid" Agencies

Various type of mutual aid available from the surrounding factories and other agencies will also be utilized as per need, as a part of the off-site and on-site emergency plan.

6.3.7.10 Role of the Factory Directorate

The Factory Inspectors are likely to want to satisfy themselves that the plant responsible for producing the On/off site plan has made adequate arrangements for handling emergencies of all types, including major emergencies. They may wish to see well-documented procedures and evidence of exercises undertaken to test the plan. In the event of an


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

accident, the Factory Inspector will assist the District Emergency Authority for information and help in getting mutual aid from surrounding factories.

They may wish to ensure that the affected areas are rehabilitated safely. In addition, they may require items of plant and equipment essential for any subsequent investigation to be impounded for expert analysis and may also want to interview witness as soon as practicable.

6.3.7.11 Role of Telephone Department

The communication system between the plant and the various above role-playing authorities must be effective. The ineffective public telephone system will not be useful in emergency. Therefore, telephone department should maintain the telephones and if required temporary telephone connection may be provided to various above authorities to deal the emergency.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 210 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 7: Benefits of the Project Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

CHAPTER – 7

BENEFITS OF THE PROJECT 7.1 Need of the Project

India is world's 6th largest energy consumer, accounting for 3.4% of global energy consumption. Due to economic rise the electricity demand for energy has grown at an average of 3.6% over the last 30 years. The overall electrification rate in India is 64.5% while 35.5% of the population still lives without access to electricity.

Socio-economic development (GPD Growth) of the country directly depends upon availability of electricity, reliable and of good quality. India has set a target of providing electricity access to all households in next five years and provide availability of over 1000 units of per capita electricity by year 2012. In order to fully meet both energy and peak demand by 2012, there is a need to create adequate reserve capacity margin.

India is currently facing an energy deficit. Some of the states which experience higher level of shortage are presented below.

Table 7.1: Energy Demand and Shortage April 2008 to January 2009

Energy Shortage

Peak Demand Shortage State

(%) (%) (Mw)

Gujarat 11.4 25.5 3024

Maharashtra 21.2 25.9 4674

Madhya Pradesh 16.0 10.0 754

Uttar Pradesh 20.9 22.3 2365

Punjab 10.7 15.9 1381

Source: CEA

Even with full development of the feasible hydro potential in the country; coal would continue to remain the primary fuel for meeting future electricity demand. The Government of India and Planning Commission encourages imported coal based thermal power stations, particularly at coastal locations, because of their economic viability as well as recognizing the fact that availability of Indian coal is very limited and would last for next 100 years. Besides above the existing railway infrastructure is already strained,


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

and is incapacble of additional coal transportation through various states that are remotely located from the coal mines.

7.2 General Benefits

The benefits envisaged from the projects are as below

The proposed Thermal Power Plant will generate 1320 MW energy, which will help to bridge the demand-supply gap of electricity.

The project location would grow into major load centre within a decade this would dirve indirect socio-economic benefits to local people.

Use of imported coal by sea route would reduce the inland transportation burden besides conserve the indigenous coal reserves

The Super Critical technology achieve 3-4 % more efficiency than sub critical units. It can be operated on constant pressure at base load and at lower pressure during part load conditions. This result in better efficiency and lower fuel consumption.

Unit can be operated at sliding pressure at lower loads which provides better efficiency and lower BF pump power consumption at lower loads

7.3 Social Benefits

The project is expected to create about 400 direct jobs and 500 indirect job opportunity in the area.

There is a sizeable number of unemployed youth looking for employment opportunities in the villages. Many of them are not keen to work on their farms, either because of low holding or because of low agriculture productivity. The project will provide job opportunity to the people in the area. The families of Project affected villages will be also given preference for the jobs under the project.

Training will be provided to youths for either employment in the project or get self-employment opportunity in locally emerging service sectors.

The fishermen will be provided necessary financial and technical support for developing required infrastructure and linking their produce to market through cold chain

Women welfare programs will be carried out. They will be motivated to form their Self Help Groups (SHGs). Under the SHG income generating activities will be promoted. This will help in upliftment of the financial and living condition of the women.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Basic infrastructure facilities and amenities in the form of Village Roads, Street lighting, Potable Drinking Water Supply, Soak Pit Latrines and common Public Conveniences, Primary and Secondary Health Centers, Primary and Secondary Schools/Colleges, Telecommunication facilities will get further developed.

Promotion of Animal Husbandry including poultry farming and aquaculture program in the form pisciculture, and prawn breeding centers will provide better nutritional diet to the people (especially children) and help to built a healthy society.

7.4 Technological Benefits

Super Critical technologies of the thermal power plant ensures lower coal consumption, lower green house gas emission and higher efficiency. Hence this project qualifies for carbon credits under Clean Development Mechanism.

Emission of comparatively lower CO2, SO2 and NOx due to lower coal consumption for equivalent amount of power generation.

Ash Generation is lower because of use of low ash imported coal. Large scale plantation of trees will attract the avifauna and improve

the ecology of the area. Plantation of mangroves by SPEGCL along the coast line will

improve the primary productivity of the area, which inturn will attract more migratory avifauna in the area.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 213 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 8: Environmental Management Plan Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

CHAPTER – 8

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

8.1 Introduction

Environmental Management Plan comprising actions to be taken during construction and operation stages of the proposed power plant are as follows.

8.2 Managing Impacts during Construction Stage

The impacts of the construction stage on the environment would be basically of transient nature and are expected to wear out gradually on completion of the construction programme. However, once constructions of various units are completed and operations start, the operation stage impacts would overlap the impacts due to construction activities.

The impacts on different aspects of environment due to the construction programme have been elucidated in earlier Chapter. In order to mitigate such impacts and restrict them within tolerable levels, the following measures should be adopted.

i) Designation and demarcation of sites for construction camps and ensuring provision of necessary infrastructural services.

ii) Implementation of necessary drainage facilities, inclusive of catch pits or sedimentation basins for the drainage of construction wastewater, prior to discharge using water tankers.

iii) Regular sprinkling of water around vulnerable areas of the construction sites or through installation of water sprinklers or any other suitable methods, to control fugitive dust.

iv) Initiation of an extensive plantation and vegetation cover in the vacant areas of the plant. This would serve the dual purpose of controlling fugitive dust and abatement of noise levels in addition to improving the aesthetic view of the area.

v) Provision of adequate Personnel Protection Equipment (PPEs) to the workers.

vi) Regular Health checkups of the construction workers

vii) Adequate measures to prevent contact with electrical equipment, apparatus, machine, or live electrical conductor before starting any work.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

viii) Display and maintainance of warning signs boards in Gujarati, Hindi and English language at conspicuous places.

ix) Wiring, which may come in contact with water or may be mechanically damaged, should not be left on the ground or floor at work.

x) All electrical appliances and current carrying equipment used at work should be made of sound material and shall be properly and adequately earthed.

xi) All temporary electrical installation should be provided with Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB).

xii) Ensure that all electrical installations comply with the prevailing electrical law.

xiii) Other areas where material can fall needs to be cordoned off. Inadvertent entry should be guarded.

xiv) Adeqaute illumination for all passageways, stairways, landing etc. should be provided

xv) Ensure that :

– Suitable barricading, warning signs are provided for protecting from traffic, and lights are displayed

– All vehicles used at site should comply with the Motor Vehicle Act, 1988.

– All vehicle drivers should possess a valid driving license under the Motor Vehicle Act, 1988

xvi) Suitable eye protection shall be provided for the workers and used by workers engaged in welding, cutting, chipping, grinding and other similar operations.

xvii) Suitable arrangement for crèches for children below 6years to be made if more than 50 female workers are employed.

xviii) Construction workers shall be provided PPEs such as helmets, safety shoes, gumboots, nose masks, ear muffs, safety goggles, life jackets.

xix) Make necessary arrangements with the nearest clinics to handle emergency situation.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

xx) Prepare an emergency preparedness plan in association with the Safety Department and ensure awareness among all construction workers.

xxi) A safety officer shall be deployed at site along with a team comprising engineers, workers, management representative.

xxii) Adopt the good housekeeping practices at construction sites/yards. Some of the practices are listed below:

– Construction sites shall be kept free of clutter and debris. – Limited quantity of material shall be stored at construction sites – Place trash and debris in the proper receptacles located conveniently

throughout the job site. – Remove combustible materials such as wood and paper from the site

promptly. – Keep form and scrap lumber with protruding nails cleared away from

work areas, passageways – Remove or bend over protruding nails prior to disposal and storage. – Keep storage, staging, and work areas, along with walkways on the

construction site, free of obstructions and debris. – Store tools and materials neatly and out of the way in storage bins or

lockers and keep flammable or hazardous wastes, if any, in covered, segregated waste containers.

– Disposal of debris and loose materials to identified sites. – Place protective guards across areas where workers may could fall or

could face an impalement hazard. – Construction sites shall be kept free of water logging or stagnation of

water – Construction sites shall be suitably and sufficiently fenced off and

provided with controlled access points to prevent the entry of unauthorized persons.

– First aid box and fire fighting equipments shall be provided at construction yard.

– Proper drinking and sanitation facilities shall be provided by the contractor at construction site/yard.

Various mitigation measures proposed to be implemented during construction stage are described in Table 8.1.

Project: EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 216 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 8 : Environmental Management Plan Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 8.1: Mitigation measures proposed to be implemented during Construction stage

Mitigation measures proposed Targets to achieve Risk and consequence of failure, if any

Responsibility for implementation

Air Pollution Control

Water sprinkling in vulnerable areas Control of fugitive dust from construction areas

Increase in SPM emissions SPEGPL & Contractor

Proper maintenance of vehicles & construction equipment

Control of NOx emission Increase in gaseous pollutant SPEGPL & Contractor

Transportation of construction material in covered trucks, wherever

possible

Control of fugitive dust during transportation

Increase in SPM emissions SPEGPL & Contractor

Noise Pollution Control

Proper maintenance of vehicles, equipment and machinery

Control of ambient and in- plant noise levels

Increase in noise levels Contractor

Provision of acoustic enclosures on equipment and machinery, wherever

possible.

Control of ambient and in- plant noise levels

Increase in noise levels Contractor

Provision of earmuffs/ earplugs to the workers in high noise areas and

enforcement of its use

Protection of workers Health effect on individual workers

Contractor

Water Pollution Control


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 8.1: Mitigation measures proposed to be implemented during Construction stage



Channelisation and Costruction of temporary sedimentation tanks for effluents from construction area

through network of drains

Control of suspended solids in effluents from construction area

Increase in total suspended solids (TSS) in effluents

SPEGPL & Contractor

Socio-Economic

Provision of environmentally safe camping area for the migrant

laborers

To provide clean & healthy living environment to workforce

Unhealthy living conditions spread of diseases

SPEGPL & Contractor

Arrangements for water supply and sanitation

To reduce stress on surrounding population

Stress on existing utilities, conflicts with local people

SPEGPL & Contractor

Solid Waste Management

Disposal of surplus earth and construction debris

Control of pollution Air/ Water pollution Contractor

Reclaiming of unbuilt area with appropriate vegetation/ landscaping

Create a good visual environment

Unpleasant surroundings SPEGPL


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

8.3 Sources of Pollution during Operation Stage

The main sources of air pollution, water pollution and solid wastes from the proposed thermal power project would be:

A. Coal Handling and storage areas:

- Fugitive dust emission

- Effluent due to dust suppression

- Storm water runoff containing coal particles

B. Furnaces:

- Flue gases containing Particulate Matter, SO2 and NOx

- Bottom ash and Fly ash

C. Cooling System:

- Hot water discharge

D. Turbine-Generator:

- Service water effluent containing suspended solids and oil & grease

E. Fuel oil handling and storage:

- Waste containing oil

F. Ash Disposal System:

- Ash dump yard effluent

- Ash leachate

- Fugitive dust emissions

G. Effluent Treatment Plant:

- ETP waste

H. Domestic water use:

- Domestic sewage

I. Water Treatment Plant:

- Regeneration waste

J. D M Plant area

- D M Plant waste


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

8.4 Proposed Pollution Control system during Operation Stage

The following environmental protection or pollution control systems have been proposed to be installed for the project.

A. Air Pollution Control

1. One twin flue 275 m tall stack

2. Space provision for FGD (Flue Gas Desulphurisation ) system

3. High Efficiency ESPs (Electrostatic Precipitators) to limit particulate emission to 50 mg/Nm3

4. Dust suppression and extraction system at CHP (Coal Handling Plant) area to control fugitive emission

5. Greenbelt of 100 m width around the plant site and extensive plantation in all available spaces.

B. Water Pollution Control

1. Cooling Towers to cool down the recirculating cooling water.

2. Neutralisation pit for pH adjustment of the DM plant regeneration waste.

3. Effluent treatment plant to treat the effluent to the specified standards of discharge.

4. Sewage treatment plant to treat the domestic sewage generated from the township and plant area.

5. Oil & grease separators for removal of oil from effluents in oil handling areas.

6. Recirculation of ash water in the system.

7. Sludge treatment and disposal system.

C. Solid Waste Disposal

1. Disposal of bottom ash as slurry disposal system to the ash dump yard and fly ash to fly ash silo.

Various mitigation measures proposed to be implemented during operation stage are described in Table 8.2.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 8.2: Mitigation measures proposed to be implemented during operation stage



Air Pollution Control High Efficiency ESPs To reduce the emission levels of SPM

to 50 mg/Nm3 Increase in SPM emissions SPEGPL

275 m tall stack Wider dispersion of SPM, SO2 and NOx

Increase in GLC of pollutants SPEGPL

Dust suppression and extraction system

Control of fugitive dust from coal handling plant

Increase in fugitive emissions SPEGPL

Water cover on ash dump yard/ sprinklers over slurry areas

Control of fugitive dust Increase in fugitive emissions SPEGPL

Noise Pollution Control Design & selection of low noise equipment

To control noise levels to 90 dB (A) at 1 m distance

Increase in in-plant and ambient noise level

SPEGPL

Provision of acoustic enclosures/ barriers to reduce noise

Attenuation of noise in source receptor pathway

Increase in in-plant and ambient noise level

SPEGPL

Provision of personal protective equipments like ear plugs and ear muffs

Protection of sensitive receptors High impact on workers in high noise areas

SPEGPL

Water Pollution Control Cooling Towers Cooling of hot water coming out of

condenser and auxiliary cooling systems for recycle

Increase in temperature of water coming out of cooling systems

SPEGPL

Effluent Treatment Plant including Central Monitoring Basin

Removal of suspended solids, oil & grease and neutralization of pH to

conform to regulatory standards for discharge of effluents

Change in concentration/ value and increase in TSS

SPEGPL

Ash water treatment and recycle Removal of suspended solids for recycle of effluents into ash water

system

Increase in quantity of ash pond overflow

SPEGPL


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 8.2: Mitigation measures proposed to be implemented during operation stage



Sewage Treatment Plant Removal of suspended solids, oil & grease and organic matter to conform to regulatory standards for discharge

of effluents

Increase in concentration of pollutants

SPEGPL

Solid Waste Management Dry collection of fly ash and supply of ash to entrepreneurs

Facilitate to supply of dry ash to entrepreneurs

Reduction in quantity of ash utilised

SPEGPL & other entrepreneurs

Ash Utilisation Reduce land requirement for ash disposal and pollution from ash

disposal site

Increased land requirement SPEGPL & other entrepreneurs

Domestic Solid waste Environmentally safe disposal of domestic waste

Air and water pollutants spread of vector born diseases

SPEGPL

Others Afforestation and 100m Green Belt Development

Ecological improvement. Attenuation of air pollutants (SPM, SO2 and NOx) and noise in source

receptor pathway

Reduction in aesthetics and living space. Higher pollutants in the

ambient air.

SPEGPL

Control of Fire and Explosion Hazards

Safety Increased risk on fire and explosion

SPEGPL


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

8.4.1 Stacks

One twin flue concrete stack would be provided for 2x660 MW units. Each flue would serve one 660 MW unit. A stack height of 275 m would be required to fulfill the requirement of emission regulation. This would ensure wider dispersal of pollutants resulting in low ground level concentration of pollutants.

8.4.2 Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP)

The high efficiency electrostatic precipitator (ESP) would have two parallel passes. One of the two passes can be isolated for maintenance as and when required, keeping the other pass in operation. Each pass would have adequate number of fields in series for collection of fly ash. The overall efficiency of ESP should not be less than 99.94%. The ESP would have adequate number of ash hoppers provided with electric heaters. The ESP would be provided to limit the outlet SPM emission to 50 mg/Nm3 at 100% BMCR with worst coal firing and one ESP field out of service.

8.4.3 Flue Gas Desulphurisation (FGD)

With the available details of sulphur content (0.7%) in coal about 994 g/m3 of SO2 would be let off from the unit. The ground level concentration would be within the limiting values set by MoEF. However, adequate space provision has been kept for installing FGD (in future).

8.4.4 Coal Handling System

Imported coal would be unloaded from ship from port and would be transported through twin stream pipe conveyor to the plant. Special precaution would be taken for pollution control by providing dust extraction and spray type dust suppression arrangements in different transfer points and stockpile areas to contain dust under adverse wind condition. Ventilation system would be provided for the underground tunnels, transfer points and at bunker level.

8.4.5 Cooling System

Recirculating Condenser Cooling Water system using Natural Draft type Cooling Tower would be considered for the power station. The Cooling Towers would have multiple cells with film type fill material. The Cooling Towers would operate on clarified sea water and would be made of corrosion resistant material. For auxiliary cooling, a closed loop cooling system using demineralised water would be adopted which would be cooled by sea water through cooling towers. For the cooling tower make-up, sea water would be supplied from the intake. The high efficiency drift


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

eliminators would be used in the cooling towers to reduce the quantity of the sea water drift.

8.4.6 D M Plant Regeneration Waste

The demineralising process would generate alternately acidic and basic effluents after regeneration of such type of exchangers. A neutralising pit would be provided for proper neutralizing (pH adjustment using acid or alkali) of the effluent fluids and the neutralized effluent water would be discharged into the drainage system.

8.4.7 Guard Pond

A guard pond would have been considered to monitor the quantity of the effluents where all liquid effluents would be collected. The quality would be regularly monitored in compliance to the regulatory authority prior to reuse for green belt, dust suppression, fly ash conditioning, etc.

8.4.8 Sewage Treatment

The sanitary wastes emanating from the plant and the colony would be high in its organic strength. Such wastes would be adequately treated in a biological treatment plant to remove its BOD content to less than the stipulated limits, applicable for discharge.

8.5 Ash Handling System

8.5.1 Bottom Ash Handling System

Bottom ash would be collected in water impounded hopper under each boiler provided with feed gates. The bottom ash would be removed continuously through scraper chain conveyor/belt conveyor to storage bin. The clinkers would be ground in clinkers grinders. The bins would have dewatering facility where excess water would be removed, treated in settling tanks and then sent to the system via surge tanks. Dewatered bottom ash would be taken to the ash slurry pump house and along with fly ash, to the ash dump yard.

8.5.2 Fly Ash Handling System

Fly ash would be separated from the flue gas and would be collected in air heater hoppers, economizer hoppers and electrostatic precipitator hoppers. A complete pneumatic pressure conveying system would be envisaged. The system would be provided with heaters, fluidizing air blowers, conveying air blowers/compressors, feed vessels etc for extraction of fly ash from hoppers and conveyance through pipeline. The pressurized conveying system would deliver the fly ash to fly ash silo. Ash from intermediate hoppers would be conveyed to fly ash silo for taking out


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

separately for further use. Ash from the fly ash silo would be disposed in dry form in closed tankers or covered trucks with necessary water sprinklers.

8.5.3 Ash Slurry Disposal System

Bottom ash would be disposed to the ash dump yard. Also the fly ash from the silo would be disposed through slurry disposal system to the ash dump yard, whenever required. A dump height of about 6 m has been considered in the ash dump yard.

8.5.4 Ash Utilization

The proposed power plant would generate ash on an average about 90 Tonnes/ hr of which 20% would be bottom ash and the balance quantity would be fly ash. Provision has been kept to collect fly ash directly from the ash silos for commercial use or the same can be dumped in the ash dump yard. The bottom ash would be conveyed to the de-watering bins and then would be sent to the ash dump area through ash slurry system along with fly ash. The use of bottom ash has been illustrated in the latter section.

Fly ash, being a product of high temperature, has pozzolonic property and forms cementous material when mixed with lime and water. These properties of fly ash seem to make it suitable for the following uses:

- Building blocks

- Light weight aggregates

- Partial cement replacement

- Road sub-base

- Grouting material

- Filler in asphalt mix for roads

- Partial replacement of lime aggregate in concrete work

- Road embankment

- Land filling material

- Recovery of minerals namely aluminium and iron

A market survey for ash utilization carried out for the thermal power project at Kodinar in Gujarat is illustrated below to achieve the targets of Ash Utilisation as per MoEF Gazette Notification of 3rd November 2009. Detailed Survey Report of ash utilization has been submitted separately.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

8.5.5 Objectives of the study

• To assess area wise ash utilization potential in and around the proposed Thermal Power Station (TPS) so as to achieve 100% ash utilization in line with MoEF, Gazette Notification of November 2009.

• To project year wise financial implications (both capital & operating expenses) involved and actions & strategies required to be taken by SPEGPL for achieving 100% ash utilization.

• To assess the impact of coal based TPS generating ash on the ash utilization potential from the proposed TPS.

8.5.6 Study Zones for Market Survey

The study zones comprise of 100 km radius from the proposed TPS for entire market survey ( Study Zone I) comprising of Junagadh district and 300 km radius for collecting details on major cement plants (Study Zone II) comprising of districts of Junagarh and Amreli in Gujarat.

8.5.7 Methodology adopted for the Market Survey

The methodology adopted for carrying out the Market Survey includes the following:

• Desk Research

• Internet Search

• Mail Survey

• Exhaustive field survey in Study Zones I & II with the aid of pre-designed structured questionnaires for each segment

• Compilation of field data and preparation of Report for ash utilization in line with the MoEF, Gazette Notification of November 2009.

8.5.8 Major Field survey findings and basis for demand projections for dry fly ash and bottom ash

Cement Sector

i) The field survey indicates that there are four large capacity Cement Plants producing PPC and OPC located within 300 km radius of proposed TPS in Junagarh and Amreli districts of Gujrat State with a total combined installed capacity of 136 Lakh TPA.

ii) The existing PPC manufacturers are utilizing upto 35% of dry fly ash(DFA) by weight as permitted by BIS-1489 Standard.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

iii) The existing PPC manufacturers do not have any immediate plans for capacity expansions.

iv) Two new cement manufacturing plants (Braj Binani cement plant in Sutrapada Taluka of Junagadh District - production capacity of 25 Lakh TPA and Heidelberg Cement India Ltd for new cement plant in Jafrabad Taluka in Amreli district - production capacity 20 Lakh TPA) with a total installed capacity of about 45 Lakh TPA are being installed to produce PPC within a radius of 300km from proposed TPS.

v) Major feedback from cement manufacturers and basis for demand projections

• The demand for cement and its production by these cement units would increase by at least 7.5% per annum from 2015-16 till 2023-24.

• Availability of abundant quantity of Lime stone & Gypsum in the vicinity of proposed TPS is an additional advantage for setting up more new cement plants in the region.

• It is revealed from the discussions of Ambuja Cement Ltd & Gujarat Sidhee Cement Ltd at Junagadh that the total PPC production in the year 2014-15 would be around 57 Lakh Tonnes and the corresponding DFA requirement would be around 17.1 Lakh Tonnes.

• The discussions with the officials of Ultratech Cement Plants located at Rajula and Jafrabad, Amreli District (located 90-110km from proposed TPS) indicate that PPC production by these units in the year 2014-15 would be around 62 Lakh Tonnes with corresponding DFA requirement of about 18.60 Lakh Tonnes.

• Although all cement plants including the ones in operation and those under implementation have indicated their desire to procure 100% of their DFA requirement from upcoming TPS for demand projections, only 60% of their DFA requirement for cement plants at Junagarh and 50% for cement plants at Amreli have been considered considering the factors that new coal based TPS might be announced in future.

vi) Availability of Lime stone & Gypsum and possibility of setting up cement plants (Clinkerization & Grinding Units) for production of PPC based on FA of TPS.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

There are substantial reserves of both limestone and Gypsum in Junagadh and Amreli, the two key raw materials required for cement manufacture and falling within 150 km radius of upcoming TPS. There is a huge potential for setting up cement plants in this region. The FA of TPS would easily be utilized by existing cement manufacturers hence there is no immediate need for SPEGPL to set up a cement unit in order to utilize FA produced at its TPS.

vii) Export of Fine Quality Fly ash from TPS

The demand for fine quality DFA is enormous in Bangladesh and Middle East (approx 190 Lakh Tonnes in year 2014-15). Since SPEGPL-TPS is located approx 5.2 km distance from upcoming Charra port, the exports would be economical & viable. Even if SPEGPL is able to tap 2% of this Export Demand for FA this translates to an export potential for DFA produced at SPEGPL-TPS of about 4 Lakh TPA.

Roads & Highways Construction Projects

National Highways

There are 2 laned two existing National Highways (NH-8D Veraval-Junagadh) and NH-8E (Kodinar to Una) (about 90 km length) that fall within 100km radius of proposed TPS. The four laning and six laning of NH -8D and NH-8E may be undertaken during the XII th five year plan (2012-13 till 2016-17).It is anticipated that the demand potential for PA by this sector within 50 km radius of TPS would be around 0.25 lakh TPA.

State Highways & Urban Roads

As per the information provided by the Gujarat State PWD, total length of roads under Public Works Department (PWD) within 100 km radius of proposed TPS is about 1908 km. Average road length being constructed within 50 km radius of TPS in Kodinar Taluka of Junagadh district, where the potential of PA utilization from TPS would be maximum and feasible is approx 70 km per year based on current trends. Approx consumption of PA per km road length for embankment construction would be 7500 tonnes.

Based on the discussions with PWD officials based at Junagadh it is estimated that in the year 2014-15, about 5% of the state highways being constructed could utilize PA in embankment construction and percentage would increase by 2.5% per annum thereafter due to MoEF Gazette notification requirement and provided TPS bears the ash transportation cost.

Rural Roads under PMGSY


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Approximately 75 km per year of rural road length is being added in Junagadh district in the vicinity of TPS. The potential of PA utilization would be maximum and feasible. It is anticipated that in the year 2014-15, about 5% of the PMGSY rural roads being constructed in vicinity of SPEGPL would utilize PA in embankment construction and the percentage would increase by 2.5% per annum thereafter.

Hydro Power Projects

As per the Gujarat State Electricity Corporation Limited and based on the field survey of the region it was observed that no major hydro power project is under implementation or planned in near future. Hence the potential for utilization of FA by this sector appears to be negligible.

Mining Sector

There is no underground or opencast coal mines within a distance of 50 km from TPS. Lime stone mines exist in Kodinar block of Junagadh district. Ambuja Cement Ltd is engaged in mining of Lime Stone in Kodinar and the possibility of stowing of BA/PA in these lime stone mines is remote as the lime stone mines are in operational mines.

Low lying areas filling

About 2.15 Lac Cum of low lying area falls within a radius of 20 km from proposed TPS primarily in Kodinar Taluka of Junagadh district and possibility of procurement of PA from TPS by the users located in this region would be maximum due to low transportation cost. Based on the trends available w.r.t land filling in the region, it is estimated that in the year 2014 -15, about 2 lakh Cum voids would be available for filling.

Waste land development

The total wasteland within 20 Km radius of proposed TPS is about 1155 hectares in Kodinar Taluka of Junagadh district mainly owned by Rural Zila Panchayat and farmers, where ash can be used for improving the quality of soil.

Agriculture and Horticulture

The total agricultural and horticultural land in the vicinity (20 Km radius) of TPS in Kodinar Taluka of Junagadh district where potential of PA utilization would be maximum is about 20548 hectares and 5000 hectares respectively.

The farmers in the region have shown interest in utilization of pond ash to enhance crop yields. On an average by providing a dosage of about 50 Tonnes of ash per hectare per four alternate years, the crop yield increases


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

by about 25-30 percent. In addition, PA has similar physio-chemical properties as compared to soil and enhances soil properties like fertility, water -holding capacity etc.

Major existing /future coal based power plants within 100 km radius from SPEGPL-TPS and impact on ash utilization

The detailed survey of the region within 100 km radius of SPEGPL -TPS and information/details obtained from various other sources such as literature and internet search, Ministry of Power (MoP) indicates that at present there is no coal based power station and no new coal based power projects have been planned by any company within a radius of 100 km from proposed SPEGPL -TPS. Thus no other coal based power station would affect the ash utilization potential/avenues from the proposed SPEGPL -TPS at present or in future.

Estimated revenue generation from sale of fly ash to cement manufacturers and expenditure to be incurred by SPEGPL-TPS in transportation of bottom/pond ash to end-users within 20 km radius

• The Revenue generation from sale of Fly Ash from proposed SPEGPL -TPS over the period 2014-15 to 2023-24 is provided in the Detailed Market Survey Report. The selling price of DFA has been considered @ Rs. 100/ Tonne in the year 2014-15, projected to increase @ 10% p.a. thereafter. It is estimated that over a period of 10 years, cumulative revenue of Rs 6938 Lakhs would be generated.

• The Expenditure to be incurred in Handling & Transportation of BA/PA to end users located within 20 Km radius of SPEPL -TPS, over the period 2014-15 to 2023-24 is provided in the Detailed Market Survey Report. BA/PA handling and transportation cost within 20 km radius of SPEPL -TPS has been considered @ Rs. 200/ Tonne in the year 2014-15, projected to increase @5% p.a. thereafter. It is estimated that over a period of 10 Years, a cumulative expenditure of Rs.2715 Lakhs would have to be incurred under this activity. In addition expenditure would also have to be incurred for ash utilization promotional activities over 2013-14 to 2023-24 period of Rs. 370 Lakhs. Thus the total expenditure for these activities amounts to around Rs. 3085 Lakhs.

• It is envisaged that SPEGPL -TPS would easily be able to meet the entire cost for BA/PA transportation to the end-users site located within 20 km radius out of the revenue to be generated from sale of DFA to Cement manufacturers.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

8.6 Greenbelt Development for the Project

Greenbelts are an effective mode of control of air pollution, where green plants form a surface capable of absorbing air pollutants and forming a sink of pollutants. Leaves with their vast area in a tree crown, sorbs pollutants on their surface, thus effectively reduce pollutant concentration in the ambient air. Often the adsorbed pollutants are incorporated in the metabolic pathway and the air is purified. Plants grown to function as pollution sink are collectively referred as greenbelts.

An important aspect of a greenbelt is that the plants are living organism with their varied tolerance limit towards the air pollutants. A green belt is effective as a pollutant sink only within the tolerance limit of constituent plants. Planting few, known pollutant sensitive species along with the tolerant species within a green belt however, do carry out an important function of indicator species Apart from function as pollution sink, greenbelt would provide other benefit like aesthetic improvement of the area and providing suitable habitats for birds and animals

Green Belt trees constituting of Pollution tolerant/ Fly ash Tolerant and dust capturing plant species will be developed since plants can act as efficient biological filters; removing significant amounts of particulate pollution from atmospheres. Character of plants considered for affecting absorption of pollutant gases and removal of dust particle are as follows

For absorption of Gases

1) Tolerance towards pollutants

2) Longer duration of foliage

3) Freely exposed foliage

4) Adequate height of crown

5) Openness of foliage in canopy

6) Big leaves( long and broad laminar surface)

7) Large number of stomatal apertures

For Removal of Suspended Particular matter

1. Height and spread of crown.

2. Leaves supported on firm petiole

3. Abundance of surface on bark and foliage

4. Roughness of bark

5. Abundance of axillary hairs


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

6. Hairs or scales on laminar surface

7. Protected Stomata

Plantation around Project Site

An area of 132.05 ha will be dedicated for green belt development out of total 344 ha area of the project. A green belt of 100 m width has been planned all around the project except the switchyard area. The plantation will be done in 25 parallel linear lines running along the periphery of the plant area. 2500 plants will be planted per ha and along roads 250 plants will be planted on both sides per km. At least 75% survival of the plantation will be maintained. Specifications for tree plantation are given in Table 8.3.

The Plantation of trees will be completed in the construction period so that sustainable growth is achieved when the project is completed.

Table 8.3: Specification for Plantation

Issue Description Width of Green Belt 100 m No. of Rows 25 No. of trees per Ha. 2500 Total Trees to be planted 2,68,875 Spacing between the plants 4 m Size of Pits 60 x 60 x 60 cm Height of Plant Not less than 2 m Age of Plant Not less than 3 Years Hedge Plantation Spacing between the plants 3m Size of the pits 20 x 20 x 20 cm No. of plants per Km (road) 333 Height of plant Not less than one 1 ft Age of plant Not less than I year

The Location of Green belt is given in the Figure 8.1. Greenbelt development of plan is summarized in Table 8.4.

Table 8.4: Number of trees to be planted under green belt development

Location No. of trees to be planted

00 190,875

A 10,300

B 11,075


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Location No. of trees to be planted

C 30,875

D 2,425

E 4,375

F 10,950

Road 8,000

Total 2,68,875

The trees would be varying heights and plantation would be made in such a manner that plants do not form any impermeable barrier to the wind. The taller trees will be planted in the boundary area. The area surrounding the site is marked as ‘00’ in the figure and the species suggested are given in Table 8.5.

Table 8.5: Species Suggested for Greenbelt along Boundary Scientific name Common

Name Remark

Tall Trees Casuarina equisitifoli Jhau Evergreen tree, attracts coastal birds,

Fine needle like grey / green foliage, often used as a windbreak

Albizzia lebbeck Siris Fast-growing tree Polylathia longifolia Ashok Evergreen handsome tree with

pendent linear leaves. Sizygium cuminii Jamun Evergreen tree, with smooth, glossy

leaves. Ficus infectoria Pilkhan Large spreading evergreen tree with

aerial roots. Tamarindus indica Amli Avenue tree with an intermediate air

pollution tolerance index Middle sized tree Alstonia scholaris, Saptparni evergreen and glabrous. Leaves occur

in whorls of 3-10. Azadirachta indica Neem Tolerant to most soil types. deciduous

tree. Good purifier of air Dalbergia sissoo Shisham Deciduous tree, used in agroforestry.

It is used as a windbreak and shelter belt

Cassia siamea Kasod A fast growing, high crown. Multipurpose tree

Butea monosperma Dhak Salt-tolerance


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Species suggested in the area B, C D and E: Albizzia lebbeck (Siris), Polylathia longifolia (Ashok), Sizygium cuminii (Jamun), Azadirachta indica (Neem), Moringa olieifera (Drumstick), Mangifera indica (Mango) Zizyphus nummularia (Ber)

These species suggested for stabilization of Fly ash in the area A : Albizia lebbeck (Siris), Casuarina equisetifolia (Jhau) Dalbergia sissoo (Sheesham) Pongamia pinnata (Karanj), Azadirachta indica (Neem),Terminalia arjuna (Arjun), Acacia nilotica (baval), Zizyphus mauritiana (Ber), Pithecellobium dulce (Jungle jalebi)

Plantation of grasses species is also suggested in this area - Cynodon dactylon, Echinochloa colona, Eragrostis cynosuroides, Heteropogon contortus, Sacharum bengalense, Sehima nervosum, Sporobolus coromendelines.

The Species suggested in area F: Albizzia lebbeck (Siris), Melia azaderach (Bakamlimbodo), Dalbergia sissoo (Sheesham), Pongamia pinnata (Karanj), Syzygium cumini(Jamun), Zizyphus nummularia(Ber), Mangifera indica (Mango)

Plantation along Road sides:

Total Road length within the compound of thermal power site is 16 km. The choice of plants for road side will include shrubs of height 1 to 1.5 meter and trees of 3-5 meter height. Medium sized trees, alternating with shrubs are ideal for sorption of particulates and gases. Trees will be planted at 4 m interval in one row and on both sides of the road. 250 plants will be planted on both sides per km. The hedges will be planted at a distance of 3 m and 333 per km.

- Total no. of trees along road : 8,000

- Total no. of Hedges in median : 5,330

Trees species suggested along road are Alstonia scholaris, Azadirachta indica, Ailanthus excels, Acacia nilotica, Delonix regia, Azadirachta indica Cassia siamea and Cassia fistula

Shrub species suggested are: Thuja Species (Moyur Pankhi), Nerium indicum (Kaner), Thevetia neriifolia (Pili Kaner), Hibiscus rosa sinensis(Gurhal) Tecoma undulate(Rugtrora), Bougainvillea spectabilis(Bougainvillea).

In addition to the green belt, extensive afforestation in township, plant and all community buildings of the project will be undertaken and the species to be planted will be of ornamental nature. Addition, lawn development will be


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

integral part of afforestation of these areas. Flowers and ornamental plants will be planted in office premises and fruit bearing trees in residential areas. The entire project subsequent to completion of green belt and afforestation would get transformed into a pleasant and enjoyable site.

A comprehensive list of plants is prepared as Annex 8.1

Plantation of Casuarina equisitifoli (Jhau), Acacia nilotica (Baval), Delonix regia (Gulmohar), Ipomea can be done along coastal area to prevent coastal erosion.

Protection & Precautionary Measures

Barbed wire fencing around the plantation area may be provided to protect the plants.

Plantation activity to be carried out in monsoon season

The height of plant s should not be less than 1 ft

All plants supplied must planted within three days of removal from the nursery

The Plants must be watered daily in initial stages; watering 2-3 times a week is a must.

2 kg of compost / manure is suggested for each pit before plantation. Farmyard manure (FYM) in 1:4 proportion should be mixed

To ensure better growth and survival of plants, surface should have sufficient soil (upto 45cm depth)

Nurseries can be developed by local habitants with technical guidance from forest department so that saplings are available locally for Green belt development.

Continuous monitoring of plant growth, immediate replacement of causalities, supplementation of nutrients, rescheduling watering regime are important aspects for survival of the plantation.

The Plantation program would consist of a mixture of locally available fast growing species of trees and shrubs .Some of the Pollution tolerant species are given in the Table below

A comprehensive list of plants suggested for plantation in the area in the table below. The species include leguminous species, Fly ash tolerant, pollution tolerant plants, soil stabilizing species, multipurpose plants and fruit bearing trees. A budgetary breakup for greenbelt development plan is given in Table 8.6.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 8.6: Budget for Green Belt Development

S.No Description No. Rate Amount

1. Plantation of trees & its maintenance for 3 years (watering, fertilizer)

2,68,875 300 8,06,62,500

2 Plantation of hedge & its maintenance for 3 years

5,330 200 10,66,000

3 Grass plantation Lumpsum 10,500

Total 8,17,39,000

The estimated cost for green belt development is 8,17,39,000 (Eight Crore, Seventeen Lakh, Thirty Nine Thousand only).

8.7 Groundwater Recharge

A spreading channel of 1500m long and bottom width of 1.0m with a slope 0.5: 1 is proposed for recharging the groundwater. The groundwater recharge by providing spread channel will prevent sea water intrusion. The estimated cost of this channel is Rs.18,61,000. Details are discussed in Geohydrological study conducted by M S University of Baroda. In addition to this, area demarcated ash slurry pond will be used for rainwater harvesting during construction phase.

8.8 Pasture Land Development

The Project area is predominantly agricultural area. Cattle rearing are major activity in the area besides agriculture. Buffaloes, Cows, sheep and goats are the common animals reared in the area. These animals feed on the agricultural remains and on the nearby common land (Gauchar) along the villages. These common lands (gauchar) are denuded and need to be developed to provide good grazing field for the cattle. There is total 2955.89-ha (13.11% of total land), cultivable wasteland in the villages in the study area. These lands provide an opportunity to be developed as pastureland with better yield and high variety of grass. Technique for development of the pasture land is suggested below.

Clearing of Bushes: The Grasslands are infested by undesirable bushes, shrubs etc. (Zizyphus Calotropis, Lantana), these bushes must be cleared as they compete for space and nutrients besides being poisonous for grazing.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Conservation of Soil: It is the most important step for development of pasture land. The conservation of soil involves application of fertilizer, moisture retention and control erosion by plantation and drainage management. The grasses show good response to the application of nitrogen fertilizer, however application of farmyard manure is recommended. Application of Farmyard manure will not only improve the fertility of the soil but also its structure and water holding capacity. Fertilizers can be applied once in 2-3 years to keep the grass species in optimum botanical composition and high production level

Plantation of Grass and Leguminous species: Plantation of grass and leguminous species is recommended due to their complimentary functioning in providing nutritive succulent, palatable forage for the grazing animals. In addition they are capable of producing much greater quantities of digestible dry matter and protein throughout the growing season. Legumes enhance the forage value and also add substantially the much needed nitrogen to the soil. The mixtures of grass-legume improve the physical condition of the soil, check soil erosion, resist the encroachment of weeds and withstand the vagaries of weather. The species suggested for plantation are given in the following Table.

Scientific Name Common name Pennisetum purpureum Napier grass Panicum maximum Guinea grass Lasiurus sindicus Grasses Species Dichanthium annulatum Grasses Species Cenchrus cilaris Anjan grass Panicum antidotale Millet Glycine hispida Soybean Dolichos lablab Lablab Bean Atylosia scarabaeoides Banulthi Luceana leucophloea Subabool Acacia farmesiana Vilayati babool Acacia nilotica Babool Prosopis cineraria Khejri Hardwickia binata Anjan Albizia lebbeck Siris

Multi-purpose tree plant and grass species have a special significance in fulfilling the objectives of improving environment as well as needs of the people. During lean periods of spring and summer trees come to the rescue of livestock. The young leafy succulent material serves highly nutritive and rich in crude protein and minerals. The tree species can be


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

planted along the boundaries and in rows in the grassland. The trees must be planted 5-7 meters apart during monsoon. The fodder from the trees is available after 4-5 years. Tree guards shall be provided during the initial growth period.

Maintenance of Pastureland: Maintenance of pastureland will be done for the optimum utilization of the land. During the development of the land a guard should be appointed for watering, applying manure/fertilizer and protecting the plantation. Tree guards must be provided for initial 3 years.

The development of the pasture land can be taken in consultation and technical assistance from BAIF or State Forest Department. SPEGPL will provide the financial assistance for training and development of pasturelands, and plantation. The Village Panchayat must be involved in this process.

The money provided for pasture is lump sum amount which will be approximately Rs 30,000 per ha. The total amount for pasture land development is Rs 30,00,000/= (Rs Thirty Lakhs).

8.9 Herbal Garden Development

Development of Herbal Garden will help to conserve the medicinal plants as well as generate income and employment for the local inhabitants. The species suggested for development of herbal garden are given below. Development of herbal garden should be taken up in consultation with Forest / Agriculture department. Technical guidance can be also taken from State Medicinal Plant Board, Gandhinagar. Village panchayat should be involved in this activity and training will be provided by SPEGPL to at least 2 persons from each panchayat.

Table 8.7: Species suggested for Plantation in Herbal Garden

S. No Scientific Name Common Name A Trees 1. Azadirachta indica Neem 2. Terminalia arjuna Arjun 3. Terminalia chebula Harade 4. Terminalia bellirica Baheda 5. Saraca indica Ashok 6. Tecomella undulate Ragat Rohido B Shrubs 1. Commiphora wightii Guggal 2. Murraya koenigii Mitho Limdo 3. Tecoma stans Sonpaati 4. Lawsonia inermis Mehndi 5. Cassia tora Kuvadiyo 6. Zizyphus mauritiana Bor


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

S. No Scientific Name Common Name C Herbs& Climbers 1. Asparaus racemosa Satavari 2. Ocimum sanctum Tulsi 3. Bacopa monnieri Neer brahmi 4. Plumbago zeylanica Chitrak 5. Aloe vera Kuvar Pathu 6. Cassia angustifolia Senna 7. Arbus precatorius Chanothi

It is proposes to develop an area of 2ha as herbal garden. A lumpsum budget Rs 2 lakh is proposed for training and development of Herbal Garden.

8.10 Corporate Social Responsibility

The Shapoorji Pallonji (SP) Group is planning to set up Thermal Power Plant and port project in Kodinar Taluk, Junagad district, Gujarat. For these projects SP Group is in the process purchiasing land through negotiation. SP Group is aware that the Corporate Social Responsibility towards the land owners and population of the surrounding areas extends beyond the payment of compensation to the land owners.

SP group is committed for fulfillment of its social obligation under Corporate Social Responsibility. The scheme addresses the issue of Community Development (CD) in the neighbourhood area of Project. SP group has carried out a preliminary Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA) of the area through Gujarat Rural Institute for Socio-Economic Reconstruction, Vadodara (GRISERV), which isan Associate Organisation of BAIF to assess the needs of the local communities. SP group has entered into five years MOU with BAIF for planning and implementing CSR activities. Copy of MoU is enclosed herewith for reference in Annex 8.2.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

CSR action plan, in principle, aims at adoption of Charra, Sarakhadi, Kaj, and Nanawada villages for overall improvement in quality of life of the residents.

To ensure comprehensive development of the villages, a building-from-below approach was adopted to identify the immediate needs with focus on enrichment of natural resources and infrastructural development for socio-economic services.

8.10.1 Project Area Profile

The project area covers four villages namely, Chhara, Sarakhadi, Kaj and Nanavada.

8.10.2 Situation Analysis

Based on the secondary data collected on the socio-economic status of the project villages and direct interaction with members of different communities, the study team has identified the major issues which will be promoted under CSR activities.

8.10.3 Objectives of the Project

The overall objectives of the project are:

• To create opportunities of gainful self-employment for assured livelihood of the villagers living in four villages located around SP Energy and Port Projects through farm-based and natural resources-based interventions;

• Improve quality of life of the communities living in SP Project villages; • To develop People’s Organisations at the grass-root level to sustain

various socio-economic development activities promoted through this project.

8.10.4 Project Components

To promote sustainable livelihood and improve the quality of life of the people living in the project affected villages, various on-farm and off-farm activities will be promoted. These include livestock development, fishery, watershed development, sustainable agriculture including agri-horti-forestry, afforestation and silvipasture development, women empowerment, community health, improvement in literacy through support to formal and non-formal education, capacity building of the unemployed youth through skill oriented vocational training and development of community organisations to sustain these development programmes, while establishing backward and forward integration to strengthen their enterprises.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

However, the key to success of this programme is involvement of the local community right from the stage of programme planning and assuming responsibility in efficient implementation. To attract large sections of the society to take active part, the programme will be launched through some entry point activities, which will benefit most of the population in these villages. Such activities will also help in gaining confidence of the local participants and seek cooperation to implement other activities with keen interest.

The proposed activities are based on the needs as covered in Table 8.8.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 8.8: Sector-wise Problems and Suggested Solutions S.N. PROBLEMS POSSIBLE REASONS SUGGESTIVE SOLUTIONS/ ACTIVITIES A. AGRICULTURE 1. Lack of water storage Promote Water harvesting measures Create awareness in people

Underground water salty Ground water recharging Poor quality inputs Use of scientific technology to increase productivity, vermicompost etc

Low productivity Lack of knowledge Organise awareness and training program

B. WATERSHED DEVELOPMENT 1. Soil erosion Less usage of Organic

fertilisers Promote use of bio-fertilizers

2. Less fertile soil Less use of biofertilisers Training and crop demonstration-soil analysis 3. Disease and

pests Inadvertent use of chemical fertilisers

Use of optimum chemical fertilizers

Provide training in seed nourishment, Crop change and use of improved seeds 4. Low Productivity To give information of good quality of seeds and to train how to use them

Use of poor quality seeds

Provide information about the places for availability of good seeds To disseminate information on agricultural aspects Low level of education Organise training programmes

No link between farmers and

agricultural research Organise knowledge tours and exposure visit

C. ANIMAL HUSBANDRY 1. Low milk

production Poor quality animals Breed improvement through cross breeding

2. Animal diseases

Lack of nutritious fodder Promote plantation of fodder species, Promote community plantation and forestry programs

Excess number of unproductive animals

Workshops on A.H. training and good dairy practices

Vaccination not done Vaccination and use of de-worming


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 8.8: Sector-wise Problems and Suggested Solutions S.N. PROBLEMS POSSIBLE REASONS SUGGESTIVE SOLUTIONS/ ACTIVITIES

Organize veterinary camp for the cattle stock. 3 Goat

Development Lack knowledge on animal diseases

Organise Goat Development program

4 Fishery Neglected. Suffer due to low catch and poor price recovery

Provide support for infrastructure

D. HUMAN HEALTH AND SOCIAL SECTOR Organise regular immunization program for children and medical checkup in schools 1. Human Health Lack of Health facilities Supporting health facility by way of providing health staff including ambulance facility

Migration School-based programmes No opportunity for employment Provide community infrastructure, upgradation of community health / potable water/ Sanitation/ education facilities.

2.

Traditional methods Training No gainful self-employment opportunities

Create Income Generating Activities like development of dairy, aquaculture, food processing, pickle making, handicraft, cultural troupe etc.

3. Employment

To get Income by setting SHG groups Embroidery , tailoring etc through SHG

Organize skill development /vocational training . Sponsoring persons for vocational training, ITI training, Computer training etc

Scholarship for the selected local children for studying in near by schools

Youth are unemployed

Provide Sports facility to promote sports in the area.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

8.10.5 Entry Point Activities

Some of the important activities which are useful to large sections of the society will be taken up as entry point activities, by immediately posting the field officers. These are listed below:

a) Village Health Camps: There are a large number of people, particularly poor who are suffering from various illnesses. Health camps will be organised in every village for a day. The dates will be fixed well in advance and wide publicity will be given in all the villages through distribution of hand bills, local cable network, local leaders, Gram Panchayat members, schools and by establishing direct contact with general public. Doctors will attend the health camps to examine the patients and medicines will be provided for minor ailments. Patients will be referred to specialists for treating major health problems. Such village level health camps will be carried out once a year during the first three years. Further assistance will be provided to needy patients to enable them to avail of proper treatment.

b) Village Level Cattle Camps: The BAIF team which visited these villages for conducting PRA realised the scope for promoting dairy husbandry as an important income generation activity. Thus, through health camps, the farmers can be motivated to take active part in this programme.

c) Support for Educational Institutions: The primary schools and anganwadis in these villages need support in terms of building new rooms and repairing the existing buildings. These schools are also deprived of toilet units. They also need special kits for introducing various sports/games and practical sessions. Thus, an effective dialogue will be established with the school administrators and required facilities will be provided.

d) Road Improvement: Many of the internal roads in these villages are in a poor condition. Thus, in coordination with the local Gram Panchayats repair of major internal roads in these villages will be organised. Solar street lights will be provided in critical areas which pose a threat to the safety of the people.

e) Drinking Water facilities: Poor quality drinking water has been the major cause of illness in these 4 villages. Hence, provision of safe drinking water is the basic necessity for the local population in all these villages. Looking to the need and its impact on health and quality of life, supply of safe drinking water in these four villages would be an important CSR activity.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

f) Supply of safe drinking water involves two components – firstly, development of potable water resources and secondly, distribution. Efforts will be made to promote watershed development and rainwater harvesting in the project villages to recharge the ground water and thereby improve the quality of water in local wells. Development of infrastructure for water storage primarily involves construction of water storage tank followed by laying out of distribution pipes to major hamlets / colonies in the villages. As an entry point activity, it is proposed to take one village where drinking water source is already available by construction of an overhead tank during the first year.

g) Drinking water for livestock is also a problem, particularly when livestock is let out for grazing. Therefore, it is proposed to construct 10 water troughs with shed for providing drinking water for livestock.

h) Looking to the success of this initiative, a suitable strategy for providing drinking water for other villages can be developed in the subsequent years, for which a separate budget will be proposed.

i) Sanitation: Through demonstration on importance of bathing platform and toilets, the project proposes to provide support for procurement of physical inputs for establishing bathing platforms and toilets for 200 families in the project areas. The selected families belonging to weaker sections of the society, who have interest in taking up this activity are expected to make their contribution to cover a part of the cost in the form of cash or labour. This will ensure that they will use this facility. Looking to the initial response, other families may come forward for taking up a similar initiative, for which finance will be raised from various on-going projects of the Government of Gujarat.

j) Renovation of Cremation Ground: The villagers of 3 villages have expressed their difficulty in using the cremation ground and expressed the need for renovating the cremation ground. Hence, it is proposed to take up renovation in 3 villages during the first year.

8.10.6 Watershed Development

The aim of this programme is to develop natural resources of the area through watershed development. The primary objective of the watershed development project is to ensure drinking water security and to boost agriculture and livestock production, particularly to benefit weaker sections of the community. This is also considered as an opportunity to conserve the ecosystem, empower the women and to develop community-based organisations which are essential for promoting sustainable development. The focus of this programme is based on the following strategy.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

• Participation of the entire community with special focus on the weaker sections, in planning and implementation;

• Efficient water conservation with appropriate technologies and systems;

• Prepare a land use plan for the areas covered under the watershed and help the members of the communities to make optimum use of their private and community lands, depending on the productivity;

• Convergence for holistic development, particularly for food and water security, supply of drinking water, health and hygiene and environmental conservation.

Watershed development activities will also include excavation of new farm ponds, deepening and revival of existing ponds, recharging of old open wells and borewells, installation of hand pumps and revival of old hand pumps, land shaping through contour bunding, gully plugging and construction of small and large check dams. As a follow up of the watershed development programme, series of demonstrations will be organised for cultivating suitable and improved varieties. Farmers in the watershed will be organized to establish forward and backward linkages for enhancing their profitability.

8.10.7 Animal Husbandry

A large number of farmers have cows and buffaloes. Cows yield 3 to 4 litres of milk per day whereas buffaloes yield 5 to 6 litres per day. There are milk cooperatives recently started by NDDB and farmers get a good price for milk. They get Rs.15 to 17 per litre for cow’s milk and Rs.20 to 22 per litre for buffalo milk. There is good potential for dairying and it can help the villagers as a regular source of major income generating activity.

There is one Government ICPD centre in the area but no awareness on Artificial Insemination technique. As most of the farmers go for agricultural labour and work, they cannot take their animals long distance for breeding. There are plenty of cows and buffaloes and there is good opportunity for milk production if proper breeding services are made available in the area. If cattle breeding centre is located in the area, it can cater to the needs of breeding at farmers’ doorsteps. This will surely benefit farmers by way of increase in milk production, breed improvement, nutritional supplementation and economic stability.

Therefore, major emphasis will be given on livestock development. The activities under livestock development include establishment of a cattle development centre for providing breeding services to cattle and buffaloes providing minor veterinary services through periodic health camps,


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

vaccination against important diseases, deworming, distribution of fodder seeds for production of fodder, training of farmers in balanced feeding of animals and organising the farmers for collection and marketing of milk. As there is already a milk cooperative, milk collection and marketing will not require any additional effort or cost. .

Apart from cattle and buffaloes, there are also families who are maintaining sheep and goats and few other families are dependent on fishery. Small farmers with limited resources prefer goats than to maintain large animals. Although, many of them have local goats, their productivity is low due to poor breeding facilities, health care and marketing facilities. With a view to demonstrate eco-friendly goat development programme, it is proposed to promote goat breeders’ groups who will be provided with bucks for providing breeding services to their females. Poor families who do not have goats, particularly marginal and landless families will be provided with 3 female goats to earn their livelihood through goat husbandry.

To promote better feeding of livestock, fodder cultivation will be encouraged through demonstration of fodder plots, to benefit over 800 families during the project period. These families will also be provided hand operated chaff cutters to cut the fodder into small pieces before feeding, to avoid wastage and to improve the digestibility of the feed. 300 selected families belonging to BPL will also be given special nutritional supplement to feed their female calves born under this programme. With such feed supplementation, these females will come into milk production at an early age and yield high. With this support, these poor families will have a reliable source of income from dairy husbandry. It has been observed that a family maintaining 3 crossbred cows can earn about Rs.30000 - 35,000 per year and come out of poverty. Thus, this programme is likely to make a very significant impact in these villages to eradicate poverty.

8.10.8 Agriculture Development

BAIF has also been the pioneer in promoting agri-horti-forestry, popularly known as Wadi programme, wherein poor families owning degraded land are supported with necessary inputs and technology to establish such wastelands into fruit orchards. To ensure year round employment, various food and vegetable crops are introduced in between fruit plants in the wadi. Necessary irrigation facilities are created to ensure low mortality and better growth. With such a well planned programme, the participating families are able to earn their livelihood throughout the year right from the first year. The major income starts from the fifth year, with fruit trees starting to bear. Such wadi plots of 0.4 ha generate an income of Rs.30,000-40,000 per year while ensuring food and fodder security. It is proposed to provide


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

support to about 60-80 families to establish such wadis under the project. The farmers interested in wadi will be selected during the first year and the work will commence at the end of the first year itself. Fruit orchards will also help in enhancing green cover in the surroundings.

8.10.9 Employment Generation in Non-farm Sector

There is a sizeable number of unemployed youth looking for employment opportunities in the villages. As many of them are not keen to work on their farms, either because of low holding or because of low agriculture productivity, it is proposed to organise a series of skill oriented training after assessing the potential for employment and the interest of the youth.

The aim is to empower these trained youth to get self-employed in locally emerging service sector as well as seek employment in industries in and outside the project area. The trained youth are provided with basic tool kits to pursue their profession. They are also assisted to establish link with the bank to draw loan to expand their business. Training will also be provided to youth engaged in agriculture, animal husbandry and horticulture as well to improve their skills and to pursue new activities in agri-business.

There are also a few fishermen families, where the youth are desperately looking for support to pursue their family profession. Unfortunately, their income has been significantly low because of poor catch and value addition. It is therefore proposed to organise training for the youth of fishermen community and help them to organise their groups to take up fishery as a competitive business. The fishermens’ groups will be provided support for developing necessary infrastructure and linking their produce to market through cold chain.

8.10.10 Women in Development

In rural societies, women share the bigger burden of the household work. Their contribution to agricultural production is also very high. In Gujarat, most of the operations in dairying are the sole responsibility of women. Even though they are the key contributors to production systems, very often they do not have equal access and control on the resources. Efforts will be made to enhance their capacity building, help reduce the drudgery and organise women groups to strengthen their capacity apart from enhancing their self image and self esteem. All these efforts would promote women’s participation in mainstream development activities. Women also can play a very important role in general health care of the family which in turn can help improve the community health in the project.

As part of the women empowerment programme, effective communication will be established among the women of different sections of the society.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

They will be motivated to form their SHGs with members belonging to homogenous, socio-economic status. They will be motivated to attend the meetings regularly wherein various skills are imparted from time to time. They will also participate in need assessment and identifying major problems affecting their health, education and income generation activities. Based on the feedback from these groups, suitable modifications will be made in the proposed activities.

There is a need to promote literacy through new anganwadis or by improving the facilities at existing anganwadis and schools to encourage large number of children to attend school. There will be a close interaction with the schools to assess their needs. Based on their needs, various supports will be provided to repair their school building, or to provide them with necessary play and study kits. Sanitation units will be constructed in every school where such facilities are not available.

8.10.11 Implementation of CSR Plan

The CSR activities will be implemented through Gujarat Rural Institute for Socio-Economic Reconstruction, Vadodara (GRISERV) which is an Associate Organisation of BAIF Development Research Foundation (BAIF). GRISERV was established in the year 1985 to provide sustainable livelihood to rural poor and improve their quality of life, while conserving their precious natural resources. GRISERV is registered under the Bombay Public Trust Act 1950 as a voluntary public trust.

Project Team: 5 staff members in all, including the Coordinator are proposed for the period of five years.

Table 8.9: Project Team and its Working Sr. No. Staff Roles and Responsibility

• Overall in-charge for all the project activities • Keeping liaison with all stakeholders for the services • Compile and send progress report to all concerned

1. Project Coordinator

• Arranging training as and when required for staff and families

• One for Animal Husbandry activities 2. Field Officer (2) • One for promoting water resource management and

agriculture 3. Social Worker

(Preference for women)

• Organise women SHGs • Promote micro-finance • Support micro-enterprises

4. Accounts Assistant

• To maintain accounts, keep date and facilitate procurement of inputs.

5. Field Guides / Village

• He/she will help the centre in charge in arranging meetings, activities in the villages


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 8.9: Project Team and its Working Sr. No. Staff Roles and Responsibility

• Will work as local link between villagers and project team.• Inform villages about vaccination, de worming , infertility

camps etc • Organise community health activities and community

welfare activities etc. • Gather data and record of different activities like baseline

survey about dairy animals , feeding practices etc. • Follow up of animals especially after infertility camps and

inform the project staff

Motivators To be taken locally on honorarium basis whenever required

• Organise community health and community welfare activities etc.

Project Review Committee: To achieve the desired impact of this development project, a review committee will be constituted. The Review Committee will consist of the following members.

Head of the Project (Nominated by SP) : Chairman

Representative of SP from site/Head Office : Member

Executive Vice Chairman of GRISERV-BAIF : Member

Chief Programme Coordinator of GRISERV : Member

Officer in-charge of CSR at site of SP : Member-Convenor

A representative of the Government of Gujarat may also be considered as a member.

The above Committee will function under the Chairmanship of a representative from the TPP. Committee will meet at least once in every month to deliberate on matters relating to the implementation of this integrated development project to cover the following aspects:

i. Review the project progress

ii. Approval of the action plan and budget for the next month

iii. Advise on-going and new activities

iv. Recommend, if any, changes or additional budget needed to meet the field needs.

Reporting System: A monthly progress report will be submitted to all concerned by the 10th of every month.

The Financial report will be submitted quarterly. The annual audited report will also be submitted. GRISERV will produce the audited report and utilisation certificate from the authorised Auditor appointed by BAIF. At the end of the year, a yearly report will also be prepared and submitted. The


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

financial year will be considered from April to March from the suitability point of view.

8.10.12 Budget

The overall budget for implementation of the proposed activities under CSR is Rs.29.609 Crores. Item wise breakup is presented in Table 8.10.

Table 8.10: Budget for Implementation of CSR Activities (Till May 2015) CSR Activity Total Cost (INR)Mobilization 10,00,000Health Camps 4 per year for Human & Cattle : Rs. 5 lakh per camp (4 x2x5x5)

2,00,00,000

School Infrastructure Improvement : 10 schools x 20 L each

2,00,00,000

PHC Infrastructure Support : 10 PHC x 10 L each 1,00,00,000Crematorium / Road Improvement 2,00,00,000Water Supply Units: 20 Nos x 5 L each 1,00,00,000Support for Community Halls, 4 nos x 150 L each 6,00,00,000Fisherman Endowment Fund 1,00,00,000Water Resource Development 2,00,00,000Productivity Enhancement in Animal Husbandry 1,00,00,000Productivity Enhancement in Agriculture 2,00,00,000Pasture Land Development 1,00,00,000Income Generation Assistance for Landless, Youth & Women

1,00,00,000

Educational Assistance to Students from EWS 1,00,00,000Training & Capacity Building 1,00,00,000Establishing School 2,00,00,000Establishing ITI 1,00,00,000Establishing Mobile Hospital 25,00,000Establishing Mobile Vet Facility 25,00,000Ecological Mapping & Eco-Improvement 2,00,00,000Scholarship for students (recurring , @ 500 per month for 15 students)

90,000

29,60,90,0008.10.13 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY FOR SPEGPL – A MODEL

It is recommended that SPEGPL should implement environmental management system conforming to ISO 14001:2007 and occupational health and safety management system conforming OHSAS 180001:2007. As a first step, SPEGPL will adopt policy with the following commitments.

• SPEGPL endeavour to provide cost-effective and competitive facilities and services required, with minimum adverse impact on the natural and social environment.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

• Environment friendly infrastructure facilities with appropriately designed measures for pollution control shall be implemented. Resource conservation and pollution control will be practiced throughout the port operations by motivating staff at all levels.

• Required resources, expertise & training will be provided to its staff by SPEGPL to ensure continuous improvement in the environmental quality of the surrounding of the port.

• Compliance with all relevant environmental legislation and government policies and aim for best industry practice in all aspects of the port operations shall be ensured. Frequent monitoring of environmental quality surrounding the port shall be carried out.

• Continual improvement in the environmental performance of the port shall be ensured.

• Resource shall be used efficiently and wastes shall be minimized.

• Environmental Management Plans and Emergency Plans to protect the environment shall be developed and maintained.

• Environmental performance of the Power Plant shall be communicated openly and honestly to key stakeholders, government and the general community.

• Environmental objectives of the Power Plant shall be achieved by working in co-operation with other organizations.

• All employees shall be accountable for environmental performance in their area so that they carry out their duties in accordance with legislation and Power Plant requirement.

• To the extent reasonably practicable, it will be ensured that contractors engaged by SPEGPL, meet the environmental standards and requirements and comply with relevant legislation.

8.11 INSTITUTIONAL SETUP FOR EMP

The implementation of the mitigation measures and effective monitoring of the environment during construction & operation stages will be possible by using reputed institutional mechanism. Implementation of the Power Plant’s Environmental Policy and Environmental Management Plan is the responsibility of the SPEGPL. The Institutional Setup for implementation of Environmental Management Plan and Power Plant’s Environmental Policy is given in Figure 8.2.


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

It is proposed to have a full fledged multi-disciplinary Environmental Management Department (EMD) having key functions of environmental safety & occupational health for management of entire Power Plant and surrounding environment. The EMD will be supervised at Plant Site by an officer of the rank of General Manager (Environment). Environmental Scientists/Engineers and Chemists as mentioned below will report to GM (Environment).

- Environment Chemist

- Environment Scientist (Terrestrial Ecology)

- Environmental Scientist (Aquatic Ecology)

Figure-8.2: Institutional Setup for Environment Management

The roles/responsibilities and qualification of the environmental person is given in the following table.

Environmental Professional in EMD

Specialisation Professional required

Qualification Exposure / Experience

Roles / Responsibilities

EIA Compliance Head -Environment

MSc/M Tech Environmental Science/ Engineering

10 years Overall EMP implementation, liaison with regulatory bodies.

Environment Chemist - 1

Environmental Scientist - 1 (Terrestrial)

Environmental Scientist - 1

(Aquatic)

Head Environment

CEO

Thermal Power Project


DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Water & Air Quality

Environment Chemist-1

M.Sc in Chemistry

3 years of working Experience in CSIR/CPCB approved labs or 5 years of monitoring experience

Monitor Air, Water, Soil and Noise quality parameters & EMP Compliance

Aquatic Ecologist

Environmental Scientist-1

M.Sc Zoology / Microbiology/ specilisation in Fisheries

5 years of working Experience

Monitor aquatic ecology (Phytoplankton/ Zooplankton/ Fishes) & EMP Compliance

Terrestrial Ecology

Environmental Scientist-1

M.Sc Environmental Science/ Botany/ Forestry/ Zoology

5 years of working Experience

Monitor Terrestrial Flora and Fauna & EMP Compliance

8.12 Environmental Budget

A capital cost provision of about Rs. 10,66,05,000 (Ten Crore, Sixty Six Lakh, Five Thousand only) has been kept towards implementation of environmental management plan. The budgetary cost estimate for greenbelt development, environmental monitoring, training & mobilization and Groundwater recharge is elaborated in Table 8.11

Project EIA for 2 x 660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Villages Kaj/Nanavada, in Page 254 Kodinar Taluka, in Junagadh District, Gujarat Document: 2010006/EC February 2011 Chapter 8 : Environmental Management Plan Revision : R0

DRAFT FINAL REPORT

Table 8.11: Environmental Budget Component Stage Item Unit Quantity Cost

(Rs.) Total Cost (INR)

Plantation Cost (A) Plantation Construction Plantation of trees & its

maintenance for 3 years Nos. 2,68,875 300 8,06,62,500

Plantation of hedge & its maintenance for 3 years

Nos. 5,330 200 10,66,000

Grass plantation Lumpsum - - 10,500 Pasture Land Development

Construction Plantation of grasses and fodder species

Ha 100 30,000 30,00,000

Herbal Garden Construction Plantation of Medicinal Plants Ha 2 1,00,000 2,00,000 Total (A) 8,49,39,000

Environmental Monitoring Cost - Construction Period (B) Ambient Air Quality

Construction1 Two days monitoring at 3 location quarterly

No. of samples

168 6,000 10,08,000

Surface Water Quality

Construction1 Monitoring at 2 locations twice a year for 3.5 years

No. of samples

14 10000 1,40,000

Soil Construction1 Monitoring at 1 locations twice a year for 3.5 years

No. of samples

7 5000 35,000

Marine Ecology Construction1 Monitoring at 6 locations two times a year for 3.6 years

No. of samples

42 30,000 12,60,000

Noise Level Construction1 Monitoring at 2 locations Quarterly for 3.5 years

No. of samples

26 1,500 39,000

Total (B) 24,82,000

Environmental Monitoring Cost-Operation Phase (C ) Ambient Air Operation2 Monitoring at 4 locations twice a No. of 416 6,000 24,96,000


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



Quality week samples * Meteorology Operation2 One observatory, hourly and daily

basis Daily 365 1000 3,65,000

Stack Emission Operation2 Once a Fortnight No. of samples

24 3000 72,000

Operation2 Monitoring at 3 locations monthly (Physical & chemical)

No. of samples

36 4000 1,44,000

Operation2 Bacteriological Parameters once a year at 3 locations

No. of samples

3 1000 3,000

Surface Water Quality

Operation2 Heavy Metals & toxic constituents once in three months at 3 locations

No. of samples

12 4000 48,000

Operation2 Monitoring at 4 locations monthly (Physical & chemical)

No. of samples

48 4000 1,92,000

Operation2 Bacteriological Parameters once a year at 4 locations

No. of samples

4 1000 4,000

Ground Water Quality

Operation2 Heavy Metals & toxic constituents once in three months at 4 locations

No. of samples

16 4000 64,000

Soil Operation2 Monitoring for 5 locations once in three year

No. of samples

5 5000 20,000

Operation2 Plantation survival rate, twice a year lumpsum 2 25,000 50,000 Operation2 Symptoms of injuries on plants

within 10 km radius of power plant-Annually

lumpsum 1 50,000 50,000 Terrestrial Ecology

Operation2 Avifauna of the area once a year lumpsum 1 100,000 1,00,000 Marine Ecology Operation Monitoring at 6 locations four times

a year No. of

samples 24 30,000 7,20,000

Noise Level Operation2 Monitoring at 6 locations Quarterly No. of 24 1,500 36,000


DRAFT FINAL REPORT



samples Total (C) 43,64,000

Training & Mobilization & Safety Cost (D) Facilities and Equipment

Construction & Operation

Onsite Monitoring kit, computer, original software, scanner, printer, furniture and other stationary for Environmental Management Cell

Set 4 4,00,000 16,00,000

Training and Mobilization

Construction & Operation

Lump sum Lump sum 10,00,000

Health Camps Construction Period Health Camp for labours Half Yearly for 3.5 years

No. 7 2,00,000 14,00,000

Ground water recharge

Construction Period Lump sum 18,61,000

Total (D) 58,61,000

Plantation Cost (A) 8,49,39,000 Monitoring, Training & Mobilization and CSR Cost (B+C+D) 1,27,07,000

Contingency, PSM & Agency charges @ 9.8% on A 83,24,022 Contingency @ 5% on (B+C+D) 6,35,350

Total Budgeted Cost 10,66,05,372 Say

10,66,05,000 Note: 1) Construction period is 3.5 years

2) Operation Period cost is recurring annually Rs 39,99,000 excluding cost of meteorology (Rs 3,65,000)

(2 X 660 MW )Coal Based Thermal Power Pla

Documents

Transcript of (2 X 660 MW )Coal Based Thermal Power Pla